Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
WARNING
WARNING
ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARD
Do not open the equipment.
Radio Frequency
Radiation Hazard
Only qualified personnel
should work inside the
equipment.
The radar antenna emits electromagnetic
radio frequency (RF) energy which can be
harmful, particularly to your eyes. Never
look directly into the antenna aperture from
a close distance while the radar is in
operation or expose yourself to the trans-
mitting antenna at a close distance.
Turn off the radar power
switch before servicing the
antenna unit. Post a warn-
ing sign near the switch
indicating it should not be
turned on while the antenna
unit is being serviced.
Distances at which RF radiation levels of
100 and 10 W/m2 exist are given in the
table below.
Prevent the potential risk of
being struck by the rotating
antenna and exposure to
RF radiation hazard.
Note: If the antenna unit is installed at a
close distance in front of the wheel house,
your administration may require halt of
transmission within a certain sector of
antenna revolution. This is possible - Ask
your FURUNO representative or dealer to
provide this feature.
Wear a safety belt and hard
hat when working on the
antenna unit.
Distance to
Distance to
2
2
10 W/m
100 W/m
MODEL
Serious injury or death can
result if someone falls from
the radar antenna mast.
point
point
MODEL
1824C-BB
Worst case
0.70 m
Nil
Worst case
1.50 m
MODEL
1834C-BB
Nil
Do not disassemble or modify the
Worst case
0.10 m
equipment.
Worst case
1.70 m
MODEL
1934C-BB
MODEL
1944C-BB
Worst case
1.20 m
Fire, electrical shock or serious injury can
result.
Nil
Worst case
0.20 m
Worst case
2.00 m
XN-12A
XN-13A
XN-12A
XN-13A
MODEL
1954C-
BB
Turn off the power immediately if water
leaks into the equipment or the equip-
ment is emitting smoke or fire.
Worst case
1.40 m
Nil
Worst case
0.50 m
Worst case
5.40 m
MODEL
1964C-
BB
Worst case
0.40 m
Worst case
3.60 m
Continued use of the equipment can cause
fire or electrical shock.
Warning Label
Use the proper fuse.
A warning label is attached to the
equipment. Do not remove the label.
If the label is missing or damaged,
contact a FURUNO agent or dealer.
Fuse rating is shown on the power cable.
Use of a wrong fuse can result in damage
to the equipment.
Name: Warning Label (1)
Type: 86-003-1011-0
Code No.: 100-236-230
WARNING
Keep heater away from equipment.
To avoid electrical shock, do not
remove cover. No user-serviceable
parts inside.
Heat can alter equipment shape and melt
the power cord, which can cause fire or
electrical shock.
i
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TABLE OF CONTENTS
2.9 Presentation Mode..........................2-6
FOREWORD ....................................vi
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION..........viii
2.9.1 Selecting a presentation
mode....................................2-6
2.9.2 Description of presentation
1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW .. 1-1
1.1 Operating Controls..........................1-1
1.1.1 Control unit ..........................1-1
1.2 Inserting a Chart Card ....................1-3
1.3 Turning the Unit On/Off...................1-4
1.4 Adjusting Hue, Panel Illumination...1-5
1.5 Selecting a Display.........................1-6
1.5.1 Display modes .....................1-6
1.5.2 Selecting a display...............1-7
1.5.3 Switching control in
modes ..................................2-7
2.10 Measuring the Range .....................2-8
2.10.1 Measuring range by
range rings...........................2-8
2.10.2 Measuring range by cursor..2-8
2.10.3 Measuring range by VRM....2-9
2.10.4 Various VRM operations......2-9
2.11 Measuring the Bearing..................2-10
2.11.1 Measuring bearing by cursor....
........................................2-10
combination and overlay
2.11.2 Measuring bearing by EBL .......
........................................2-10
screens ................................1-8
1.5.4 Selecting image source .......1-9
1.6 Trackball, Cursor...........................1-10
1.7 Entering the MOB Mark,
2.11.3 Various EBL operations .....2-10
2.12 Erasing the Heading Line,
North Marker.................................2-11
2.13 Reducing Noise Interference........2-11
2.14 Rejecting Radar Interference........2-11
2.15 Zoom.............................................2-12
2.15.1 Zooming radar targets .......2-12
2.15.2 Zooming ARP, TTM targets.......
........................................2-13
Setting MOB as Destination .........1-11
1.8 Data Boxes ...................................1-12
1.8.1 Showing, hiding data boxes
with soft key.......................1-12
1.8.2 Rearranging data boxes ....1-12
1.8.3 Temporarily erasing a
data box .............................1-12
2.16 Shifting the Picture........................2-14
2.16.1 Manual shift........................2-14
2.16.2 Automatic shift ...................2-14
2.17 Using the Offset EBL ....................2-15
2.17.1 Predicting collision course.2-15
2.17.2 Measuring range & bearing
1.9 Function Keys...............................1-13
1.10 Simulation Display........................1-14
2. RADAR OPERATION ............. 2-1
2.1 Radar Display .................................2-1
2.2 Transmitting, Stand-by....................2-1
2.3 Tuning .............................................2-2
2.4 Adjusting the Gain ..........................2-2
2.5 Reducing Sea Clutter .....................2-3
2.5.1 How the A/C SEA works......2-3
between two targets...........2-16
2.18 Echo Trails ....................................2-17
2.18.1 Trail time ............................2-17
2.18.2 Starting echo trails .............2-18
2.18.3 Trail gradation....................2-18
2.18.4 Trail color ...........................2-18
2.18.5 Echo trail mode..................2-19
2.19 Echo Stretch..................................2-19
2.20 Echo Averaging.............................2-20
2.21 Outputting TLL Data......................2-21
2.5.2 Adjusting the A/C SEA.........2-4
2.6 Reducing Precipitation Clutter........2-4
2.6.1 Adjusting the A/C RAIN .......2-4
2.7 Range Scale ...................................2-5
2.8 Pulselength.....................................2-5
ii
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2.22Guard Alarm............................... 2-22
2.22.1Setting a guard alarm zone......
......................................... 2-22
3.5 Chart Cards ..................................3-9
3.5.1 Chart card overview............3-9
3.5.2 Indices and chart enlarge-
2.22.2When the alarm is violated…
......................................... 2-23
ment..................................3-10
3.5.3 Navionics GOLD charts.....3-11
3.5.4 C-MAP charts....................3-14
3.6 Working with Track......................3-18
3.6.1 Displaying track.................3-18
3.6.2 Stopping, restarting plotting of
own ship track...................3-19
2.22.3Cancelling the guard alarm......
......................................... 2-23
2.23Watchman.................................. 2-23
2.23.1How watchman works....... 2-23
2.23.2Turning on/off watchman .. 2-23
2.23.3Setting watchman stand-by
interval ............................. 2-24
3.6.3 Changing track color.........3-19
3.6.4 Track plotting method and
2.24Suppressing Second-trace Echoes....
................................................... 2-24
2.25Waypoint Marker ........................ 2-25
2.26ARP, TTM Operation .................. 2-26
2.26.1Activating/deactivating
interval for own ship track .3-20
3.6.5 Changing own ship track/mark
distribution setting.............3-21
3.6.6 Erasing track.....................3-22
3.7 Marks, Lines ...............................3-23
3.7.1 Entering a mark, line.........3-23
3.7.2 Changing mark attributes..3-24
3.7.3 Selecting line type.............3-24
3.7.4 Erasing marks, lines..........3-25
3.8 Waypoints...................................3-26
3.8.1 Entering waypoints............3-26
3.8.2 Editing waypoint data........3-29
3.8.3 Erasing waypoints.............3-30
3.8.4 Changing waypoint mark size
(Navionics GOLD charts) ..3-31
ARP, TTM......................... 2-27
2.26.2Acquiring and tracking targets
(ARP) ............................... 2-27
2.26.3Displaying target number
(ARP, TTM)....................... 2-29
2.26.4Terminating tracking of ARP
targets.............................. 2-29
2.26.5Setting vector attributes
(ARP) ............................... 2-30
2.26.6Displaying past position
(ARP) ............................... 2-31
3.8.5 Searching waypoints.........3-32
3.9 Routes ........................................3-33
3.9.1 Creating routes .................3-33
3.9.2 Connecting routes.............3-36
3.9.3 Inserting waypoints ...........3-37
3.9.4 Removing waypoints from a
route .................................3-38
3.9.5 Erasing routes...................3-39
3.10Navigation...................................3-39
3.10.1Navigating to a “quick point”.....
.........................................3-39
2.26.7ARP, TTM target data....... 2-31
2.26.8CPA/TCPA alarm (ARP).... 2-32
2.26.9Lost target alarm (ARP).... 2-33
2.27Interpreting the Radar Display.... 2-34
2.27.1False echoes.................... 2-34
2.27.2SART (Search and Rescue
Transponder).................... 2-35
2.27.3Racon (Radar Beacon)..... 2-36
3. PLOTTER OPERATION.........3-1
3.1 Plotter Displays ............................ 3-1
3.1.1 Full-screen plotter display... 3-1
3.1.2 Nav graphic display............ 3-3
3.1.3 Highway display ................. 3-6
3.1.4 Nav data display................. 3-7
3.2 Presentation Mode ....................... 3-8
3.3 Shifting the Display....................... 3-9
3.4 Chart Scale .................................. 3-9
3.10.2Navigating to waypoints ....3-40
3.10.3Navigating to ports, port
services (Nav Chart™ only)
.........................................3-41
3.10.4Following a route...............3-43
3.10.5Canceling route
navigation .........................3-46
iii
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3.11 Alarms...........................................3-47
3.11.1 Audio alarm on/off..............3-47
3.11.2 Arrival alarm.......................3-48
3.11.3 Anchor watch alarm...........3-49
3.11.4 XTE (Cross-Track Error)
4.11.3 Fish alarm ..........................4-16
4.11.4 Fish alarm (B/L) .................4-17
4.11.5 Water temperature alarm...4-17
4.11.6 When an alarm setting is
violated...............................4-18
alarm..................................3-50
4.12 Water Temperature Graph............4-19
4.13 Changing Pulse Repetition Rate ..4-19
4.14 Saving Sounder Picture to an SD Card
......................................................4-19
4.15 Interpreting the Sounder Display..4-20
4.15.1 Zero line.............................4-20
4.15.2 Bottom echo.......................4-20
4.15.3 Fish school echoes............4-21
4.15.4 Surface noise/Aeration ......4-21
3.11.5 Speed alarm.......................3-50
3.11.6 Proximity alarm..................3-51
3.11.7 Trip alarm...........................3-51
3.11.8 Grounding alarm
(C-MAP specification)........3-52
3.11.9 Alarm information...............3-53
3.12 Resetting Trip Distance ................3-55
4. VIDEO SOUNDER
OPERATION.................................. 4-1
4.1 Sounder Displays............................4-1
4.1.1 Selecting a sounder display.4-1
4.1.2 Description of sounder
5. AIS OPERATION .................... 5-1
5.1 Turning AIS Feature On/Off............5-1
5.2 AIS Symbols ...................................5-3
5.3 Setting Number of AIS Targets
displays................................4-2
to Display........................................5-3
5.4 Activating Targets............................5-4
5.5 Displaying Target Data....................5-4
5.6 Lost Target ......................................5-5
5-7 Setting CPA and TCPA ...................5-5
5.8 Proximity Alarm...............................5-6
5.9 Showing, Hiding AIS Target Tracks .....
........................................................5-7
5.10 Choosing Vector Time.....................5-7
5.11 Displaying Past Positions of
4.1.3 Selecting screen split method in
combination displays ...........4-6
4.2 Automatic Sounder Operation ........4-6
4.2.1 How the automatic sounder
works....................................4-6
4.2.2 Types of automatic sounder
modes ..................................4-6
4.2.3 How to enable automatic
sounder operation................4-7
4.3 Manual Sounder Operation ............4-7
4.3.1 Selecting the manual mode.4-7
4.3.2 Selecting display range .......4-7
4.3.3 Adjusting the gain ................4-8
4.3.4 Shifting the range.................4-8
4.4 Measuring Depth, Time ..................4-9
4.5 Reducing Interference ....................4-9
4.6 Reducing Low Level Noise...........4-10
4.7 Erasing Weak Echoes ..................4-11
4.8 White Marker ................................4-12
4.9 Picture Advance Speed ................4-12
4.9.1 Advancement independent of
ship’s speed.......................4-12
AIS Targets .....................................5-8
6. DATA TRANSFER................... 6-1
6.1 Memory Card Operations ...............6-1
6.1.1 Deleting all data (other than
chart data) from memory
cards ....................................6-1
6.1.2 Saving data to a memory
card......................................6-2
6.1.3 Playing back data from a
memory card........................6-3
6.2 Receiving Data Via Network
Equipment.......................................6-4
6.3 Outputting Data Through the
Network...........................................6-5
4.9.2 Advancement synchronized
with ship’s speed ...............4-13
4.10 Display Colors...............................4-14
4.11 Alarms...........................................4-15
4.11.1 Audio alarm on/off..............4-15
4.11.2 Bottom alarm .....................4-16
7. CUSTOMIZING YOUR UNIT... 7-1
7.1 General Setup.................................7-1
iv
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7.2 Radar Setup....................................7-4
7.2.1 Radar display setup.............7-4
7.2.2 Radar range setup...............7-7
7.2.3 Function key setup...............7-8
7.3 Plotter Setup .................................7-10
7.3.1 Navigation options .............7-10
7.3.2 Function key setup.............7-11
7.4 Chart Setup...................................7-13
7.4.1 Chart offset ........................7-13
7.4.2 Navionics GOLD chart
8.7.3 Plotter...................................8-5
8.7.4 Sounder................................8-6
8.8 Diagnostics .....................................8-7
8.8.1 Memory I/O test ...................8-7
8.8.2 Test pattern ........................8-10
8.8.3 Keyboard test.....................8-11
8.9 GPS Status Display.......................8-12
8.10 Clearing Memories........................8-13
8.11 Error Messages.............................8-14
APPENDIX....................................... AP-1
Menu Overview.....................................AP-1
Geodetic Chart List.............................AP-10
Icons ...................................................AP-11
attributes ............................7-14
7.4.3 C-MAP chart attributes ......7-15
7.5 Data Boxes Setup.........................7-21
7.6 Hot Page Setup ............................7-22
7.7 Navigator Setup............................7-23
7.7.1 Navigation data source......7-23
7.7.2 GPS receiver setup
SPECIFICATIONS.......................SP-1
INDEX...........................................IN-1
Declaration of Conformity
(Set equipped with
GP-310B/320B) .................7-25
7.7.3 TD display setup ................7-28
7.8 Nav Data Display Setup................7-30
7.9 Sounder Setup..............................7-31
7.9.1 System setup .....................7-31
7.9.2 Sensor setup......................7-34
7.9.3 Sounding range, zoom range,
bottom lock range ..............7-35
7.9.4 Function key setup.............7-36
7.10 Nav Graphic Display Setup ..........7-38
8. MAINTENANCE,
TROUBLESHOOTING .................. 8-1
8.1 Preventive Maintenance .................8-1
8.2 Replacement of Batteries ...............8-2
8.3 Replacement of Fuse......................8-2
8.4 Replacing the Magnetron ...............8-3
8.5 Replacing the Synchro Belt
(1824C-BB only) .............................8-3
8.6 Trackball Maintenance....................8-3
8.7 Simple Troubleshooting ..................8-4
8.7.1 General ................................8-4
8.7.2 Radar ...................................8-4
v
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FOREWORD
A Word to the Owner of the Model
18x4C-BB/19x4C-BB Series Marine Radar,
GD-1920C-BB Color Video Plotter
FURUNO Electric Company thanks you for purchasing the Model 18x4C-BB/19x4C-BB
Series Marine Radar, GD-1920C-BB Color Video Plotter. We are confident you will discover
why the FURUNO name has become synonymous with quality and reliability.
For over 50 years FURUNO Electric Company has enjoyed an enviable reputation for
quality and reliability throughout the world. This dedication to excellence is furthered by our
extensive global network of agents and dealers.
Your equipment is designed and constructed to meet the rigorous demands of the marine
environment. However, no machine can perform its intended function unless properly
installed and maintained. Please carefully read and follow the operation and maintenance
procedures set forth in this manual.
We would appreciate feedback from you, the end-user, about whether we are achieving our
purposes.
Thank you for considering and purchasing FURUNO.
Features
The 18x4C-BB/19x4C-BB Radar Series and the GD-1920C-BB Video Plotter work within
our network system called the “NavNet.” Each product has an IP address to communicate
with NavNet compatible products within the network, using TCP/IP protocol through an
Ethernet 10BASE-T network.
The main features are as follows:
• This Navnet series consists of the following models:
Radar antenna size, type,
Model
Output
Range
24 nm
rotation speed
46 cm, radome, 24/30 rpm
(auto-switching)
Marine Radar Model 1824C-BB
2.2 kW
Marine Radar Model 1834C-BB
Marine Radar Model 1934C-BB
Marine Radar Model 1944C-BB
Marine Radar Model 1954C-BB
Marine Radar Model 1964C-BB
Color Video Plotter GD-1920C-BB
4 kW
4 kW
6 kW
12 kW
25 kW
—
36 nm
48 nm
64 nm
60 cm, radome, 24 rpm
3.5 ft, open, 24 or 48 rpm
4 ft, open, 24 or 48 rpm
4/6 ft, open, 24 rpm (4 or 6 ft),
48 rpm (4 ft only)
72 nm
—
—
vi
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• User friendly operation with combination of discrete keys, soft keys, alphanumeric keys
and Trackball.
• Accepts the following SD chart cards: Navionics GOLD charts or C-MAP NT+/NT MAX
charts depending on specification. All names mentioned above are registered trademarks
of their respective companies.
• Fast chart redraw.
• Built-in NavNet interface circuit board.
• Video input (video recorder, CCD device, etc.) available with installation of optional PIP
Board.
• 12-channel GPS Receiver GP-310B with highly accurate position fixing optionally
available, GP-320B with WAAS capability.
• User programmable function keys.
• Video sounder picture available with connection of the optional Network Sounder
ETR-6/10N or ETR-30N.
• The optional facsimile receiver FAX-30 receives facsimile pictures and navtex messages
transmitted from facsimile and navtex stations.
Notice
• No part of this manual may be copied or reproduced without written permission.
• If this manual is lost or worn, contact your dealer about replacement.
• The contents of this manual and equipment specifications are subject to change without
notice.
• The example screens (or illustrations) shown in this manual may not match the screens
you see on your display. The screen you see depends on your system configuration and
equipment settings.
• This manual is intended for use by native speakers of English.
• FURUNO will assume no responsibility for the damage caused by improper use or
modification of the equipment or claims of loss of profit by a third party.
vii
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SYSTEM CONFIGURATIONS
All NavNet products incorporate a “network circuit board” to integrate each NavNet product
on board through an optional LAN cable (Ethernet 10BASE-T). Each NavNet product is
assigned an IP address to enable transfer of images between other NavNet products. For
example, video plotter pictures can be transferred to a radar and vice versa. Pictures
received via the NavNet may be adjusted at the receiving end.
The number of processor units which may be installed depends on the number of network
sounder connected. For a system incorporating three or more products, a “hub” is required
to process data.
For one network sounder: one radar and three plotters, or four plotters
For two network sounder: one radar and two plotters, or four plotters
Note: NavNet2 equipment cannot be connected to initial version NavNet equipment.
NavNet system (Model 1824C-BB/1834C-BB/1934C-BB/1944C-BB/1954C-BB/
1964C-BB)
Antenna Unit
MODEL1824C-BB
MODEL
1954C-BB
MODEL
1964C-BB
MODEL
1934C-BB
MODEL
1944C-BB
MODEL
1834C-BB
GPS receiver
GP-310B/320B
Power Supply Unit
PSU-005
(MODEL 1954C-BB)
Power Supply Unit
PSU-008
Control unit
RCU-017
Processor unit
RPU-015
SAVE
MOB
HIDE
SHOW
CLEAR
ALARM
GAIN
A
B
C
D
E
ABC
1
DEF
2
GHI
3
RANGE
(MODEL 1964C-BB)
DISP
MENU
JKL
4
MNO
5
PQR
6
Navigator
STU
7
VWX
8
YZ&
9
POWER
F.G.
POWER
TX
_'#
0
EBL
VRM
PUSH TO ENTER
SLAVE DISPLAY
1
3
2
GND
Echo sounder
OUTPUT
12 VDC
NTSC/PAL
RGB OUT
ARPA ARP-11 (Built-in)
AIS Interface
DJ-1
OPTION
1
2
INPUT
12-24 VDC
NETWORK
CONT
DATA
3
DATA
2
DATA
1
Monitor
(Local supply)
3
GND
CARD SLOT
AIS transponder
IF-1500AIS*
* Not required for AIS
Transponder FA-150
Heading sensor
Rectifier
RU-3423
Facsimile
Receiver
FAX-30
: Standard
: Option
Other NavNet
system
(GD-1920C-BB, etc.)
: Local supply
100/110/115/220/230 VAC 12 - 24 VDC*
1φ, 50/60 Hz*
Network
Sounder
ETR-6/10N
ETR-30N
*: The power for the power supply unit
and display unit must be drawn from
the same power source.
NavNet system (Model 1824C-BB/1834C-BB/1934C-BB/1944C-BB/1954C-BB/1964C-BB)
viii
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Single-unit NavNet system (GD-1920C-BB)
GPS receiver
GP-310B/320B
External buzzer
* Not required for
AIS Transponder
FA-150.
AIS Interface
AIS transponder
VGA monitor
Remote display
PC
IF-1500AIS*
Remote
Video equipment
Controller
POWER
RMC-100
F.G.
3
SLAVE DISPLAY
1
2
GND
OUTPUT
12 VDC
NTSC/PAL
RGB OUT
DJ-1
OPTION
ARPA
ARP-11
Display unit
RDP-149
1
2
INPUT
12-24 VDC
NETWORK
CONT
DATA
3
DATA
2
DATA
1
3
GND
CARD SLOT
Echo sounder
Navigator
Other NavNet Unit
(Model 1834C, etc.)
Rectifier
PR-62
Network
Sounder
ETR-6/10N
ETR-30N
Facsimile
Receiver
FAX-30
12 - 24 VDC
100/110/115/220/230 VAC
1φ, 50/60 Hz
: Standard
: Option
: Local supply
Single-unit NavNet system (GD-1920C-BB)
ix
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Two-unit NavNet system
Radar Antenna Unit
Radar Antenna Unit
OR
OR
GPS Receiver GP-310B/320B
GPS Receiver GP-310B/320B
RADAR
or
RADAR
or
PLOTTER
PLOTTER
Radar, plotter data
Radar, plotter data
Two-unit NavNet system
Three-or-more-unit NavNet system (Max. 4 units)
Radar Antenna Unit
OR
Radar Antenna Unit
OR
GPS Receiver GP-310B/320B
GPS Receiver GP-310B/320B
RADAR
or
RADAR
or
PLOTTER
PLOTTER
Radar data
Plotter data
HUB
Sounder data
Sounder data
Facsimile data
Network Sounder
ETR-6/10N
ETR-30N
Facsimile
Receiver
FAX-30
Network Sounder
ETR-6/10N
ETR-30N
(option)
(option)
(option)
Three-or-more-unit NavNet system
x
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW
This chapter provides the basic information needed to get you started using your radar,
video plotter.
1.1 Operating Controls
1.1.1 Control unit
The radar, video plotter, sounder and chart systems are operated with the control unit. Ten
keys are labeled and they provide the function shown on their labels. The five soft keys
provide various functions according to current operating mode. The ENTER knob mainly
functions to register selections on the menu and adjust the EBL, VRM and gain. The
Trackball’s main function is to move the cursor across the screen. When you correctly
execute an operation, the unit generates a beep. Invalid operation causes the unit to emit
three beeps.
Displays mode
selection window.
Clears data;
erases selected mark.
Momentary press:
Registers own ship's position as a waypoint.
Press three seconds:
Marks man overboard position.
Opens/closes
alarm menu.
Shows or hides the soft
keys, function keys,
nav data alternately.
Enter alphanumeric
data.
Selects a range.
SAVE
MOB
HIDE
SHOW
CLEAR
ALARM
GAIN
A
Soft keys
ABC
1
DEF
2
GHI
3
B
RANGE
DISP
MENU
JKL
4
MNO
5
PQR
6
C
D
E
STU
7
VWX
8
YZ&
9
POWER
TX
EBL
VRM
_'#
0
PUSH TO ENTER
Opens/closes the main menu.
Displays soft keys for EBL/VRM.
Trackball*
Radar: Displays soft keys
for adjustment of gain, A/C SEA,
A/C RAIN.
Sounder: Adjusts gain.
Shifts cursor EBL/VRM and
cursor; selects menu items
and options.
ENTER knob
Push: Registers setting.
Rotate: Adjusts gain, VRM, EBL, etc.;
selects menu items and options. May also
be used to enter alphanumeric data.
Long press: Turns power off.
Momentary press: Turns power on, and
shows D: RADAR STBY/TX soft key.
*: When it has been some time since the trackball was last operated, the cursor may not track the
movement of the trackball. In this case, move the trackball rapidly and then finely.
How to remove the hard cover
Place your thumbs at the locations shown with
circles in the illustration at right, and then lift the
cover while pressing it with your thumbs.
1-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW
Soft keys
The function of the five soft keys (labeled A, B, C, D and E) changes according to the
operation. Their labels for their current functions are shown on the screen to the left of the
keys. To hide or show the soft keys, press the HIDE/SHOW key. Each press of the key
shows preset soft keys, user function keys or turns off navigation information (at the top of
the screen).
Some soft keys show the current setting of a soft key in reverse video as shown below.
3nm
34° 22. 3456'N
080° 22. 3456'E
359.9°M
19.9 kt
TRIP NU
99.9 nm
12/LP
°M
TRAIL
319. 9
H-UP
MARK
ENTRY
TRAIL
ON/OFF
16.0nm
A
B
C
A
MODE
NTH UP
TRAIL
TIME
B
C
D
E
NAV
POS
GRAD
SINGLE
TRAIL
COLOR
D. BOX
ON/OFF
E
WP-002
FISH
RETURN
BRIDGE
359.9 ˚R
+
11.70nm
Currently selected option shown in reverse video
Radar Display
Plotter Display
Radar and plotter displays
1-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW
1.2 Inserting a Chart Card
Your unit reads SD cards, in the following formats: Navionics GOLD charts or C-MAP NT+/
NT MAX charts, depending on the type of processor unit you have. Insert the appropriate
chart card for your area as follows:
1. Open the chart drive.
Chart drive
Processor unit
2. Insert desired chart label side up, before turning on the power.
3. Close the lid.
To remove chart card, follow the steps shown below.
1. Press the MENU key to show the menu.
2. Press the SHOW/HIDE key.
3. Open the chart drive lid, and then push the card once and then pull it out.
Note 1: Do not remove a card while the chart is being drawn. This may cause the
equipment to freeze.
Note 2: Do not insert or remove a card while the power is on. This may cause the
equipment to freeze.
Note 3: For multiple processor units, do not use the same chart card type in more than one
processor unit.
Note 4: Remove the card with care; rough handling can damage the card and destroy its
contents.
1-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW
1.3 Turning the Unit On/Off
Press the POWER/TX key to turn the unit on. A beep sounds and then the equipment
shows the startup NavNet screen (about 20 seconds), the product information screen,
startup test results and chart usage disclaimer. During this period the equipment is
inoperative. The startup test checks the ROM, RAM, internal battery and backup data for
proper operation, displaying the results for each as OK or NG (No Good). If NG appears an
appropriate message appears on the screen. For any NG, try to press any key to go to the
chart disclaimer screen, then perform the diagnostic test as shown in the paragraph “8.8
Diagnostics.”
For start up with the radar display, the magnetron takes from one and thirty seconds
minute to three minutes (depending on radar model) to warm up before the radar can be
operated. The time remaining for warming up of the magnetron is counted down at the
center of the display.
You may press any key at the chart disclaimer screen to show the last-used display, or wait
several seconds to let the equipment do it for you.
To turn the unit off, press and hold down the POWER/TX key until the screen goes off
(approx. 3 sec.). Note that the network sounder will be turned off approx. three minutes
after turning off the power. This is due to the equipment’s electrical characteristics.
Note: The first time you turn on the power (or any time the power is applied after a memory
reset), you are asked if you want to start the simulation mode, which provides simulated
operation of the equipment after the installation mode selection. Push the ENTER knob to
start the simulation mode, or press the CLEAR key to start normal operation. For further
details about the simulation mode, see the paragraph “1.10 Simulation Display.”
1-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW
1.4 Adjusting Hue, Panel Illumination
You may choose the colors for the radar plotter, and overlay displays, and adjust panel
brilliance.
1. Press the POWER/TX key momentarily. A set of soft keys for adjustment of brilliance
and hue appear.
3nm
BRILL
CONTST
34° 22. 3456'N
080° 22. 3456'E
359.9°M
19.9 kt
BRILL
CONTST
12/LP
°
M
319. 9
H-UP
16.0nm
PANEL
BRILL
PANEL
BRILL
B
B
C HUE
C HUE
RADAR
STBY
RADAR
STBY
D
D
WP-002
FISH
BRIDGE
E
RETURN
E
RETURN
359.9 ˚R
+
11.70nm
(Blank label of softkey is not used)
(Blank label of softkey is not used)
Radar Display
Plotter Display
Brilliance adjustment soft keys
2. Press the C: HUE soft key to show the hue setting window.
HUE
▲
{
{
{
~
▼
DAY
NIGHT
TWILIGHT
MANUAL SET
Hue window
3. Operate the Trackball to select hue desired, referring to the table below. MANUAL SET
follows the color settings on the CHART DETAILS menu for the plotter and the RADAR
DISPLAY SETUP menu for the radar.
Night
Red
Day
Twilight
Green
Green
Yellow
Blue
Characters
Radar ring
Radar echo
Background
Black
Green
Multi
Red
Orange
Black
White
Landmass (plotter) Orange*
Light-orange* Orange*
* = Beige and light-beige on C-MAP display unit.
Note: When using the overlay screen, the own ship track will be hidden if the radar
background and own ship track are blue and the “MANUAL SET” hue setting is used. In this
case, set HUE to other position and then return to “MANUAL” to show the own ship track in
black.
1-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW
4. Press the B: PANEL BRILL soft key to show the panel brilliance window. The bar graph
shows current panel brilliance setting.
PANEL BRILLIANCE
8
Panel brilliance setting window
5. Adjust the ENTER knob, clockwise to raise the brilliance or counterclockwise to lower it.
6. Hit the E: RETURN soft key to finish.
1.5 Selecting a Display
1.5.1 Display modes
If you have a radar, navigator, network sounder and external video source (video recorder,
etc., optional PIP board required) six full-screen displays are available: radar, plotter, echo
sounder, nav data, overlay, and external video. In addition to the full-screen display, you
can divide the screen into halves and thirds to show two and three sets of images on a
combination display.
Full screen
(radar)
Combination screen
(radar + plotter)
Overlay screen
(plotter + radar only,
Requires L/L data)
Display screens
The table below shows the displays available with each screen type.
Screen type and available display screen
Full screen
Combination screen options Overlay screen
options
(half- or thirds-screen)
Plotter, radar, sounder, Plotter, radar, sounder,
Radar + plotter
nav data, external
video, overlay
compass (or wind), highway,
compass (or wind)/highway,
nav data, overlay, external
video
1-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW
1.5.2 Selecting a display
1. Press the DISP key to show the display screen selection window. The icons of modes
not available are shaded. HOTPAGE 1-HOTPAGE 6 are user-arrangeable displays
called “hot pages,” which you can configure as you like. For further details, see the
paragraph “7.6 Hot Page Setup.”
Selected
Basic display
item
RADAR
PLOTTER SOUNDER NAV DATA OVERLAY EXT VIDEO WX FAX
screens
Hot pages
HOTPAGE 1 HOTPAGE 2
HOTPAGE 3
HOTPAGE 4
HOTPAGE 5 HOTPAGE 6
· TURN KNOB TO SELECT MODE
AND PUSH KNOB TO ENTER.
· PUSH ANY SOFT KEY TO
SELECT IMAGE SOURCE.
Display screen selection window
Note: “WX FAX” is available only when the facsimile receiver FAX-30 is connected. If
the message “AUX SOURCE IS DISCONNECTED. PUSH ENT KNOB TO EXIT.”
appears, press the ENTER knob and select other item.
2. Rotate the ENTER knob to select a basic display screen or a hot page screen.
3. Push the ENTER knob.
4. If you select a basic display screen, a group of appropriate combination displays appear.
In the example below, the radar combination screens are shown. When WX FAX is
selected at step 2, a combination display does not appear.
RETURN
PUSH ENTER KNOB.
Radar combination screen selection window
5. Rotate the ENTER knob to select display desired.
6. Push the ENTER knob to finish.
1-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW
1.5.3 Switching control in combination and overlay screens
A soft key is provided in relevant combination and overlay screens to switch control
between displays. In the example below, the E: PLOTTR CNTRL and E: SNDR CNTRL soft
keys enable switching control between the plotter and sounder screens in the
plotter/sounder combination display.
0’33"
40.0
0
34° 22. 3456’N 359.9°M TRIP NU
080° 22. 3456’E 19.9 kt
99.9 nm
MARK
ENTRY
A
B
C
16.0nm
MODE
NTH UP
50
NAV
POS
100
150
200
CNTRL
PLOTTR
E
97
LF
WP-002
FISH
Plotter display selected
CNTRL
E
CNTRL
SNDR
E
PLOTTR
To adjust
sounder
To adjust
plotter
0’33"
0
34° 22. 3456’N 359.9°M TRIP NU
080° 22. 3456’E 19.9 kt
99.9 nm
A SHIFT
40.0
16.0nm
50
B MODE
FREQ
C
100
LF/HF
DISPLAY
D
MODE
150
200
CNTRL
SNDR
E
97
LF
WP-002
FISH
Sounder display selected
How to switch control between modes in the plotter/sounder combination display
1-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW
1.5.4 Selecting image source
When more than one network radar or network sounder is connected to the equipment, you
may select an image source for each as shown below. This is not necessary when only one
network radar or network sounder is connected.
1. Press the DISP key.
2. Press any soft key to show the following display.
SELECT
SOURCE
RADAR SOURCE
1
(HOST NAME: NAVNET-1)
SOUNDER SOURCE ETR1 (HOST NAME: SOUNDER)
AUX SOURCE
IP ADDRESS
AUX 1 (HOST NAME: WXFAX)
172.031.003.003
EDIT
DEVICE NUMBER
1 (HOST NAME: NAVNET-1)
IF THERE IS MORE THAN
ONE NETWORK RADAR OR
ECHO SOUNDER, YOU MAY
SELECT THE IMAGE
RETURN
SOURCES FOR DISPLAY.
Select source menu
3. Use the Trackball to select RADAR SOURCE, SOUNDER SOURCE or AUX SOURCE
as appropriate, then press the A: EDIT key.
RADAR SOURCE
SOUNDER SOURCE
AUX SOURCE
▲
▲
▲
~
{
{
{
▲
1 (NAVNET1)
2 (NAVNET2)
3 (NAVNET3)
4 (NAVNET4)
~
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
▲
ETR0 (SOUNDER)
ETR1 (SOUNDER1)
ETR2 (SOUNDER2)
ETR3 (SOUNDER3)
ETR4 (SOUNDER4)
ETR5 (SOUNDER5)
ETR6 (SOUNDER6)
ETR7 (SOUNDER7)
ETR8 (SOUNDER8)
ETR9 (SOUNDER9)
~
{
{
{
▲
AUX1 (WXFAX)
AUX2 (WXFAX1)
AUX3 (WXFAX2)
AUX4 (WXFAX3)
Aux source
Radar source
Sounder source
Radar source and sounder source windows
4. Use the Trackball choose source name:
5. Push the ENTER knob to set.
6. Press the DISP key to finish.
7. Turn the power off and on again.
1-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW
1.6 Trackball, Cursor
The Trackball functions to shift the cursor, for measurement of range and bearing to a
location (radar) and latitude and longitude position (plotter). Roll the Trackball to shift the
cursor. The cursor moves in the direction of Trackball rotation.
Cursor
3nm
LP
12/
°
M
319. 9
H-UP
SIGNAL
PROC.
A
B
C
RADAR
DISPLY
NAV
FUNC
D TARGET
ZOOM &
E
D. BOX
359.9 ˚R
+
11.70nm
Cursor Data
Bearing from own ship to cursor
Range from own ship to cursor
Radar Display
34° 22. 3456'N 272.4°M
TRIP NU
99.9 nm
Cursor data
L/L position,
Range and
bearing from
own ship to
cursor
+
080° 22. 3456'E
15.9 nm
MARK
ENTRY
16.0nm
A
MODE
NTH UP
B
C CENTER
Cursor
GO TO
D
CURSOR
WP-002
FISH
BRIDGE
D. BOX
E
ON/OFF
Plotter Display
Cursor, cursor data
1-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW
1.7 Entering the MOB Mark, Setting MOB as
Destination
The MOB mark functions to mark man
overboard position. You can inscribe the
mark from any mode except nav data,
when playing back data or conducting
any test. Note that this function requires
position data.
MOB
mark
M
(MOB)
Range, bearing
Current
M
162.5°
M
O
Man
0.49 nm
B
position
overboard
Note: The function of the SAVE/MOB
key depends on the setting of SAVE
MOB KEY FUNCTION in the GENERAL
SETUP menu. The description below
shows the procedure using the default
setting. For further details, see Save
MOB Key Function on page 7-2.
MOB Data Box
Bearing and range
to MOB position
MOB concept
1. Press and hold down the SAVE/MOB key for about three seconds when someone falls
overboard. The display shows the waypoint number being saved (youngest empty
waypoint number, 001-999) followed by the MOB confirmation window.
Time remaining is counted down while pressing the SAVE/MOB key.
WAYPOINT SAVED!
CONTINUE PUSHING
FOR MOB!
MAN OVER BOARD!
GO TO MOB?
YES ... PUSH ENTER KNOB
NO ... PUSH CLEAR KEY
XXXWPT
CONTINUE PUSHING
FOR MOB!
XX SEC
XXX = Waypoint number
XX = Time remaining is counted down.
MOB mark messages
2. Push the ENTER knob to select the MOB position as the destination, or press the
CLEAR key to only mark current ship’s position as a waypoint. If you select the MOB
position as destination;
• A full-screen radar, plotter or overlay appears depending on the display in use. (If the
MOB key function is “MOB Without Confirmation” the range is automatically set to
0.5 nm.) Further, the waypoint marker appears on the radar display.
• The MOB mark “MOB” appears at the MOB position and a blue line runs between it
and current position. This line shows the shortest course to the MOB position.
• Range and bearing to the MOB position are shown in the MOB data box.
To erase an MOB mark from the plotter display, you must first erase its corresponding
waypoint. Place the cursor on the MOB mark, then press the CLEAR key followed by
pushing the ENTER knob to erase the waypoint. Then, repeat to erase the MOB mark.
1-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW
1.8 Data Boxes
Data boxes, providing navigation data, may be shown on any full-screen display. Up to six
data boxes (two in case of large characters) may be shown, and the default data boxes are
position (in latitude and longitude), course over ground, speed over ground and trip log. The
user may choose which data to display, where to locate it, and show or hide it as desired. In
addition, data boxes may be set independently for each display mode (plotter, radar,
sounder). For how to select data for the data boxes, see the paragraph “7.5 Data Boxes
Setup.”
3nm
34° 22. 3456'N 359.9°M
080° 22. 3456'E 19.9 kt
TRIP
NU
12/LP
319. 9°M
99.9 nm
H-UP
MARK
ENTRY
SIGNAL
PROC.
16.0nm
A
B
C
A
B
C
D
E
RADAR
DISPLY
MODE
NTH UP
NAV
FUNC
NAV
POS
TARGET
TRIP LOG
177nm
ZOOM &
D. BOX
WP-002
FISH
Data
boxes
COG
323.6°
SOG
D. BOX
ON /OFF
TRIP LOG
E
47
°
58.535'N
Data
boxes
M
20.0
kt
177nm
122
°
36.496'W
COG
323.6°
SOG
359.9 ˚R
+
47
°
58.535'N
36.496'W
M
20.0
kt
11.70nm
122
°
Radar Display
Plotter Display
Data boxes
1.8.1 Showing, hiding data boxes with soft key
Plotter:
Radar:
E: D. BOX ON/OFF
E: ZOOM & D. BOX → D: D. BOX ON/OFF (EBL/VRM data box, cursor data
box also shown/hidden)
Sounder: B: AUTO/D. BOX→A: D. BOX ON/OFF
1.8.2 Rearranging data boxes
You may select the location for data boxes as follows:
1. Using the Trackball, place the cursor inside the data box you wish to move. As the
cursor enters the box it changes to a “hand”. Push the ENTER knob, and the hand
changes to a fist, meaning the box is correctly selected.
2. Use the Trackball to move the data box to the location desired, then push the ENTER
knob.
1.8.3 Temporarily erasing a data box
If a data box is obscuring a desired object, you may temporarily erase the box. Use the
Trackball to place the cursor inside the data box you wish to erase, then press the CLEAR
key. To redisplay the box, press the D. BOX soft key twice to display it.
1-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW
1.9 Function Keys
The function keys provide for one-touch execution of a desired function. The default
function key settings are as shown in the table below.
Function
Key
Default Setting, Key Label
Radar
Plotter
Sounder
TLL output, TLL
Clutter, CLT
#1
#2
#3
#4
Heading line on/off, HL Track on/off, TRK
Rings on/off, RNG
Echo trail, TRL
Offcenter, OFC
Edit mark/line, EML
Ruler, RUL
Signal level, SLV
Noise limiter, NL
Add new waypoint,
ADD
Waypoint
#5
STBY/TX, TX
Picture advance, PA
alphanumeric list, ALP
Executing a function
1. Press the HIDE/SHOW key to replace the preset soft key labels with the function key
labels.
3nm
34° 22. 3456'N
080° 22. 3456'E
359.9°M
19.9 kt
TRIP
99.9nm
NU
12/LP
°M
319. 9
H-UP
T
H
L
16.0 nm
A
B
C
D
E
A
B
C
D
E
R
K
R
N
G
T
R
L
S
F
T
E
M
L
R
U
L
Function
keys
Function
keys
A
D
D
002WP
FISH
A
L
T
X
BRIDGE
P
359.9 ˚R
+
11.70nm
Plotter Display
Radar Display
Function keys
2. Press function key desired.
Note: Function keys can be individually programmed for the plotter, radar and sounder
displays. For further details see the following:
Radar: paragraph 7.2.3
Plotter: paragraph 7.3.2
Sounder: paragraph 7.9.4
1-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW
1.10 Simulation Display
The simulation display, for use by service technicians for demonstration purposes, provides
simulated operation to help acquaint you with the many features your unit has to offer. It
allows you to view and control a simulated plotter, radar and sounder picture, without
position-fixing equipment, network radar or a network sounder. Most controls are operative,
thus you may practice setting destination, enter waypoints, measure range and bearing to a
target, etc. Three simulation displays are provided for both the radar and echo sounder.
The simulation icon (SIM) appears when any simulation mode is active.
To start the simulation display;
1. Press the MENU key.
2. Press the E: SYSTEM CONFIGURATION, C: SYSTEM SETUP and D: SIMULATION
SETUP soft keys in that order.
SIM
SETUP
RADAR
LIVE
LIVE
LIVE
00.0kt
PLOTTER
A EDIT
SOUNDER
SPEED
COURSE
000.0
45 35.000'N
125 00.000'W
°
LATITUDE
°
LONGITUDE
START DATE & TIME
GET RADAR SIMULATION DATA
°
00:00 24.NOV.01
NO
E
RETURN
Simulation setup menu
3. Follow appropriate procedure on the next several pages. To stop the simulation mode
and return to normal operation, choose LIVE for radar, sounder or plotter.
Radar
NavNet processor unit-generated echoes or user data
1. Select RADAR, then press the A: EDIT soft key.
RADAR
▲
BUILT IN DATA 1
BUILT IN DATA 2
USER DATA
LIVE
▲
2. Select BUILT IN DATA 1 or 2 for internally generated echoes or USER DATA for
user-saved radar data. Push the ENTER knob.
3. Press the MENU key to close the menu.
1-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW
NavNet radar antenna-generated echoes (not available with the GD-1920C-BB)
1. Select GET RADAR SIMULATION DATA, then press the A: EDIT soft key.
2. Select YES, then push the ENTER knob to erase simulation data and get new data. The
message “Now getting demo data. Do not turn off processor unit.” appears while the unit
is receiving radar data.
Note: If the network radar could not be found “Radar source is not found. Cannot get
demo data.” appears. And if the radar is not active, the message “Radar is not active.
Cannot get demo data.” is displayed. Check that the radar is plugged in and its signal
cable is firmly fastened.
3. Select RADAR, then press the A: EDIT soft key.
4. Select SIMULATION 2, then push the ENTER knob.
5. Press the MENU key to close the menu.
Plotter
1. Select PLOTTER, then press the A: EDIT soft key.
PLOTTER
2. Select SIMULATION, then push the ENTER knob.
3. Select SPEED, then press the A: EDIT soft key.
4. Enter speed (setting range, 0-99 kt, default speed, 0 kt) with
the alphanumeric keys, then push the ENTER knob.
5. Select COURSE, then press the A: EDIT soft key.
6. Select “8 FIGURE” to trace the simulated ship’s track in a
▲
SIMULATION
LIVE
▲
figure-eight course, or enter your own course at DIRECTION. To enter course, use the
Trackball to select digit, and enter value with the alphanumeric keys.
7. Press the C: ENTER soft key.
8. Select LATITUDE, then press the A: EDIT soft key.
9. Enter latitude (setting range, 85°N-85°S, default setting, 45°35.000’N), then push the
ENTER knob.
10. Select LONGITUDE, then press the A: EDIT soft key.
11. Enter longitude (setting range, 180
°
E-180
°
W, default setting, 125
°
00.000’W), then push
the ENTER knob.
12. Select START DATE & TIME, then press the A: EDIT soft key.
13. Enter start date and time, then push the ENTER knob.
14. Press the MENU key to close the menu.
Sounder
1. Select SOUNDER, then press the A: EDIT soft key.
2. Select BUILT IN DATA (internally generated echoes) or
ETR (network sounder-generated echoes), then push the
ENTER knob.
SOUNDER
▲
BUILT IN DATA
ETR DATA
LIVE
Note: The depth, shift, bottom-zoom, bottom-lock and
bottom discrimination cannot be shown in the BUILT IN
DATA mode.
▲
3. Press the MENU key to close the menu.
1-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW
This page intentionally left blank.
1-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. RADAR OPERATION
This chapter covers radar operation, including the ARP (Auto Plotter) function. ARP
requires a Model 18x4C-BB/19x4C-BB series network radar equipped with the ARP circuit
board.
2.1 Radar Display
Guard zone 2
North marker
(Head-up, Course-up mode)
Cursor
Heading
M: Magnetic
T: True
Pulselength
Range/
range ring
interval
Heading line
3nm
Trail time
Trail elapsed time
Guard zone 1
Guard zone 2
Echo stretch
12/LP
Presentation
mode
TRAIL 30m
319. 9°M
H-UP
02m30s
G1 IN
Alarm icon
EBL1
G2 OUT
ES H
Battery icon
Simulation
mode
Echo averaging
Interference rejector
EAV L
IR L
S
I
M
Guard zone 1
Range ring
VRM2
EBL2
Own ship vector
(ARP-equipped model,
true vector mode)
VRM1
Zoom area
Zoom
window
EBL2
VRM2
EBL1
EBL1 bearing
VRM1 range
327.1°R
27.0°R
359.9 ˚R
11.70nm
+
Cursor range
and bearing
VRM1
8.212nm
5.666nm
(Cursor position may
also be shown, in
L/L or Loran C TD.)
EBL2 bearing, VRM2 range
Radar display
2.2 Transmitting, Stand-by
1. Confirm that the network radar is plugged in.
2. Press the DISP key to select a radar display.
3. Press the POWER/TX key momentarily.
4. Press the D: RADAR STBY soft key to highlight TX on its label.
5. Press the E: RETURN soft key.
When the radar picture is not required, but you want keep it in a state of readiness, press
the D: RADAR TX soft key to highlight STBY on its label.
2-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. RADAR OPERATION
2.3 Tuning
The radar receiver can be tuned automatically or manually, and the default tuning method is
automatic. If you require manual tuning, do the following:
1. Press the MENU key to display the main menu.
2. Press the A: RADAR DISPLAY SETUP soft key.
3. Select TUNING, then press the A: EDIT soft key.
TUNING
ꢁ
ꢀ
AUTO
MAN
Tuning bar
Tuning window
4. Choose MAN.
5. Adjust the ENTER knob until the tuning bar is at its longest position.
6. Press the MENU key to close the menu.
Note: If the auto setting does not provide satisfactory tuning, ask your dealer how to
re-adjust tuning.
2.4 Adjusting the Gain
The GAIN key adjusts the gain sensitivity of the radar receiver. It works in a manner similar
to that of volume control of a broadcast receiver, which amplifies received signals.
The proper setting is such that the background noise is just visible on the screen. If your
gain setting is too low, weak echoes may be missed. On the other hand, excessive gain
yields too much background noise; strong targets may be missed because of the poor
contrast between desired echoes and the background noise on the display.
To adjust the receiver sensitivity, transmit on long range, and then do the following:
1. Press the GAIN key to show the “gain adjustment”
GAIN SENSITIVITY
soft keys, and the last-used adjustment window
appears. The example below shows the gain
ꢁAUTO ROUGH
sensitivity adjustment window. The gain soft keys
shown depend on radar source as shown below.
2. If the gain sensitivity window is not displayed, press
the A: GAIN soft key to show the gain sensitivity
setting window.
ꢀAUTO MODERATE
ꢀAUTO CALM
ꢀMAN
0
Gain sensitivity window
3. Use the Trackball to select AUTO ROUGH, AUTO
MODERATE, AUTO CALM, or MAN (manual) as
appropriate. Select an AUTO option according to the sea state.
4. For manual adjustment, rotate the ENTER knob to adjust, while observing the radar
echo. The range of adjustment is 0-100.
5. Press the GAIN key on the front panel or the E: RETURN soft key to finish.
2-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. RADAR OPERATION
Adjusting the FTC (When the radar source is the 17x4 series radar)
To suppress rain clutter from heavy storms or scattered rain clutter, adjust the FTC.
In addition to reducing clutter, the FTC can be used in fine weather to clarify the picture
when navigating in confined waters. However, with the circuit active the receiver is less
sensitive. Therefore, turn off the FTC, by setting it for “0”, when its function is not required.
1. Press the GAIN key.
2. Press the D: FTC soft key to show the FTC window.
3. Rotate the ENTER knob to adjust. The range of adjustment is 0-100(%). Do not
overadjust the FTC – weak target echoes may be missed.
4. Press the GAIN key on the front panel or E: RETURN soft key to finish.
2.5 Reducing Sea Clutter
2.5.1 How the A/C SEA works
Echoes from waves can be troublesome, covering the central part of the display with
random signals known as “sea clutter”. The higher the waves and the higher the antenna
above the water, the further the clutter will extend. Sea clutter may affect radar performance
because real targets are sometimes hidden by the echoes of small waves. (See the
left-hand figure in the figure below.) When sea clutter masks the picture, adjust the A/C
SEA to reduce the clutter.
The A/C SEA reduces the amplification of echoes at short ranges (where clutter is the
greatest) and progressively increases amplification as the range increases, so amplification
will be normal at those ranges where there is no sea clutter.
Sea clutter at
screen center
A/C SEA adjusted;
sea clutter suppressed
Effect of A/C SEA
2-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. RADAR OPERATION
2.5.2 Adjusting the A/C SEA
A/C SEA should be adjusted so that the clutter is broken up into small dots, and small
targets become distinguishable.
1. Press the GAIN key.
2. Press the B: A/C SEA soft key to show the A/C SEA setting window.
A/C SEA
AUTO ROUGH
AUTO MODERATE
AUTO CALM
MAN
0
A/C SEA setting window
3. Use the Trackball to select AUTO ROUGH, AUTO MODERATE, AUTO CALM, or MAN
(manual) as appropriate. Select an AUTO option according to the sea state.
4. For manual adjustment, rotate the ENTER knob to adjust. The range of adjustment is
0-100. Do not overadjust – weak echoes may be missed.
5. When the radar source is the Model 18x4 or 19x4, A/C SEA and A/C RAIN can be
automatically adjusted, with the A/C AUTO ON/OFF soft key. Press the key to highlight
ON or OFF as appropriate. Note that the A/C AUTO adjustment is done at the MANU in
the A/C SEA window.
6. Press the GAIN key on the front panel or E: RETURN soft key to finish.
2.6 Reducing Precipitation Clutter
The vertical beamwidth of the antenna is designed to see surface targets even when the
ship is rolling. However, by this design the unit will also detect precipitation clutter (rain,
snow, hail, etc.) in the same manner as normal targets. Precipitation clutter shows as
random dots on the screen.
2.6.1 Adjusting the A/C RAIN
When echoes from precipitation mask solid targets, adjust the A/C RAIN to split up these
unwanted echoes into a speckled pattern, making recognition of solid targets easier.
1. Press the GAIN key.
2. Press the C: A/C RAIN soft key to show the A/C RAIN window.
A/C RAIN
0
A/C RAIN setting window
3. Rotate the ENTER knob to adjust the A/C RAIN. The current level is shown on the A/C
RAIN level bar in the A/C RAIN window, and the range of adjustment is 0 to 100(%). Do
not overadjust – weak echoes may be missed.
4. Press the GAIN key on the front panel or E: RETURN soft key to finish.
2-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. RADAR OPERATION
2.7 Range Scale
The range setting determines the size of the area (in nautical miles) that will appear on your
display. In addition, the range setting will also automatically adjust the range ring interval so
that accurate range measurements may be made while operating on any range setting.
The range, range ring interval and pulselength appear at the top left-hand corner of the
display.
Press the [RANGE (+ or -)] key to change the range scale.
Range scales (nm, sm)
Range
0.125
0.25
0.5
0.75
0.25
1
1.5
0.5
2
3
1
4
1
6
2
8
2
12
3
16
4
24
6
36
12
48
12
64
16
72
18
Ring
0.0625
0.125
0.125
0.25
0.5
Interval
No. of
Rings
2
2
5
4
5
4
5
4
5
4
5
5
5
5
4
5
5
5
Range scales (km)
Range
0.25
0.125
2
0.5
0.75
1
1.5
2
3
1
4
4
1
5
6
2
4
8
2
5
12
3
16
4
24
36
48
64
72
Ring Interval
No. of Rings
0.25 0.25 0.25 0.5
0.5
5
6
5
12
4
12
5
16
5
18
5
5
4
5
4
5
5
Note 1: Maximum range depends on the network radar as shown below.
Model 1824C-BB: 24 nm
Model 1834C-BB: 36 nm
Model 1934C-BB: 48 nm
Model 1944C-BB: 64 nm
Model 1954C-BB, 1964C-BB: 72 nm
Note 2: You may choose which ranges to use from the RADAR RANGE SETUP menu. For
details see paragraph 7.2.2. This function is not available with the GD-1920C-BB.
2.8 Pulselength
The pulselength in use is displayed at the upper left corner of the display. Appropriate
pulselengths are preset to individual range scales. Therefore, you are not usually required
to select them. If you are not satisfied with the current pulselength setting, however, it is
possible to change it for the ranges shown below. Generally, select a longer pulse for
longer detection range and shorter pulse for better range discrimination.
1.5 nm, 1.5 sm, 3 km: Short pulse, medium pulse
3 nm, 3 sm, 6 km: Medium pulse, long pulse
1. If not displayed, press the HIDE/SHOW key to show the radar soft keys.
2. Press the A: SIGNAL PROC. soft key.
2-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. RADAR OPERATION
3nm
SIGNAL
PROCESS
12/LP
319. 9°M
H-UP
I. REJ
OFF
A
E. AVG
OFF
B
Shown when radar
source is the Model
18x4-BB/19x4-BB
series radar. Not
shown otherwise.
PULSE
C
ELONG
E. STR
OFF
D
E
RETURN
359.9 ˚R
11.70nm
+
Signal process soft keys
3. Choose the 1.5 nm or 3 nm with the RANGE key.
4. Press the C: PULSE soft key to select the pulselength setting. SHORT or MEDIUM for
1.5 nm, 1.5 sm, 3 km and MEDIUM or LONG for 3 nm, 3 sm,
6 km.
5. Press the E: RETURN soft key to finish.
2.9 Presentation Mode
This unit provides four radar presentation modes: head-up, course-up, north-up and true
motion.
Heading data is required for modes other than head-up.
2.9.1 Selecting a presentation mode
1. If not displayed, press the HIDE/SHOW key to show the radar soft keys.
2. Press the B: RADAR DISPLY soft key to show the RADAR DISPLAY soft keys.
3. Press the A: MODE soft key. Each pressing of the key changes the presentation mode
and the presentation mode indication in the sequence of North-up, True Motion,
Head-up, and Course-up.
Function
North-up
Indicator on display
Soft key label
NTH UP
N-UP
TR-M
H-UP
C-UP
True Motion
Head-up
TRUE M
HD UP
Course-up
CSE UP
4. Press the E: RETURN soft key to finish
Note: When heading data is lost, the presentation mode automatically goes to head-up, the
heading indication at the screen top shows “- - -.-°” and the audio alarm sounds. Press the
ALARM key to acknowledge the alarm. The message “HEADING DATA MISSING” appears.
Restore compass signal to show heading indication. Use the A: MODE soft key to select
presentation mode if necessary. The audio alarm may be silenced with the CLEAR key.
2-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. RADAR OPERATION
2.9.2 Description of presentation modes
Heading Line
Head-up
North Marker
A display without azimuth stabilization in which the line
connecting the center with the top of the display
indicates own ship’s heading. Targets are painted at
their measured distances and in their directions
relative to own ship’s heading.
The short line on the bearing scale is the north marker.
Course-up
Head-up display
The radar picture is stabilized and displayed with the
currently selected course at the top of the screen. As
you change heading, the ship’s heading line moves. If
you select a new course, the picture resets to display
the new course at the top of the display.
North Marker
Heading Line
Targets are painted at their measured distances and in
their directions relative to the intended course which is
maintained at the 0-degree position. The heading line
moves in accordance with ship’s yawing and course
changes.
Course-up display
North
Heading Line
North-up
In the north-up mode, targets are painted at their
measured distances and in their true (compass)
directions from own ship. North is maintained at the
top of the screen. The heading line changes its
direction according to ship’s heading.
True motion
Fixed radar targets maintain a constant position on the
screen, while your own ship moves across the radar
image at the correct speed and heading. A map-like
image is displayed, with all moving vessels traveling in
true perspective to each other and to fixed landmasses.
As your ship’s position approaches the edge of the
screen, the radar display is automatically reset to
reveal the area ahead of your ship. You can manually
reset your ship’s position at any time by pressing the
B: RADAR DISPLY soft key followed by the B: SHIFT
soft key.
North-up display
North
Heading Line
True motion display
2-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. RADAR OPERATION
2.10 Measuring the Range
You can measure the range to a radar target three ways: by the range rings, by the cursor,
and by the VRM (Variable Range Marker).
2.10.1 Measuring range by range rings
Count the number of rings between the center of the display and the target. Check the
range ring interval and judge the distance of the echo from the inner edge of the nearest
ring.
To turn the range rings on, do the following:
1. If not displayed, press the HIDE/SHOW key to show the radar soft keys.
2. Press the B: RADAR DISPLY soft key.
3. Press the C: RINGS soft key to turn the rings on and select desired brilliance.
4. Press the E: RETURN soft key to finish.
2.10.2 Measuring range by cursor
Operate the Trackball to place the cursor intersection on the inside edge of the radar target.
The range to the target, as well as the bearing, appears to the right of “+” at the bottom of
the display.
Cursor
Target
3nm
12/LP
°
M
319. 9
H-UP
SIGNAL
PROC.
A
B
C
RADAR
DISPLY
NAV
FUNC
D TARGET
ZOOM &
E
D. BOX
11.2 ˚R
+
11.70nm
Range and bearing from
own ship to cursor
How to measure range to a target with the cursor
2-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. RADAR OPERATION
2.10.3 Measuring range by VRM
1. Press the EBL/VRM key to display the EBL/VRM soft keys.
2. Press the B: VRM1 ON (dotted ring VRM) or E: VRM2 ON (dashed ring VRM) soft key
to select the desired VRM. The selected VRM’s indication, at the bottom of the screen,
is highlighted.
3. Rotate the ENTER knob then place the VRM on the inside edge of a radar target. Read
the VRM indication to find range to the target.
3nm
EBL
VRM
12/LP
°
M
319. 9
H-UP
EBL1
ON
A
B
VRM1
ON
VRM2
(Dashed line)
C OFFSET
VRM1
(Dotted line)
EBL2
D
ON
VRM2
ON
E
EBL2
VRM2
EBL1
VRM1
---.-°R
---.-°R
359.9 ˚R
+
VRM1 range
11.70nm
9.343nm
3.123nm
Active VRM is highlighted.
VRM2 range
How to measure range with the VRM
4. You may hide the EBL/VRM soft keys by pressing the EBL/VRM key.
2.10.4 Various VRM operations
Erasing a VRM, VRM indication: Press appropriate VRM soft key (B or E key), then press
the CLEAR key. The VRM is erased and its indication becomes blank.
Erasing EBL/VRM data boxes: Press the EBL or VRM soft key (B or E key) associated
with the EBL/VRM data box you wish to erase. Press the CLEAR key once or twice to
erase the data box.
Hiding EBL/VRM data boxes: Press the E: ZOOM & D. BOX and D: D. BOX ON/OFF soft
keys to show or hide the EBL/VRM data boxes.
Moving EBL/VRM data boxes: When an EBL/VRM data box is obscuring a target you
want to see, you can move it to another location as shown below. This cannot be done
when the EBL/VRM soft keys are shown.
1. Press the EBL/VRM key to turn off the EBL/VRM soft keys.
2. Using the Trackball, place the cursor inside the data box you wish to move. As the
cursor enters the box it changes to a “hand.” Push the ENTER knob, and the hand
changes to a fist, meaning the box is correctly selected.
3. Use the Trackball to move the data box to the location desired, then push the ENTER
knob.
2-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. RADAR OPERATION
2.11 Measuring the Bearing
There are two ways to measure the bearing to a target: by the cursor, and by the EBL
(Electronic bearing Line).
2.11.1 Measuring bearing by cursor
Use the Trackball to place the cursor at the center of the target. The bearing to the target
appears in the range and bearing box at the bottom right-hand corner on the screen.
2.11.2 Measuring bearing by EBL
1. Press the EBL/VRM key.
2. Press the A: EBL1 ON (dotted line EBL) or D: EBL2 ON (dashed line EBL) soft key to
select the desired EBL. The selected EBL’s indication, at the bottom of the screen, is
highlighted.
3. Rotate the ENTER knob to bisect the radar target with the EBL. Read the EBL indication
to find the bearing to the target.
3nm
EBL
VRM
12/LP
319. 9°M
H-UP
EBL1
ON
EBL1
(Dotted line)
A
B
VRM1
ON
C OFFSET
EBL2
ON
EBL2
(Dashed line)
D
VRM2
ON
E
EBL2 bearing
EBL1 bearing
EBL1
VRM1
EBL2
VRM2
330.1°R
234.1˚R
-.---nm
359.9 ˚R
+
11.70nm
-.---nm
Active marker is highlighted.
How to measure bearing with the EBL
4. You may hide the EBL/VRM soft keys by pressing the EBL/VRM key.
Note: The bearing to a target may be shown relative to own ship’s heading (Relative) or
True bearing (requires heading data). This may be done with “EBL REFERENCE,” which is
in the RADAR DISPLAY SETUP menu.
2.11.3 Various EBL operations
Erasing an EBL, EBL indication: Press appropriate EBL soft key (B or E key), then press
the CLEAR key. The EBL is erased and its indication becomes blank.
Erasing, hiding, moving EBL/VRM data boxes: See paragraph 2.10.4.
2-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. RADAR OPERATION
2.12 Erasing the Heading Line, North Marker
The heading line indicates the ship's heading in all presentation modes. It is a line from the
own ship position to the outer edge of the radar display area and appears at zero degrees
on the bearing scale in head-up mode; it changes its orientation in the north-up, course-up
and true motion modes with ship’s movement.
The north marker appears as a short dashed line. In the head-up and course-up modes the
north marker moves around the bearing scale as the ship’s heading moves.
To temporarily erase the heading line and north marker, press the B: RADAR DISPLY soft
key followed by the D: HL OFF soft key. Release the key to redisplay the markers. (If the
radar soft keys are not shown, hit the CLEAR key to display them.)
2.13 Reducing Noise Interference
Noise, appearing on the displays as random “speckles,” can be reduced as follows:
1. Press the MENU key to open the menu.
2. Press the A: RADAR DISPLAY SETUP soft key.
3. Select NOISE REJECTION, then press the A: EDIT soft key.
4. Select OFF, LOW or HIGH as appropriate.
5. Press the C: ENTER soft key.
6. Press the MENU key to close the menu.
2.14 Rejecting Radar Interference
Radar interference may occur when near another shipborne radar that is operating in the
same frequency band as your radar. Its on-screen appearance looks like many bright dots
either scattered at random or in the form of dotted lines extending from the center to the
edge of the display. Interference effects are distinguishable from normal echoes because
they do not appear in the same place on successive rotations of the scanner.
Be sure to turn off the interference rejector when no interference exists – weak targets may
be missed.
Radar interference
2-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. RADAR OPERATION
1. If not displayed, press the HIDE/SHOW key to show the radar soft keys.
2. Press the A: SIGNAL PROC. soft key.
3nm
SIGNAL
PROCESS
12/LP
319. 9°M
H-UP
I. REJ
OFF
A
E. AVG
OFF
B
Shown when radar
source is the Model
18x4-BB/19x4-BB
series radar. Not
shown otherwise.
PULSE
C
ELONG
E. STR
OFF
D
E
RETURN
359.9 ˚R
11.70nm
+
SIGNAL PROCESS soft keys
3. Press the A: I. REJ soft key successively to choose the interference rejection level
desired; LOW, MED, HIGH or OFF.
4. Press the E: RETURN soft key to finish.
The display shows IR L (Low), IR M (Medium) or IR H (High) when the interference rejector
is on.
2.15 Zoom
The zoom feature allows you to double the size of the area selected with the “zoom
square.” It is available on any range but is inoperative in true motion and when the display
is shifted.
2.15.1 Zooming radar targets
1. If not displayed, press the HIDE/SHOW key to show the radar soft keys.
2. Use the Trackball to set the cursor where you want to zoom.
3. Press the E: ZOOM & D. BOX soft key to show ZOOM & D. BOX soft keys.
4. Press the A: ZOOM ON/OFF soft key to select ON. A hollow square, called the “zoom
area,” appears on the display.
5. To release the cursor, press the B: CURSOR FLOAT soft key. (The hollow square
changes to a dashed one.) To relocate the zoom circle, select location with the
Trackball, then press the B: CURSOR LOCK key.
6. To quit the zoom function, press the A: ZOOM ON/OFF soft key to select OFF.
2-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. RADAR OPERATION
3nm
ZOOM &
D. BOX
12/LP
°
M
319. 9
HU
ZOOM
A
ON /OFF
Zoom area
CURSOR
B
FLOAT
ARP
C
TGT ZM
Requires optional
ARP Board in
D. BOX
D
ON/OFF
Model 18x40-BB/19x4-BB
series network radar.
Not shown otherwise.
E
RETURN
359.9 ˚R
5.727nm
+
Zoom window
Zoom
2.15.2 Zooming ARP, TTM targets
You may zoom in on TTM (Tracked Target Message) and ARP targets. TTM targets can
come from a NavNet connected radar, or from other ARP radar that is outputting the TTM
message. (TTM is a NMEA 0183 data sentence that is an available output from some ARP
capable radar.) Target numbers must be turned on to use this function. This can be done by
enabling the target ID number option in the ARP SETUP menu. This function is available
when TARGET ID NUMBER is ON.
1. If not displayed, press the HIDE/SHOW key to show the radar soft keys.
2. Press the E: ZOOM/D. BOX soft key to show ZOOM & D. BOX soft keys.
3. Press the A: ZOOM ON/OFF soft key to select ZOOM ON.
4. Press the C: ARP TGT ZM soft key.
SELECT TARGET NO.
▲
1
▼
Target no. selection window
5. Use the ENTER knob to select number (1-10), then push the ENTER knob. If the target
number does not exist several beeps sound and the zoom function is cancelled.
.
To cancel, press the B: CURSOR LOCK soft key.
Note: The zoom window blends in with the background when the background color for the
radar picture is white. If the window is difficult to see, change the background color.
2-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. RADAR OPERATION
2.16 Shifting the Picture
Own ship position, or sweep origin, can
be displaced manually or automatically
to expand the view field without
SHIFT
switching to a larger scale. Zoom is not
available when the display is shifted.
2.16.1 Manual shift
Cursor
The sweep origin can be shifted in any
presentation mode to a point specified
by the cursor by up to 50% of the
range in use in any direction.
Place cursor
where desired.
Press the A: MANUAL
soft key.
Manual shift
1. Locate the cursor anywhere within the effective radius of the display.
2. If not displayed, press the HIDE/SHOW key to show the radar soft keys.
3. Press the B: RADAR DISPLY soft key.
4. Press the B: SHIFT soft key.
5. Press the A: MANUAL soft key to shift. The heading line shifts to the cursor location.
SHIFT appears at right-hand corner of the display.
To cancel shift, press the B: RADAR DISPLY, B: SHIFT and D: OFF soft keys.
2.16.2 Automatic shift
The amount of automatic shift is calculated according to ship’s speed, and the amount of
shift is limited to 50% of the range in use. For example, if you set the shift speed setting for
15 knots and the ship is running at 10 knots the amount of shift will be about 34%. The
formula for determining shift amount is as shown below. Automatic shift mode is only
available in the head-up mode.
Ship's speed
X 0.5 = Amount of shift(%)
Shift speed setting
Setting automatic shift maximum speed
1. If not displayed, press the HIDE/SHOW key to show the radar soft keys.
2. Press the B: RADAR DISPLY soft key.
3. Press the B: SHIFT soft key to show the shift soft keys.
4. Press the C: AUTO S.SPD soft key to display the auto
ship speed setting window.
AUTO SHIP SPEED
15
5. Adjust the Trackball or ENTER knob to set the
maximum speed of your vessel, and then push the
ENTER knob or the C: ENTER soft key to set. The setting range is 1-99 kt and the
default setting is 15 kt.
Automatic shift
Press the B: AUTO soft key to automatically shift the sweep origin. To cancel shift, press
the B: RADAR DISPLY, B: SHIFT and D: OFF soft keys.
2-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. RADAR OPERATION
2.17 Using the Offset EBL
The offset EBL can be used to predict a potential collision course. It can also be used to
measure the range and bearing between two targets.
2.17.1 Predicting collision course
The procedure below may be used to check if a radar target is on a potential collision
course with your vessel.
1. Press the EBL/VRM key to show the EBL/VRM soft keys.
2. Press the A: EBL1 ON soft key to turn on the EBL1.
3. Press the C: OFFSET soft key. The origin of EBL1 moves to the cursor position, which
is marked with an “X.”
4. Use the Trackball to place the cursor on the radar target which looks like it might be on
a collision course with own ship.
5. Push the ENTER knob to fix the origin position.
6. After waiting for a few minutes (at least three minutes), rotate the ENTER knob so the
EBL bisects the target at the new position. If the target tracks along the EBL towards the
center of the display (your ship’s position), the target may be on a collision course with
your vessel.
To cancel the offset EBL, press the C: OFFSET soft key.
3nm
EBL
VRM
12/LP
319. 9°M
H-UP
EBL1
ON
A
VRM1
ON
B
Target tracked
here
C OFFSET
Initial target
position
EBL2
ON
D
VRM2
ON
E
EBL1
359.9 ˚R
45.0˚R
+
VRM1
11.70nm
-.---nm
Predicting collision course with the offset EBL
2-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. RADAR OPERATION
2.17.2 Measuring range & bearing between two targets
The procedure which follows shows how to measure the range and bearing between two
targets, using the targets “A” and “B” in the figure below as an example.
1. Operate the Trackball to place the cursor on the target “A.”
2. Press the EBL/VRM key to show the EBL/VRM soft keys.
3. Press the A: EBL1 ON soft key to turn on the EBL1.
4. Press the C: OFFSET soft key. The origin of EBL1 moves to the cursor position, which
is marked with an “X.”
5. Rotate the ENTER knob so the EBL bisects the target “B.”
6. Push the ENTER knob, then press the B: VRM1 ON soft key.
7. Rotate the ENTER knob to place the VRM1 on the inner edge of the target “B.”
8. Look at the indications for VRM1 and EBL1 to find the range and bearing between the
two targets.
To cancel the offset EBL, press the C: OFFSET soft key.
3nm
EBL
VRM
319. 9°M
12/LP
H-UP
EBL1
ON
A
B
Target B
Target A
VRM1
ON
C OFFSET
EBL2
D
ON
VRM2
ON
E
EBL1
VRM1
45.0°R
359.9 ˚R
+
Bearing and range
between target A
and target B
11.70nm
7.121nm
Measuring range and bearing between two targets
2-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. RADAR OPERATION
2.18 Echo Trails
Echo trails are simulated afterglow of target echoes that represent their movements relative
or true to own ship. This function is useful for alerting you past possible collision situations.
Echo trail
Sample echo trails
2.18.1 Trail time
1. If not displayed, press the HIDE/SHOW key to show the radar soft keys.
2. Press the D: TARGET soft key.
3. Press the A: TRAIL soft key to show the trail soft keys.
3nm
12/LP
M
TRAIL
319. 9
°
H-UP
TRAIL
ON /OFF
A
TRAIL
TIME
B
C
D
E
GRAD
SINGLE
TRAIL
COLOR
RETURN
359.9 ˚R
11.70nm
+
Trail soft keys
4. Press the B: TRAIL TIME soft key to show the trail time window.
TRAIL TIME
▲
ꢁ15 seconds
ꢀ30 seconds
ꢀ1 minute
ꢀ3 minutes
ꢀ6 minutes
ꢀ15 minutes
ꢀ30 minutes
ꢀCONTINUOUS
▲
Trail time window
5. Use the Trackball to select time desired.
6. Press the C: ENTER soft key.
7. Press the E: RETURN soft key twice to finish.
2-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. RADAR OPERATION
2.18.2 Starting echo trails
1. If not displayed, press the HIDE/SHOW key to show the radar soft keys.
2. Press the D: TARGET soft key.
3. Press the A: TRAIL soft key.
4. Press the A: TRAIL ON/OFF soft key to select ON.
5. Press the E: RETURN soft key twice to finish.
“TRAIL,” the echo trail time selected and elapsed time appear at the top right-hand corner
of the display. Then, afterglow starts extending from all targets. Trails are restarted when
the range or mode is changed and zoom or shift is turned on.
For continuous trails, the maximum continuous trail time is 99 minutes and 59 seconds.
When the elapsed time clock counts up to that time, the elapsed time display resets to zero
and trails begin again.
To turn off echo trail, press the A: TRAIL ON/OFF soft key to select OFF at step 4 in the
above procedure.
2.18.3 Trail gradation
The echo trails can be shown in single or multiple gradations. Multiple gradation paints the
trails thinner with time, like the afterglow on an analog PPI radar.
1. If not displayed, press the HIDE/SHOW soft key to show the radar soft keys.
2. Press the D: TARGET and A: TRAIL soft keys.
3. Press the C: GRAD soft key to select SINGLE or MULTI as appropriate.
4. Press the E: RETURN soft key twice to finish.
Multitone
Monotone
Multitone and monotone trails
2.18.4 Trail color
Trails may be shown target trails in blue, yellow, green or white.
1. If not displayed, press the HIDE/SHOW key to show the radar soft keys.
2. Press the D: TARGET, A: TRAIL and D: TRAIL COLOR soft keys in that order.
TRAIL COLOR
BLUE
YELLOW
GREEN
WHITE
Trail color window
3. Use the Trackball to select the color desired, then press the C: ENTER soft key.
4. Press the E: RETURN soft key twice.
2-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. RADAR OPERATION
2.18.5 Echo trail mode
Echo trails can be shown in Relative or True motion. (True trails require heading and speed
inputs.)
1. Press the MENU key.
2. Press the RADAR DISPLAY SETUP key.
3. Choose TRAIL MODE, then press the A: EDIT soft key.
TRAIL MODE
▲
~
{
▼
TRUE
RELATIVE
Trail mode window
4. Select TRUE or RELATIVE as appropriate, then press the C: ENTER soft key.
5. Press the MENU key to close the menu.
2.19 Echo Stretch
Normally, the reflected echoes from long range targets appear on the display as weaker
and smaller blips even though they are compensated by the radar’s internal circuitry. The
echo stretch function magnifies these small blips in all ranges. Two types of echo stretch
are available: ES LOW which stretches echoes in bearing direction and ES HIGH which
stretches them in both range and bearing directions.
Target
Range
direction
Bearing
Bearing
direction
direction
Echo Stretch OFF
"LOW" Echo stretch
"HIGH" Echo stretch
Types of echo stretch
This function magnifies not only targets but also sea clutter and radar interference. For this
reason, be sure sea clutter and radar interference are properly suppressed before activating
the echo stretch.
1. If not displayed, press the HIDE/SHOW key to show the radar soft keys.
2. Press the A: SIGNAL PROC. soft key.
3. Press the D: E. STR soft key to select HIGH, LOW or OFF as appropriate.
4. Press the E: RETURN soft key to finish.
The display shows ES H (High) or ES L (Low) when the echo stretch is on.
2-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. RADAR OPERATION
2.20 Echo Averaging
The echo average feature, which requires a Model 18x4/19x4 series network radar,
effectively suppresses sea clutter. Echoes received from stable targets such as ships
appear on the screen at almost the same position during every rotation of the antenna. On
the other hand, unstable echoes such as sea clutter appear at random positions.
To distinguish real target echoes from sea clutter, echo average performs scan-to-scan
correlation. Correlation is made by storing and averaging echo signals over successive
picture frames. If an echo is solid and stable, it is presented in its normal intensity. Sea
clutter is averaged over successive scans resulting in the reduced brilliance, making it
easier to discriminate real targets from sea clutter.
To properly use the echo average function, it is recommended to first suppress sea clutter
with the A/C SEA control and then do the following:
1. If not displayed, press the HIDE/SHOW key to display the radar soft keys.
2. Press the A: SIGNAL PROC. soft key.
3. Press the B: E. AVG soft key to select desired echo averaging.
OFF: No averaging
LOW: Helps distinguish targets from sea clutter and suppresses brilliance of unstable
echoes.
MED: Distinguishes small stationary targets such as navigation buoys.
HIGH: Stably displays distant targets.
4. Press the E: RETURN soft key to finish.
The display shows EAV L, EAV M or EAV H when echo averaging is on.
(a) Echo average OFF
(b) Echo average ON
Effect of echo averaging
2-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. RADAR OPERATION
2.21 Outputting TLL Data
Target position data can be output to units of the network and shown on their plotter screen
with the TLL mark (X). This function requires position and heading data.
1. Operate the Trackball to place the cursor on the target whose position you wish to
output.
2. If not displayed, press the HIDE/SHOW key to display the radar soft keys.
3. Press the D: TARGET soft key.
3nm
12/LP
319. 9°M
TARGET
H-UP
A TRAIL
TLL
B
OUTPUT
Requires ARP circuit board
C ACQ
in Model 18x4-BB/19x4-BB series
NavNet radar. Not shown
otherwise.
TARGET
INFO
D
E
RETURN
359.9 ˚R
11.70nm
+
TARGET soft keys
4. Press the B: TLL OUTPUT soft key to output target position data. The TLL mark
appears on the plotter screen at the target’s position the moment the B: TLL OUTPUT
soft key was pressed. Further, that position is recorded as a waypoint on all NavNet
units, under the youngest empty waypoint number on each NavNet unit.
5. Press the E: RETURN soft key to finish.
Note: The screen of the TLL recipient may be temporarily interrupted when receiving TLL
from another NavNet unit. Press any key to restore normal operation.
2-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. RADAR OPERATION
2.22 Guard Alarm
The guard alarm allows the operator to set the desired range and bearing for a guard zone.
When ships, islands, landmasses, etc. violate the guard zone, an audio alarm sounds and
the offending target blinks to call the operator’s attention.
CAUTION
• The alarm should not be relied upon as
the sole means for detecting possible
collision situations.
• A/C SEA, A/C RAIN and GAIN controls
should be properly adjusted to be sure
the alarm system does not overlook
target echoes.
2.22.1 Setting a guard alarm zone
To set a guard alarm zone, set the radar to transmit and do the following:
1. Press the ALARM key.
2. Use the Trackball to set the cursor on the top left corner (or top right corner) of the
guard zone you want to set, then press the A: SET GUARD1 or C: SET GUARD2 soft
key, depending on which guard zone you want to set.
3. Use the Trackball to set the cursor on the bottom right corner (or top left corner) of the
guard zone area, then push the ENTER knob.
4. Press the E: RETURN soft key to finish.
3nm
3nm
ALARM
12/LP
12/LP
319. 9°M
319. 9°M
ALARM
GUARD 1
H-UP
H-UP
SET
GUARD1
SET
GUARD1
A
A
1
2
ERASE
GUARD1
B
C
SET
GUARD2
SET
GUARD2
C
E
RETURN
E
RETURN
MOVE +CURSOR TO
ANOTHER CORNER OF
GUARD1 AND PUSH
KNOB TO SET.
NO ALARM
39.9 ˚R
317.2 ˚R
11.60nm
+
+
8.800nm
(2) Drag cursor diagonally to bottom (or top)
corner for guard zone and press the ENTER knob.
(1) Drag cursor to top (or bottom) corner
for guard zone and press the A: SET
GUARD1 or C: SET GUARD2 soft key.
The soft keys disappear and the instruction
box appears at left-hand cursor.
How to set a guard alarm zone
The equipment then searches for targets inside the guard zone to determine guard alarm
type. If a target is found inside the guard zone, the guard zone type becomes an “Outward
guard alarm,” and any target exiting the guard zone will trigger the audio alarm. If no target
is found, the guard zone type becomes an “Inward guard alarm,” and any targets entering
the guard zone will trigger the audio alarm. The guard alarm type is shown as G1(G2) IN or
G1(G2) OUT.
2-22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. RADAR OPERATION
Note 1: When the radar range is less than the guard zone range “G1 (G2) IN” or “G1 (G2)
OUT” changes to “G1 (G2) ***.” The guard alarm function is not available while this
indication appears.
Note 2: If the network radar is set to standby while the guard alarm is active, the guard
alarm is cancelled. The guard alarm is redisplayed when the radar is set to transmit again.
2.22.2 When the alarm is violated…
Any radar target violating the guard zone will flash, the audio alarm sounds, and the alarm
icon appears in red. Additionally the message “TARGET ENTERED INTO
GUARD1(GUARD2)” or “TARGET LEFT FROM GUARD1(GUARD2)” is displayed at the
bottom of the screen. Press the CLEAR key to silence the alarm.
2.22.3 Cancelling the guard alarm
1. Press the ALARM key to show the ALARM menu.
2. Press the B: ERASE GUARD1 or D: ERASE GUARD2 soft key as appropriate.
3. Press the E: RETURN soft key to finish.
2.23 Watchman
2.23.1 How watchman works
The watchman function periodically transmits radar pulses for one minute to check for
targets in a guard zone. If a target is found in the zone, watchman is cancelled, the audio
alarm sounds and the radar continues transmitting. If no target is found the radar goes into
standby for the number of minutes specified on the RADAR DISPLAY SETUP menu. This
feature is useful when you do not need the radar’s function continuously but want to be
alerted to radar targets in a specific area. “WTCH” appears at the top left corner when
Watchman is active.
*
*
ST-BY
Tx
Tx
ST-BY
5,10
1 min
1 min
5,10
or
or
20 min
20 min
Watchman
starts
* Beeps emitted just before radar transmits.
How watchman works
2.23.2 Turning on/off watchman
1. Set a guard zone. (See the paragraph 2.22.)
2. If not displayed, press the HIDE/SHOW key to display the radar soft keys.
3. Press the C: NAV FUNC soft key.
4. Press the A: W. MAN ON/OFF soft key to select ON or OFF as appropriate.
5. Press the E: RETURN soft key to finish.
2-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. RADAR OPERATION
Note: When the watchman is activated and no guard zone is active, the message “PLEASE
SET GUARD ZONE. PUSH ANY KEY TO CONTINUE.” appears. Press any key and then
set a guard zone.
2.23.3 Setting watchman stand-by interval
The watchman standby interval, that is, the number of minutes the radar is in standby, can
be set to 5, 10 or 20 minutes as follows:
1. Press the MENU key.
2. Press the A: RADAR DISPLAY SETUP soft key.
3. Select WATCHMAN TIME, then press the A: EDIT soft key.
WATCHMAN TIME
ꢁ
ꢀ
ꢀ
5 minutes
10 minutes
20 minutes
Watchman window
4. Select time desired, then press the C: ENTER soft key.
5. Press the MENU key to close the menu.
2.24 Suppressing Second-trace Echoes
In certain situations, echoes from very distance targets may appear as false echoes
(second-trace echoes) on the screen. This occurs when the return echo is received one
transmission cycle later, or after a next radar pulse has been transmitted.
Tx repetition
Second-trace
echo
False echo
range
Actual range
Second-trace echoes
To activate or deactivate the second-trace echo rejector do the following:
1. Press the MENU key.
2. Press the A: RADAR DISPLAY SETUP soft key.
3. Use the Trackball to select 2ND ECHO REJECTION, then press the A: EDIT soft key.
4. Choose ON or OFF as appropriate, then press the C: ENTER soft key.
5. Press the MENU key to close the menu.
2-24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. RADAR OPERATION
2.25 Waypoint Marker
A waypoint marker, showing the location of the destination waypoint set on the plotter, may
be inscribed on the radar display.
12/ L 3nm
NAV
SP
°
M
319. 9
FUNC
Waypoint
W. MAN
ON/OFF
marker
A
B
WPT MK
ON /OFF
E
RETURN
359.9 ˚R
11.70nm
+
Waypoint marker
1. If not already shown, press the HIDE/SHOW key to display the radar soft keys.
2. Press the C: NAV FUNC soft key.
3. Press the B: WPT MK ON/OFF soft key to select ON or OFF as appropriate.
4. Press the E: RETURN soft key to finish.
2-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. RADAR OPERATION
2.26 ARP, TTM Operation
When the radar source is an ARP-equipped Model 18x4-BB/19x4-BB series network radar,
you can manually and automatically acquire and track ten targets. Once a target is acquired
automatically or manually it is automatically tracked within 0.1 to 32 nm. If the FURUNO
heading sensor PG-1000 is used, the data sentence “RMC” is necessary.
Alternatively, you can display the tracks of other ships by receiving the data sentence TTM
(Tracked Target Message) via the NETWORK or NMEA port on the processor unit.
However, targets cannot be acquired.
Note: When using your unit as remote display, you cannot change the range of the main
radar at the remote display. For the target acquisition, set the range individually.
Usage precautions for ARP
CAUTION
The plotting accuracy and response of
this auto plotter meets IMO standards.
Tracking accuracy is affected by the
following:
CAUTION
No one navigational aid should be relied
upon for the safety of vessel and crew.
The navigator has the responsibility to
check all aids available to confirm
position. Electronic aids are not
a substitute for basic navigational
principles and common sense.
• Tracking accuracy is affected by course
change. One to two minutes is required to
restore vectors to full accuracy after an
abrupt course change. (The actual
amount depends on gyrocompass
specifications.)
• The amount of tracking delay is inversely
proportional to the relative speed of the
target. Delay is on the order of 15-30
seconds for high relative speed; 30-60
seconds for low relative speed.
• This auto plotter automatically tracks an
automatically or manually acquired radar
target and calculates its course and
speed, indicating them by a vector. Since
the data generated by the auto plotter
are based on what radar targets are
selected, the radar must always be
optimally tuned for use with the auto
plotter, to ensure required targets will not
be lost or unwanted targets such as sea
returns and noise will not be acquired
and tracked.
Display accuracy is affected by the
following:
• Echo intensity
• A target does not always mean a land-
mass, reef, ships or other surface vessels
but can imply returns from sea surface
and clutter. As the level of clutter changes
with environment, the operator should
properly adjust the A/C SEA, A/C RAIN
and GAIN controls to be sure target
echoes are not eliminated from the
radar screen.
• Radar transmission pulsewidth
• Radar bearing error
• Gyrocompass error
• Course change (own ship or target)
2-26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. RADAR OPERATION
2.26.1 Activating/deactivating ARP, TTM
1. Press the MENU key followed by the C: ARP SETUP soft key to show the ARP SETUP
menu.
ARP
SETUP
ARP TARGET INFO
CANCEL ALL TARGETS
ARP VECTOR MODE
ARP VECTOR TIME
HISTORY INTERVAL
CPA
INTERNAL ARP
NO
A
EDIT
TRUE
30 minutes
OFF
OFF
TCPA
30 seconds
E
RETURN
AUTO ACQUISITION AREA OFF
TARGET ID NUMBER OFF
ARP setup menu
2. Select ARP TARGET INFO, then press the A: EDIT soft key to show the ARP target info
window.
ARP TARGET INFO
▲
ꢁ
INTERNAL ARP
EXTERNAL ARP
OFF
ꢀ
ꢀ
▲
ARP target info window
3. Select INTERNAL ARP, EXTERNAL ARP or OFF as appropriate.
INTERNAL ARP: The radar source must be an ARP-equipped Model 18x4-BB/19x4-BB
series NavNet radar. Select this item also for a NavNet unit being fed ARP targets.
EXTERNAL ARP: Receive TTM data sentence via NMEA or NETWORK port. Target
tracks are shown but targets cannot be acquired.
OFF: Turns off the ARP or TTM display.
4. Press the C: ENTER soft key.
5. Press the MENU key to close the menu.
2.26.2 Acquiring and tracking targets (ARP)
Ten targets may be acquired and tracked manually and automatically. When you attempt to
acquire an 11th target, the message “ARP FULL – ALREADY TRACKING 10 TARGETS!”
appears for five seconds. To acquire another target, terminate tracking of an unnecessary
target as shown in the paragraph “2.26.4 Terminating tracking of ARP targets.”
Manual acquisition
When the automatic acquisition (AUTO ACQ. AREA) is set to on, up to five targets may be
acquired manually. If you attempt to acquire a sixth target, the alert message appears.
2-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. RADAR OPERATION
1. If not already shown, press the HIDE/SHOW key to show the radar soft keys.
2. Press the D: TARGET soft key.
3. Place the cursor on the target to acquire.
4. Press the C: ACQ soft key.
5. Press the E: RETURN soft key to finish.
The plot symbol changes over time as below. A vector appears about one minute after
acquisition, indicating the target’s motion trend.
Vector
01*
3 min. after
acquisition
Target Number
01*
1 min. after
acquisition
01*
At acquisition
* = Target number shown when TARGET ID NUMBER is
turned on in the ARP SETUP menu.
ARP plot symbols
Note: In case of the acquisition by an external ARP, the acquisition circle mark appears one
minute after acquisition.
Automatic acquisition
The ARP can acquire up to ten targets
automatically by setting an automatic
Automatic acquisition area
acquisition area. When automatic acquisition is
45° port
2.0 - 2.5 nm
45° starboard
selected after acquiring targets manually, only
the remaining capacity for targets may be
automatically acquired. For example, if seven
targets have been manually acquired, three
targets may be automatically acquired.
Automatic acquisition area
1. Press the MENU key to show the main
menu.
2. Press the C: ARP SETUP soft key to show the ARP SETUP menu.
3. Operate the Trackball to select AUTO ACQUISITION AREA.
4. Press the A: EDIT soft key to show the automatic acquisition area window.
AUTO ACQ. AREA
▲
ꢀ
ON
OFF
ꢁ
▲
Automatic acquisition area window
5. Select ON, then press the C: ENTER soft key.
6. Press the MENU key to close the menu. An acquisition area of 2.0 to 2.5 miles in range
and ±45º on either side of the heading line in bearing appears.
Note: Targets being tracked in automatic acquisition are continuously tracked when
switching to manual acquisition.
2-28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. RADAR OPERATION
2.26.3 Displaying target number (ARP, TTM)
Target number can be shown for ARP and TTM targets as below.
12/3LnPm
319. 9°T
TARGET
H-UP
A TRAIL
TLL
OUTPUT
B
01
C ACQ
ARP
Target
Number
TARGET
INFO
D
E
RETURN
359.9 ˚R
11.70nm
+
ARP target number
1. Press the MENU key.
2. Press the C: ARP SETUP soft key.
3. Select TARGET ID NUMBER.
4. Press the A: EDIT soft key.
5. Select ON or OFF as appropriate.
6. Press the C: ENTER soft key.
7. Press the MENU key to close the menu.
2.26.4 Terminating tracking of ARP targets
When ten targets have been acquired, no more acquisition occurs unless targets are
cancelled. If you need to acquire additional targets, you must first cancel one or more
individual targets, or all targets, using one of the procedures below.
Terminating tracking of selected targets
1. Place the cursor on the target to terminate tracking.
2. Press the CLEAR key to terminate tracking and erase the target.
Terminating tracking of all targets
1. Press the MENU key followed by the C: ARP SETUP
soft key.
CANCEL ALL TARGETS
▲
2. Select CANCEL ALL TARGETS.
3. Press the A: EDIT soft key.
4. Select YES.
ꢀ
YES
NO
ꢁ
▲
5. Press the C: ENTER soft key.
6. Press the E: RETURN soft key followed by the MENU
key to close the menu.
Cancel all targets window
2-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. RADAR OPERATION
2.26.5 Setting vector attributes (ARP)
What is a vector?
A vector is a line extending from a tracked target which shows estimated speed and course
of the target. The vector tip shows an estimated position of the target after the selected
vector time elapses. It can be useful to extend the vector length (time) in order to evaluate
the risk of collision with any target.
Vector
Vector
Vector reference, vector time
You may reference the vectors to North (True, requires heading and speed data) or ship’s
heading (relative) as desired. Vector time can be set to 30 seconds, 1, 3, 6, 15 or 30
minutes.
1. Press the MENU key followed by the C: ARP SETUP soft key to show the ARP SETUP
menu.
2. Operate the Trackball to select ARP VECTOR MODE.
3. Press the A: EDIT soft key to show the ARP vector mode window.
ARP VECTOR MODE
ꢁ
ꢀ
RELATIVE
TRUE
ꢀ
ARP vector mode window
4. Select TRUE or RELATIVE as appropriate.
5. Press the C: ENTER soft key.
6. Select ARP VECTOR TIME, then press the A: EDIT soft key to show the ARP vector
time window.
ARP VECTOR TIME
▲
ꢁ
30 seconds
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
▲
1 minute
3 minutes
6 minutes
15 minutes
30 minutes
ARP vector time window
7. Operate the Trackball to select vector time among 30 sec, 1 min, 3 min, 6 min, 15 min
and 30 min.
8. Press the C: ENTER soft key.
9. Press the MENU key to close the menu.
2-30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. RADAR OPERATION
2.26.6 Displaying past position (ARP)
This ARP can display time-spaced dots (maximum ten dots) marking the past positions of
any targets being tracked. You can evaluate a target’s actions by the spacing between dots.
Below are examples of dot spacing and target movement.
(a) Ship turning
(b) Ship running
straight
(d) Ship increased
speed
(c) Ship reduced
speed
Past position displays
To turn the past position display on or off:
1. Press the MENU key followed by the C: ARP SETUP soft key.
2. Operate the Trackball to select HISTORY INTERVAL.
3. Press the A: EDIT soft key to show the history interval window.
HISTORY INTERVAL
▲
ꢁ
OFF
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
30 seconds
1 minute
3 minutes
6 minutes
▲
History interval window
4. Operate the Trackball to select history interval among 30 sec, 1 min, 3 min and 6 min,
or select OFF to turn off the past position display.
5. Press the C: ENTER soft key.
6. Press the MENU key to close the menu.
2.26.7 ARP, TTM target data
You can show motion trends (range, bearing, course, speed, CPA and TCPA) for ARP or
TTM targets. Note that TARGET ID NUMBER, in the ARP SETUP menu, must be turned on
to display this data.
1. Place the cursor on the target whose data you want to see.
2. If not already displayed, press the HIDE/SHOW key to show the radar soft keys.
3. Press the D: TARGET and D: TARGET INFO soft keys. The data of the selected target
appears at the bottom left-hand corner of the display. (If an EBL/VRM data box is
displayed the ARP (TTM) data box will be under it.)
4. Press the E: RETURN soft key to finish.
To erase ARP/TTM target data, select the corresponding target with the cursor, then press
the CLEAR key.
2-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. RADAR OPERATION
3nm
12/LP
319. 9°T
TARGET
H-UP
A TRAIL
Cursor
TLL
B
OUTPUT
C ACQ
ARP
Target
01
TARGET
D
INFO
E
RETURN
No.01 VECTOR TRUE 15min
CSE 359.9˚T SPD 12.5kt
CPA 2.21nm TCPA 12:35
359.9 ˚R
11.70nm
+
CPA and TCPA
Course and Speed
Target No., Vector Reference (True), Vector Time
ARP target data
2.26.8 CPA/TCPA alarm (ARP)
When the predicted CPA of any target becomes smaller than a preset CPA alarm range or
its predicted TCPA less than a preset TCPA alarm limit, an audio alarm sounds and the
speaker icon appears (in red). In addition, the target plot symbol of the offending target
changes to a triangle and flashes together with its vector. You may silence the audio alarm
with the CLEAR key. Press the ALARM key and the message “COLLISION ALARM”
appears. Press the C: CLEAR ALARM soft key to acknowledge the alarm. The flashing of
the triangle plot symbol continues until you intentionally terminate tracking of the target. The
ARP continuously monitors the predicted range at the Closest Point of Approach (CPA) and
predicted time to CPA (TCPA) of each track to own ship.
This feature helps alert you to targets which may be on a collision course with own ship.
However, it is important that gain, A/C SEA, A/C RAIN and other radar controls are properly
adjusted and the ARP is set up so that it can track targets effectively.
CPA/TCPA alarm ranges must be set up properly taking into consideration the size,
tonnage, speed, turning performance and other characteristics of own ship.
CAUTION
The CPA/TCPA alarm should never be
relied upon as the sole means for detect-
ing the risk of collision. The navigator is
not relieved of the responsibility to keep
visual lookout for avoiding collisions,
whether or not the radar or other plotting
aid is in use.
2-32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. RADAR OPERATION
Follow the steps shown below to set the CPA/TCPA alarm
range:
CPA
▲
~
OFF
1. Press the MENU key followed by the C: ARP SETUP soft
key.
{
{
{
{
{
{
▼
0.5nm
1nm
2nm
3nm
5nm
6nm
2. Operate the Trackball to select CPA.
3. Press the A: EDIT soft key to show the CPA window.
4. Select a CPA limit desired from 0.5 nm, 1 nm, 2 nm, 3
nm, 5 nm and 6 nm with the Trackball.
5. Press the C: ENTER soft key. The ARP SETUP menu
reappears.
CPA distance
TCPA
6. Operate the Trackball to select TCPA.
7. Press the A: EDIT soft key to show the TCPA window.
8. Select a TCPA limit from 30 sec, 1 min, 2 min, 3 min, 4
min, 5 min, 6 min and 12 min.
9. Press the C: ENTER soft key.
10. Press the MENU key to close the menu.
▲
~
30 seconds
1 minute
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
▼
2 minutes
3 minutes
4 minutes
5 minutes
6 minutes
12 minutes
2.26.9 Lost target alarm (ARP)
TCPA time
When the system detects a lost target, the target symbol
becomes a diamond and tracking is discontinued after one
minute.
01
Lost target mark
Canceling a lost target
1. Place the cursor on the target.
2. Press the CLEAR key.
2-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. RADAR OPERATION
2.27 Interpreting the Radar Display
2.27.1 False echoes
Occasionally echo signals appear on the screen at positions where there is no target or
disappear even if there are targets. False target situations may be recognized, however, if
you understand why they are displayed. Typical false echoes are shown below.
Multiple echoes
Multiple echoes occur when a transmitted
True
echo
pulse returns from a solid object like a
large ship, bridge, or breakwater. A
second, a third or more echoes may be
observed on the display at double, triple or
other multiples of the actual range of the
target as shown below. Multiple reflection
echoes can be reduced and often
removed by decreasing the gain
Target
Own ship
Multiple
echo
(sensitivity) or properly adjusting the A/C
SEA control.
Multiple echoes
Sidelobe echoes
Every time the radar pulse is transmitted,
some radiation escapes on each side of
the beam. This stray RF is called a
“sidelobe.” If a target exists where it can
be detected by the sidelobes as well as
the main lobe, the side echoes may be
represented on both sides of the true echo
at the same range. Sidelobes show
Target A
Target B
(Spurious)
Target B
(True)
Sidelobe echoes
usually only on short ranges and from
strong targets. They can be reduced
through careful reduction of the gain or
proper adjustment of the A/C SEA control.
Target ship
Own
ship
Virtual image
A relatively large target close to your ship
may show at two positions on the screen.
One of them is the true echo directly
reflected by the target and the other is a
false echo which is caused by the mirror
effect of a large object on or close to your
ship as shown in the figure below. If your
ship comes close to a large metal bridge,
for example, such a false echo may
temporarily be seen on the screen.
Virtual image
True
echo
Mirror image
of target ship
False
echo
Virtual image
2-34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. RADAR OPERATION
Shadow sector
Funnels, stacks, masts, or derricks in the path of the
antenna block the radar beam. If the angle subtended
at the antenna is more than a few degrees, a
Radar
antenna
non-detecting sector or blind spot may be produced.
Within this sector, targets can not be detected.
Radar
mast
2.27.2 SART (Search and Rescue Transponder)
A Search and Rescue Transponder (SART) may be triggered by any X-Band (3 cm) radar
within a range of approximately 8 nm. Each radar pulse received causes it to transmit a
response which is swept repetitively across the complete radar frequency band. When
interrogated, it first sweeps rapidly (0.4 µs) through the band before beginning a relatively
slow sweep (7.5 µs) through the band back to the starting frequency. This process is
repeated for a total of twelve complete cycles. At some point in each sweep, the SART
frequency will match that of the interrogating radar and be within the pass band of the radar
receiver. If the SART is within range, the frequency match during each of the 12 slow
sweeps will produce a response on the radar display, thus a line of 12 dots equally spaced
by about 0.64 nautical miles will be shown.
When the range to the SART is reduced to about 1 nm, the radar display may show also the
12 responses generated during the fast sweeps. These additional dot responses, which
also are equally spaced by 0.64 nm, will be interspersed with the original line of 12 dots.
They will appear slightly weaker and smaller than the original dots.
Screen A:When SART
is distant
Screen B:When SART
is close
Lines of 12
dots are
displayed in
concentric
Echo from SART Radar antenna
beamwidth
Echo from
SART
24 NM
1.5 NM
Position of
SART
Own ship
position
Own ship
position
Position of
SART
SART mark
length
9500 MHz
Radar receiver
bandwidth
9200 MHz
Sweep time
7.5 µs
95 µs
Low speed sweep signal
High speed sweep signal
Sweep start
Appearance of SART signal on the radar display
2-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. RADAR OPERATION
General procedure for detecting SART response
1. Use the range scale of 6 or 12 nm as the spacing between the SART responses is
about 0.6 nm (1125 m) to distinguish the SART.
2. Turn off the automatic clutter suppression (if applicable).
3. Turn off the Interference Rejector.
2.27.3 Racon (Radar Beacon)
A racon is a radar transponder which emits a characteristic signal when triggered by a
ship’s radar (usually only the 3 centimeter band). The signal may be emitted on the same
frequency as that of the triggering radar, in which case it is superimposed on the ship's
radar display automatically.
The racon signal appears on the PPI as a radial line originating at a point just beyond the
position of the radar beacon or as a Morse code signal (see figure below) displayed radially
from just beyond the beacon.
Racon
Appearance of racon signal on the radar display
2-36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. PLOTTER OPERATION
3.1 Plotter Displays
You may show the plotter display over the entire screen, in the overlay screen with the
radar display, or in a combination screen.
3.1.1 Full-screen plotter display
Nav data window
(Data changes with NAV soft
key setting and cursor
status. For details see next page.)
34° 22. 3456'N 359.9°
M
TRIP
NU
080° 22. 3456'E 19.9 kt
99.9 nm
S
I
Scale
16.0nm
MARK
ENTRY
M
A
MODE
NTH UP
Icon (from left)
North Marker
Chart
B
C
Soft keys
NAV
POS
Alarm
Track Hold
Chart Offset
Save
L/L Offset
Battery
Simulation
(See icon
table on
002WPT
FISH
BRIDGE
D. BOX
ON/ OFF
E
page A-12
for details.)
Track
Waypoint name
Waypoint marker
Own ship
marker
Course bar
Full-screen plotter display
Note: When GPS signal error is found, the following occurs depending on the device
feeding position data:
GPS Receiver GP-310B/320B: Alarm icon ( ) appears and the aural alarm sounds. Own
ship marker blinks faster.
Other navigator: The message “NO GPS FIX” appears and is accompanied by the aural
alarm and alarm icon. If the GPS signal is missing for more than 90 seconds, the message
“NO POSITION DATA” appears.
Nav data window
The data shown in the nav data window depends on the status of the C: NAV soft key and
the cursor.
3-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. PLOTTER OPERATION
Presentation
Mode
Latitude, Longitude
Bearing to Cursor
Latitude and longitude
of cursor intersection
34°24. 3456'N
359. 9°M
TRIP
99. 9nm
NU
+
124°24. 3456'W
59.9nm
Cursor Mark
Trip Distance
Range to
Cursor
Presentation
Mode
Waypoint Name Bearing to Waypoint
Course
Waypoint data
(waypoint selected
with cursor)
359. 9°M 359. 9°
NU
19. 9nm 19. 9ktM 99T.R9IPnm
001WPT
Waypoint Mark
Range to Waypoint Speed
Trip Distance
Presentation
Mode
Own ship
position
NAV
POS
Latitude, Longitude
Course
34°24. 3456'N
359. 9°M
TRIP NU
soft key
124°24. 3456'W
19. 9kt
99. 9nm
Own Ship Mark
Speed
Trip Distance
Time-to-Go
to Destination
Destination
waypoint
data
Waypoint Name Bearing to Waypoint
NAV
WPT
Presentation
Mode
359. 9°M
4D02H23M
NU
19. 9nm ETTTGA1st 13:45
001WPT
soft key
Waypoint Mark
Estimated Time of
Arrival
Range to Waypoint
Presentation
Mode
Bearing to Waypoint
Own ship
speed and
course
Course, Speed
NAV
S/C
CSE
BRG
RNG
M
M
TMP
DPT
359. 9°
359. 9 °
79. 9°F
NU
soft key
SOG
19. 9kt
99. 9nm
345 ft
Water Temp.*, * Requires appropriate
Range
Depth*
sensor.
to
Turns off
nav data
window
Waypoint
NAV
OFF
soft key
Contents of nav data window
3-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. PLOTTER OPERATION
3.1.2 Nav graphic display
The nav graphic display shows the compass display or the wind display depending on the
setting of GRAPHIC METER in the NAV GRAPHIC DISPLAY SETUP menu. For further
details see paragraph 7.10.
Compass display
The compass display, shown in combination displays, provides steering information. The
compass rose shows two triangles: the red triangle shows own ship’s course and the black
triangle, which moves with ship’s course, shows the bearing to destination waypoint.
The water temperature and depth graphs, which require appropriate sensors, show the
latest 10 minutes of water temperature and depth data. The range of the depth graph is 50
feet and it is automatically adjusted with depth. You may adjust the update interval for these
graphs on the NAV GRAPHIC DISPLAY SETUP menu.
Destination
Speed over ground
waypoint
Range to destination waypoint
Speed through water
RNG 99.9nm
003WPT
10.0kt STW 10.0 kt
SOG
Estimated time of
Time-to-go
TTG 0D 9H 59M
23th23:59
ETA
arrival at destination
to destination
BRG
TMP
DPT
45.2ft
359.9°M
16.2°F
20
Destination
waypoint
bearing
0
N
Ship's course
(red)
(black)
CSE
359.9°M
Depth
graph*
Water
temperature
graph*
50
10
* = Requires appropriate
sensor.
Shown (in red
Direction to steer
(green)
on color model)
when direction to
steer is "left."
Own ship marker
(Black when within
Bearing scale
XTE range, yellow when over.)
XTE monitor
(See next page for
description.)
Compass display
3-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. PLOTTER OPERATION
Reading the XTE (cross-track error) monitor
The XTE monitor, located below the compass rose, shows the distance you are off course
and the direction to steer to return to course. The own ship marker moves according to
direction and distance off course. It is shown in black when the amount of cross-track error
is within the XTE monitor range and yellow when it is over. An arrow appears at the right or
left side of the XTE monitor and it shows the direction to steer to return to intended course.
It is shown in red when you should steer left, and green when you should steer right. In the
example on the previous page you would steer right to return to course. To maintain course,
steer the vessel so the own ship marker stays at the center of the XTE monitor.
Soft keys
You can show the soft keys for the compass display by pressing the HIDE/SHOW key.
E: COMPSS CNTRL: On the radar/plotter/compass combination display you can switch
control to the compass display by pressing the E: CNTRL soft key to select COMPSS.
C: EDIT XT-LMT: Sets the range for XTE monitor scale. See the procedure below for how
to set.
A: RESET XTE: This soft key may be operated to restart navigation, when a destination is
set. Press the C: EDIT XT-LMT soft key followed by the A: RESET XTE soft key. The
following message is displayed.
RESTART NAVGATION TO
CURRENT WPT.
ARE YOU SURE?
YES ... PUSH ENTER KNOB
NO ... PUSH CLEAR KEY
Setting the range for the XTE monitor
1. With the compass (or highway) display shown, press the C: EDIT XT-LMT soft key to
display the following window.
XTE LIMIT
0 .1nm
XTE range setting window
2. Use the Trackball to select digit to change. Note that all digits may be cleared by
pressing the CLEAR key.
3. Enter value with the alphanumeric keys.
4. Push the ENTER knob to set, or press the E: CANCEL soft key to cancel.
3-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. PLOTTER OPERATION
Anemometer display
The anemometer display shows mostly the same data as the compass display. The wind
meter in the center of the display shows wind speed in the bow direction, in graphic and
analog forms.
RNG
SOG
*D *H *M
WIND APPARENT
4259nm
P<01>
20.0kt
STW
20.2kt
* *: *
TMP
TTG
DPT
ETA
45
°
S
123ft
12.3°C
12.3kt
WIND SPEED
Anemometer display
3-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. PLOTTER OPERATION
3.1.3 Highway display
The highway display, shown in the combination display of radar/compass/highway and
plotter/compass/highway, provides a graphic presentation of ship’s track along intended
course. It is useful for monitoring ship’s progress toward a waypoint. The own ship marker
shows the relation between ship and intended course. The XTE monitor shows the direction
and amount your vessel is off course – the arrow shows the direction to steer to return to
your course and the numeric the distance you are off course. Using the figure below as an
example, you would steer right 0.009 nm to return to course. To maintain course, steer the
vessel so the own ship marker stays aligned with the intended course line.
Destination
waypoint
Range to destination waypoint
Speed over ground,
speed through water
RNG
99.9 nm
STW 10.0 kt
WPT001
10.0kt
ETA
SOG
TTG
0D 9H 59M
23th23:59
Time-to-go
Estimated time of
to destination
arrival at destination
WPT001
Destination
waypoint
Intended course
Own ship marker
0.009nm
0.9 nm
0.9 nm
XTE range
Direction to steer
(green)
Shown (in red) when
direction to steer
is "left."
XTE monitor
Highway display
Soft keys
You can show the soft keys for the highway display by pressing the HIDE/SHOW key.
E: HIWAY CNTRL: On the radar/plotter/compass combination display you can switch
control to the highway display by pressing the E: CNTRL soft key to show HIWAY.
C: EDIT XT-LMT: Sets the range for XTE monitor scale. See the procedure on the previous
page for how to set.
A: RESET XTE: This soft key may be operated to restart navigation, when a destination is
set. Press the C: EDIT XT-LMT soft key followed by the A: RESET XTE soft key. See the
previous page for details.
3-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. PLOTTER OPERATION
3.1.4 Nav data display
The nav data display provides comprehensive navigation data, and it is shown in a
three-screen combination display. The user may select what data to display and where to
display it. For details see the paragraph “7.8 Nav Data Display Setup.”
Appropriate sensors are required. Bars ( - -) appear when corresponding sensor is not
connected.
Position
POSITION
34° 34. 5678' N
120° 34. 5678'
W
WPT POSITION
SOG
34° 14. 5678' WN
10.0 kt
120° 14. 5678'
STW
COURSE
10.0 kt
BEARING
101.6°
RANGE
M
9.2°
M
0.18 nm
TEMP
DEPTH
1324.1 ft
18.2 °C
Water temperature
Depth
Bearing to
Waypoint
Range to
waypoint
Course
Speed through
water
Waypoint
Position
Speed over ground
Nav data displays
3-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. PLOTTER OPERATION
3.2 Presentation Mode
Three types of presentation modes are provided for the plotter display: north-up, course-up
and auto course-up. To change the presentation mode, press the HIDE/SHOW key followed
by the B: MODE soft key. Each press of the key changes the presentation mode and
presentation mode indication (top right-hand corner of the screen) cyclically in the sequence
of North-up, Course-up and Auto course-up.
For C-map model, the sequence is North-up, Perspective, Course-up and Auto course-up
when PERSPECTIVE DISPLAY is set to ON, on the CHART DETAILS menu. (See Chapter
7.)
North-up
North (zero degree) is at the top of the display and own ship is shown with a filled circle.
This mode is useful for long-range navigation.
Course-up
34° 22. 3456’N 359.9°M TRIP NU
080° 22. 3456’E 19.9 kt
99.9 nm
The course-up mode is useful for monitoring
ship’s progress towards a waypoint. The
MARK
A
B
C
16.0nm
ENTRY
destination is at the top of the screen when a
destination is set. When no destination is set,
the course or heading is at the top of the screen
at the moment the course-up mode is selected.
A filled triangle marks own ship’s position.
MODE
NTH UP
NAV
POS
WP-002
FISH
BRIDGE
D.BOX
ON/ OFF
E
Note: The data sentences GGA and VTG must
be output from the NavNet unit connected to the
GPS navigator in order to correctly orient the
own ship marker in the course-up mode on other
NavNet units.
North-up
34° 22. 3456'N 272.4°M TRIP CU
+
16.0nm
080° 22. 3456'E 15.9 nm
99.9 nm
WPT 001
MARK
A
B
ENTRY
Auto course-up
MODE
CSE UP
The course is at the top of screen at the moment
the auto course-up mode is selected. In this
mode, the current course is kept at the top of the
screen when the change is within 22.5 degrees.
For example, if your vessel turns larger than
22.5 degrees to port or starboard, the chart
display will rotate so that your course is pointing
towards the top of the screen again. A filled
triangle marks own ship’s position.
C CENTER
GO TO
D
CURSOR
D.BOX
E
ON /OFF
Course-up
34° 22. 3456'N 272.4°M TRIP CU
080° 22. 3456'E 15.9 nm 99.9 nm
+
MARK
ENTRY
16.0nm
A
MODE
AT CU
B
Perspective (C-map only)
C CENTER
Chart data is projected in perspective mode, for
3D simulation, during navigation.
GO TO
D
CURSOR
D.BOX
E
ON/ OFF
3-8
Auto course-up
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. PLOTTER OPERATION
3.3 Shifting the Display
The plotter display can be shifted as below.
1. Use the Trackball to locate the cursor at a screen edge. The screen shifts in the
direction opposite of cursor location.
2. To turn off the cursor, press the C: CENTER soft key. This also returns the own ship
marker to the screen center.
3.4 Chart Scale
Chart scale (range) may be selected with the [RANGE -] or [RANGE +] key. The
[-] key shrinks the chart range (image is expanded); the [+] key expands the cart
range (image is shrunk). The available ranges are as below.
Charts scales
nm 0.125 0.25 0.5
1
2
4
8
16
32
64
128
256
474
295
512 1024 2048*
948 1896 3792
589 1178 2356
km 0.23 0.46 0.93 1.85 3.70 7.41 14.8 29.6 59.3 119 237
sm 0.144 0.29 0.58 1.15 2.30 4.60 9.21 18.4 36.8 73.7 147
*: 2046 or 2047 in high latitude
3.5 Chart Cards
3.5.1 Chart card overview
Your system reads Navionics GOLD charts
or C-MAP NT MAX charts, depending on
the type of processor unit you have.
Icon
Meaning
Proper card is not inserted or
chart scale is too small. Press
the ZOOM IN soft key to adjust
chart scale.
When you insert a suitable chart card in
the slot and own ship is near any
Chart scale is too large.
Operate the RANGE key to
adjust chart scale.
cartographic object, a chart appears. If a
wrong card is inserted or a wrong chart
scale is selected, landmasses will appear
hollow. Chart icons appear at the top of the
display to help you select a suitable chart
scale. The table below shows the chart
icons and their meanings.
Suitable chart scale is
selected.
Chart icons and their meanings
3-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. PLOTTER OPERATION
3.5.2 Indices and chart enlargement
When the RANGE key is operated, you will see several frames appear on the chart. These
frames are called indices and they show you what parts of the chart can be enlarged in the
current range.
Sample chart (Japan), showing indices
When a chart cannot be displayed:
A chart will not be displayed in the following conditions:
• When the chart scale is too large or too small.
• When scrolling the chart outside the indices.
• When this happens, select proper chart scale.
Note: Indices can be turned on or off. For further details see “Chart border line” on page
7-14 for Navionics GOLD charts and page 7-16 for C-MAP charts.
3-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. PLOTTER OPERATION
3.5.3 Navionics GOLD charts
Data for aids to navigation
Selected Navionics GOLD charts can show buoy and lighthouse data. Simply place the
cursor on the lighthouse or buoy mark.
Lighthouse Buoy
Place the cursor on
a lighthouse or buoy mark.
Lighthouse mark (U.S> Point layers presentation)
Port service icons
Selected Navionics GOLD charts show services available at ports, with icons.
1. Use the Trackball to place the cursor on the sailboat icon (denotes a port or harbor)
desired.
2. Push the ENTER knob.
3. Roll the Trackball horizontally to select icon desired at the top of the display. The
services available appear directly below the icon selected.
4. Press the E: RETURN soft key to finish.
Detailed information of service
Emergency
Fueling station
selected
medical service
List of services
at the port selected
34° 22. 3456'N 359.9°M TRIP NU
19.9 kt
99.9 nm
FIRST AID
Water
supply station
Traveler's
service station
16.0nm
GOTO
B
PORT
SHOW
PORT
c
Customer
Marine
service station
equipment service
RETURN
E
Sailboat icon (Port)
Information center
Port
Plotter display, showing port service display
3-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. PLOTTER OPERATION
Current (or tide) data
34 24. 3456 N 359.9
NU
Some Navionics GOLD charts provide for
calculation of the current (or tide) data for any
date. Additionally it displays the time of sunrise
and sunset, moon shape (on current data.)
0.86
+
Current
Time:04:35 0
0.74
Speed (KT): 0.45ft
A DATE
0.61
Angle ( ): 142
21/08/02 +00
0.48
0.35
1. Use the Trackball to place the cursor on a
0
4
8
16 20 24
12
Max. Time Speed Aug. Slack
T
current icon ( ).
KT
AT
Flood 4:58 1.2
323 7:58
2. Press the ENTER knob to show the current
window.
Ebb 23:15 1.2 323 20:15
Flood 17:15 1.1 145 15:15
Ebb 23:15 1.2 323 20:15
3. Press the A: DATE soft key, and then enter
the date desired.
4. Press the C: ENTER soft key.
Moonphase: FULLY IN 1 DAY
Sunrise: 05:03 Moonrise: 14:06
Sunset: 19:10 Moonset: 02:15
E RETURN
Current data display
Object information
You can see detailed information about a place selected by the cursor as below.
1. Use the trackball to place the cursor on the location you desire to know more about.
2. Press the ENTER knob to show the OBJECT INFORMATION window.
34 24. 3456 N 359.9
NU
+
OBJECT INFORMATION
024nm
BLOCK AND TACKLE
POSITION
FIND
BOATYARD
47 16.461'N
LAND AREA
122 25.153'W
BRG. & RNG.
191 T 0.549nm
DERDGED AREA
DEPTH AREA
VALUE OF SOUNDING
62.2m
ROCKS
VERTICAL DATUM
MEAN SEA LEVEL
MOVE TRACKBALL <-/->)
RETURN
Object information window
When there are two or more pages, roll the trackball rightward to show the next page.
3-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. PLOTTER OPERATION
FIND function
When the OBJECT INFORMATION window is shown, objects can be listed according to
their categories.
1. Press the A: FIND soft key with the OBJECT INFORMATION window shown.
34 24. 3456 N 359.9
NU
+
FIND ...
124 9kt 024nm
PORT LIST
PORT SERVICE
TIDE STATIONS
CURRENT STATIONS
OBSTRUCTION
ROCKS
C
ENTER
E
CANCEL
FIND window
2. Operate the trackball to choose the category to list, and then press the ENTER knob.
Note: You can show the selected object on the plotter display by pressing the SHOW soft
key.
3-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. PLOTTER OPERATION
3.5.4 C-MAP charts
Cursor and data display
Besides its fundamental functions of providing position data, the cursor can also show
information about caution area, depth area, source of data, etc. on C-MAP charts. In
addition, you can display information about an icon by placing the cursor on it.
1. Move the Trackball to turn the cursor on.
2. Use the Trackball to place the cursor on the position desired.
3. Push the ENTER knob to open the Objects window.
Objects
Spot Sounding
Depth area
Exclusive economic zone
Military practice area
Restricted area
Source of data
Objects window
4. Use the Trackball to select the item desired.
5. Push the ENTER knob to display details for object selected.
Depth area
Depth range value1
0.00 Meters
Depth range value2
1829.00 Meters
Example of caution area window
6. Press the E: CANCEL soft key to close the window.
7. Press the E: CANCEL soft key to finish.
3-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. PLOTTER OPERATION
Icon data
You may place the cursor on any icon to find information about the selected icon.
1. For example, place the cursor on a lighthouse icon.
Place the cursor on a lighthouse icon.
34° 22. 3456'N 359.9°M TRIP NU
+
080° 22. 3456'E 19.9 kt
99.9 nm
16.0nm
MARK
A
ENTRY
+
MODE
B
NTH UP
C CENTER
GO TO
D
CURSOR
D. BOX
E
ON/OFF
Lighthouse icon
2. Push the ENTER knob to show data. For example, the following window appears for a
lighthouse.
Objects
Lighthouse
Tower
Light
Underwater Rock
Depth contour
Depth contour
Depth area
Source of data
Object windows
3. Use the Trackball to select the item desired.
4. Push the ENTER knob to display detailed information.
3-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. PLOTTER OPERATION
Navigation mark, fixed
Light.
Color
white
Height
7. 00 Meters
Light characteristic
occulting
XXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXX
Sample lighthouse data
5. If necessary, move the Trackball downward or upward to scroll the window.
6. Press the E: CANCEL soft key twice to finish.
Tide information
The C-MAP NT chart card provides for calculation of the tide heights for any date.
Additionally it displays the times of sunrise and sunset.
T
1. Use the Trackball to place the cursor on a Tide icon ( ).
2. Push the ENTER knob to open the Objects window.
OBJECTS
Tide height
Cartographic area
Source of data
Objects window
3. Use the Trackball to select Tide height.
4. Push the ENTER knob to open the TIDE window.
34 24. 3456 N 359.9
+
TIDE
0.86
0
Time: 04:35L
Objects
0.74
Height: 0.45ft
A DATE
Draught: 0.65ft
0.61
Port area
28/10/03 -UTC05
0.48
Port/Marine
Fuel station
Water
43° 32.860N
010° 18.022E
Vertical
Cursor
0.35
0
4
8
16 20 24
12
Port information
Electricity
LIVORNO (LEGHORN)
High Water(max) 0.86ft(13:30 L)
Low Water(min) 0.35ft(21:00 L)
Sunrise 07:52L
Showers
Pubric toilets
Pubric telephone
E
RETURN
Sunset 16:53 L
Tide window
3-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. PLOTTER OPERATION
5. Press the A: DATE soft key to open the DATE window.
CHANGE DATE
(DAY. MONTH. YEAR)
2 8. 10. 1998
LIMIT: 31.12.2099
Date window
6. Use the Trackball to position the cursor where desired, then enter date with the
alphanumeric keys. Repeat to enter complete date.
7. Push the ENTER knob to show the tidal graph for entered date.
8. Use the Trackball to locate the vertical cursor on the hour desired.
9. Use the Trackball to shift the horizontal cursor to select draught.
10. See the time, height and draught indications in left of the tide graph for tide information.
11. Press the E: CANCEL soft key twice to close the TIDE window.
Port service icons
Selected C-MAP shows services available at ports, with
lists.
Objects
Port area
1. Use the Trackball to place the cursor on the sailboat
icon (denotes a port or harbor) desired.
2. Push the ENTER knob.
3. Select the service name desired. The services available
appear.
Port/Marine
Fuel station
Water
Electricity
Showers
Public toilets
Public telephone
4. Press the E: CANCEL soft key.
Note: When Port/Marine is selected, you can show a
picture of the port selected, provided such data is available
on the chart card.
C-map, port service display
FIND function
When the Objects window is shown, objects can be listed according to their categories.
1. Press the A: FIND soft key with the Object window.
2. Operate the Track ball to choose the category to list, and then press the C: ENTER soft
key or ENTER knob.
A list appears.
3. Press the E: CANCEL soft key twice to finish.
3-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. PLOTTER OPERATION
3.6 Working with Track
Your ship’s track is plotted on the screen using navigation data fed from position-fixing
equipment. This section shows you what you can do with track, from turning it on or off to
changing its plotting interval. In the default setting, own ship’s track is turned on and is
displayed in red.
3.6.1 Displaying track
Own ship track
1. Press the MENU key followed by the A: CHART SETUP and B: TRACKS & MARKS
CONTROL soft keys to open the TRACK CONTROL menu.
TRACK
CONTROL
OWN SHIP TRACK DISP
OWN SHIP TRACK COLOR RED
ON
TARGET TRACK DISPLAY
TARGET TRACK COLOR
INTERVAL
TIME INTERVAL
DISTANCE INTERVAL
ON
WHITE
TIME
00m10s
00.10nm
A
B
EDIT
TRACK
RESUME
ERASE
T & M
MEMORY(TRACK & MARK) 2000 POINTS
(MARK MEMORY)
C
D
(6000)POINTS
MARK
SETUP
SHIP'S TRACK STATUS
TRACKING
TRACK: 1234/2000
E
RETURN
MARK :
9/6000
Track control menu
2. Use the Trackball to select OWN SHIP TRACK DISP.
3. Press the A: EDIT soft key to show the track display window.
4. Use the Trackball to select ON (default setting) or OFF as appropriate.
5. Press the C: ENTER soft key.
6. Press the MENU key to close the menu.
Note: The number of track and mark points used appears at the SHIP’S TRACK STATUS
window on the TRACK CONTROL menu. Using the figure above as an example, 1234
points of track and 9 marks have been recorded.
Target track
Target track, NMEA format TTM (Tracked Target Message) data sentence, may be turned
on or off as desired. The default setting is ON.
7. Press the MENU key followed by the A: CHART SETUP and B: TRACKS & MARKS
CONTROL soft keys to open the TRACK CONTROL menu.
8. Use the Trackball to select TARGET TRACK DISPLAY.
9. Press the A: EDIT soft key to show the target track display window.
3-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. PLOTTER OPERATION
10. Use the Trackball to select one of the following:
ON or OFF (no ARP or AIS): Turn on or off target tracks
ARP ONLY (ARP equipped): Show only ARP tracks.
AIS ONLY (AIS equipped): Show only AIS tracks.
BOTH: Show both ARP and AIS tracks.
11. Press the C: ENTER soft key.
12. Press the MENU key to close the menu.
3.6.2 Stopping, restarting plotting of own ship track
When your boat is at anchor or returning to port you probably won’t need to record its track.
You can stop recording the track, to conserve the track memory, as follows:
1. Press the MENU key followed by the A: CHART SETUP and B: TRACKS & MARKS
CONTROL soft keys to open the TRACK CONTROL menu.
TRACK
CONTROL
TRACK
CONTROL
OWN SHIP TRACK DISPꢀ
ON
OWN SHIP TRACK DISPꢀ
ON
OWN SHIP TRACK COLORꢀ RED
TARGET TRACK DISPLAYꢀ ON
OWN SHIP TRACK COLORꢀ RED
TARGET TRACK DISPLAYꢀ ON
A
B
EDIT
A
B
EDIT
TRACK
RESUME
B
B
TARGET TRACK COLORꢀ
INTERVALꢀ
WHITE
TARGET TRACK COLORꢀ
INTERVALꢀ
WHITE
TIME
TIME
TRACK
RESUME
TRACK
HALT
TIME INTERVALꢀ
00m10s
00.10nm
TIME INTERVALꢀ
00m10s
00.10nm
DISTANCE INTERVALꢀ
DISTANCE INTERVALꢀ
ERASE
T & M
ERASE
T & M
C
D
C
D
MEMORY(TRACK & MARK)ꢀ 2000 POINTS
MEMORY(TRACK & MARK)ꢀ 2000 POINTS
TRACK
HALT
(MARK MEMORY)ꢀ
(6000)POINTS
(MARK MEMORY)ꢀ
(6000)POINTS
MARK
SETUP
MARK
SETUP
SHIP'S TRACK STATUS
TRACKING
TRACK: 1234/2000
SHIP'S TRACK STATUS
NOT TRACKING
TRACK: 1234/2000
E
RETURN
E
RETURN
MARK
:
9/6000
MARK
:
9/6000
Track is plotted
Track not plotted
Track control menu
2. Press the B: TRACK RESUME soft key. The soft key now shows “TRACK HALT” and
the indication “TRACKING” in the SHIP’S TRACK STATUS window changes to “NOT
TRACKING.” In addition, the icon “H” is displayed at the top of the plotter display and
own ship marker becomes a hollow circle. To restart plotting the track, press the B:
TRACK HALT soft key
3. Press the MENU key to close the menu.
3.6.3 Changing track color
Track can be displayed in red (default setting), yellow, green, light-blue, purple, blue and
white. It can be useful to change track color on a regular basis to discriminate between
previous day’s track, etc.
Own ship’s track
1. Press the MENU key followed by the A: CHART SETUP and B: TRACKS & MARKS
CONTROL soft keys to open the TRACK CONTROL menu.
2. Use the Trackball to select OWN SHIP TRACK COLOR.
3. Press the A: EDIT soft key to display the track color window.
3-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. PLOTTER OPERATION
TRACK COLOR
▲
ꢁRED
ꢀYELLOW
ꢀGREEN
ꢀLIGHT BLUE
ꢀPURPLE
ꢀBLUE
ꢀWHITE
▲
Own ship track color window
4. Use the Trackball to select the color desired.
5. Press the C: ENTER soft key.
6. Press the MENU key to close the menu.
Target track
Like own ship’s track, target tracks can be displayed in red, yellow, green, light-blue, purple,
blue and white (default setting).
1. Press the MENU key followed by the A: CHART SETUP and B: TRACKS & MARKS
CONTROL soft keys to open the TRACK CONTROL menu.
2. Use the Trackball to select TARGET TRACK COLOR.
3. Press the A: EDIT soft key to display the track color window.
4. Use the Trackball to select the color desired.
5. Press the C: ENTER soft key.
6. Press the MENU key to close the menu.
3.6.4 Track plotting method and interval for own ship track
In drawing the own ship track, first the ship’s position fed from position-fixing equipment is
stored into the unit’s memory at an interval of time or distance. A shorter interval provides
for better reconstruction of the track, but the storage time of the track is reduced. When the
track memory becomes full, the oldest track is erased to make room for the latest.
Track plotting method
Track may be plotted by time or distance. The default setting is “time.”
1. Press the MENU key followed by the A: CHART SETUP and B: TRACKS & MARKS
CONTROL soft keys to open the TRACK CONTROL menu.
2. Use the Trackball to select INTERVAL.
3. Press the A: EDIT soft key to display the plot window.
INTERVAL
▲
ꢁTIME
ꢀDISTANCE
▲
Interval window
4. Use the Trackball to select TIME or DISTANCE as appropriate. Distance is useful for
conserving track memory, since no track is recorded when the boat is stationary.
3-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. PLOTTER OPERATION
5. Press the C: ENTER soft key.
6. Press the MENU key to close the menu.
Track plotting interval
1. Press the MENU key followed by the A: CHART SETUP and B: TRACKS & MARKS
CONTROL soft keys to open the TRACK CONTROL menu.
2. Use the Trackball to select TIME INTERVAL or DISTANCE INTERVAL as appropriate.
3. Press the A: EDIT soft key to display the time or distance interval window, depending on
what you selected at step 2.
Setting range: 0 min 1 sec (continuous) - 99 min 59 sec
Default setting: 10 sec
TIME INTERVAL
00m10s
(When selecting TIME INTERVAL.)
Setting range: 0.00 nm (continuous) - 99.99 nm (km, sm)
Default setting: 0.1 nm
DISTANCE INTERVAL
00.10nm
(When selecting DISTANCE INTERVAL.)
Interval windows
4. Use the Trackball to select digit and enter value with the alphanumeric keys. The D:
CLEAR soft key functions to clear an entire line of data.
5. Push the ENTER knob or C: ENTER soft key.
6. Press the MENU key to close the menu.
3.6.5 Changing own ship track/mark distribution setting
The equipment stores a total of 8000 points of track and marks. This amount may be
distributed as desired, and the default setting is 2000 points of track and 6000 points for
marks.
When you change the track memory setting, all tracks and marks in the memory are erased.
If necessary save the data to a memory card. For further details see the paragraph “6.1.2
Saving data to a memory card.”
1. Press the MENU key followed by the A: CHART SETUP and B: TRACKS & MARKS
CONTROL soft keys to open the TRACK CONTROL menu.
2. Use the Trackball to select MEMORY (TRACK & MARK).
3. Press the A: EDIT soft key to display the track memory window.
TRACK MEMORY
2000/8000 POINTS
Track memory window
4. Use the Trackball to select digit and use the alphanumeric keys to enter value.
3-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. PLOTTER OPERATION
5. Push the C: ENTER soft key or the ENTER knob. You are asked if you are sure to
change the track memory capacity.
6. Push the ENTER knob.
7. Press the MENU key to close the menu.
3.6.6 Erasing track
This paragraph shows you how to erase own ship’s track and target tracks. You can erase
ship’s track three ways: collectively, by color and by area.
Erasing own ship track by area
You can erase own ship’s track by area as below. This feature is not available when the
overlay mode is in use.
1. Press the MENU key followed by the A: CHART SETUP, B: TRACKS & MARKS
CONTROL and C: ERASE T & M soft keys to show the ERASE menu.
ERASE
ERASE ALL TRACKS
ERASE TRACKS BY AREA
ERASE TRACKS BY COLOR
ERASE TARGET TRACKS
ERASE ALL MARKS/LINES
ERASE MARKS BY AREA
A EDIT
SHIP'S TRACK STATUS
TRACKING
TRACK: 1234/2000
E
RETURN
MARK :
9/6000
Erase menu
2. Use the Trackball to select ERASE TRACKS BY AREA, then press the A: EDIT soft
key. The menu is erased and the plotter display appears.
3. Use the Trackball to place the cursor at the top left-hand corner of the area which you
want to ease track from.
4. Press the C: START soft key or the ENTER knob.
5. Move the cursor to the bottom right-hand corner of the area which you want to ease
track from.
6. Press the C: END soft key or the ENTER knob.
7. Push the ENTER knob to delete the track selected.
8. Press the MENU key twice to close the menu.
Erasing own ship track by color
You may erase own ship’s track by color as follows:
1. Press the MENU key followed by the A: CHART SETUP, B: TRACKS & MARKS
CONTROL and C: ERASE T & M soft keys to show the ERASE menu.
2. Use the Trackball to select ERASE TRACKS BY COLOR, then press the A: EDIT soft
key.
3-22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. PLOTTER OPERATION
ERASE TRK BY COLOR
▲
~ RED
{ YELLOW
{ GREEN
{ LIGHT BLUE
{ PURPLE
{ BLUE
{ WHITE
▼
Erase track by color window
3. Use the Trackball to select the color you want to erase, then push the ENTER knob.
4. Push the ENTER knob to erase the track color selected.
5. Press the MENU key twice to close the menu.
Erasing all own ship track
1. Press the MENU key followed by the A: CHART SETUP, B: TRACKS & MARKS
CONTROL and C: ERASE T & M soft keys to show the ERASE menu.
2. Use the Trackball to select ERASE ALL TRACKS, then press the A: EDIT soft key.
3. Push the ENTER knob to erase all own ship track.
Press the MENU key twice to close the menu.
Erasing all target tracks
1. Press the MENU key followed by the A: CHART SETUP, B: TRACKS & MARKS
CONTROL and C: ERASE T & M soft keys to show the ERASE menu.
2. Use the Trackball to select ERASE TARGET TRACKS, then press the A: EDIT soft
key.
3. Push the ENTER knob to erase all target tracks.
4. Press the MENU key twice to close the menu.
3.7 Marks, Lines
Marks are useful for denoting important points such as a good fishing spot. Marks can be
inscribed in seven shapes and seven colors: Red, yellow, green, light-blue, purple, blue and
white.
✕
{
3.7.1 Entering a mark, line
1. Place the cursor where you want a mark to appear.
2. Press the SHOW/HIDE key (if necessary) followed by the A: MARK ENTRY soft key.
The mark is inscribed in the size, color and shape selected on the mark & line menu. The
default mark attributes are size, large; color, yellow, and shape, hollow circle (○).
Note: The MARK ENTRY soft key can be programmed to enter the quick point. For details,
see page 7-10.
3-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. PLOTTER OPERATION
3.7.2 Changing mark attributes
You can select the shape, size and color for marks on the MARKS & LINES menu.
1. Press the MENU key to show the menu.
2. Press the A: CHART SETUP, B: TRACKS & MARKS CONTROL and D: MARK SETUP
soft keys to show the MARKS & LINES menu.
MARKS &
LINES
MARKS/LINES COLORꢀ YELLOW
MARKS SHAPEꢀ
LINES STYLEꢀ
MARKS SIZEꢀ
ꢀ
A
EDIT
.ꢀ
LARGE
SHIP'S TRACK STATUS
TRACKING
TRACK: 1234/2000
E
RETURN
MARK :
9/6000
Marks & lines menu
3. Select MARKS/LINES COLOR, then press the A: EDIT soft key.
4. Use the Trackball to choose color desired (default setting: yellow).
5. Press the C: ENTER soft key.
6. Select MARKS SHAPE, then press the A: EDIT soft key.
MARKS SHAPE
▲
ꢁ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
▲
ꢀ
▲
Marks shape window
7. Use the Trackball to select mark shape desired, then press the C: ENTER soft key.
8. Select MARKS SIZE, then press the A: EDIT soft key.
9. Use the Trackball to select LARGE (default setting) or SMALL as appropriate.
10. Press the C: ENTER soft key.
11. Press the MENU key twice to close the menu.
3.7.3 Selecting line type
You may inscribe lines to denote good fishing spots, areas of special interest, etc. You can
even construct simple charts.
1. Press the MENU key followed by the A: CHART SETUP, B: TRACKS & MARKS
CONTROL and D: MARK SETUP soft keys to show the MARKS & LINES menu.
3-24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. PLOTTER OPERATION
MARKS &
LINES
MARKS/LINES COLORꢀ YELLOW
MARKS SHAPEꢀ
LINES STYLEꢀ
MARKS SIZEꢀ
ꢀ
A
EDIT
.ꢀ
LARGE
SHIP'S TRACK STATUS
TRACKING
TRACK: 1234/2000
E
RETURN
MARK :
9/6000
Marks & lines menu
2. Select LINES STYLE, then press the A: EDIT soft key.
LINES STYLE
▲
ꢁ
ꢀ
- - - -
ꢀ
ꢀ
▲
Lines style window
3. Use the Trackball to select line style desired, then press the C: ENTER soft key. The
line style “dot” disables line drawing. Edge of lines is determined by mark shape. For
example, selecting the circle shape will join lines with a circle.
4. Press the MENU key twice to close the menu.
3.7.4 Erasing marks, lines
Erasing an individual mark
1. Operate the Trackball to place the cursor on the mark you want to erase.
2. Press the CLEAR key to erase the mark.
Erasing an individual line
Place the cursor on an end of the line to erase, then press the CLEAR key. Placing the
cursor at the intersecting point of two line segments will erase both line segments.
Erasing marks, lines by area
This feature is not available when the overlay mode is in use.
1. Press the MENU key followed by the A: CHART SETUP, B: TRACKS & MARKS
CONTROL and C: ERASE T & M soft keys to show the ERASE menu.
2. Use the Trackball to select ERASE MARKS BY AREA, then press the A: EDIT soft key.
The menu is erased and the plotter display appears.
3. Use the Trackball to place the cursor at the top left-hand corner of the area which you
want to erase marks and lines from.
4. Press the C: START soft key or the ENTER knob.
3-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. PLOTTER OPERATION
5. Move the cursor to the bottom right-hand corner of the area which you want to erase
marks and lines from.
6. Press the C: END soft key or the ENTER knob. You are asked if you are sure to delete
the marks/lines selected. Press the ENTER knob to delete.
7. Press the MENU key twice to close the menu.
Erasing all marks, lines
You can erase all marks and lines collectively. Be absolutely sure you want to erase all
marks and lines - erased marks and lines cannot be restored.
1. Press the MENU key followed by the A: CHART SETUP, B: TRACKS & MARKS
CONTROL and C: ERASE T & M soft keys to show the ERASE menu.
2. Use the Trackball to select ERASE ALL MARKS/LINES, then press the A: EDIT soft
key.
3. Push the ENTER knob to erase all marks and lines.
4. Press the MENU key twice to close the menu.
3.8 Waypoints
In navigation terminology, a waypoint is a particular location on a voyage whether it be a
starting, intermediate or destination point. A waypoint is the simplest piece of information
your equipment requires to get you to a destination, in the shortest distance possible.
This unit has 999 waypoints into which you can enter position information. You may enter a
waypoint five ways: at own ship position, at MOB position (see page 1-11 for details), by
cursor, by range and bearing, and through the waypoint list (manual input of latitude and
longitude).
3.8.1 Entering waypoints
Entering a waypoint at own ship position
Press the SAVE/MOB key momentarily to store your position as a waypoint. This new
waypoint is saved to the waypoint list, under the youngest empty waypoint number.
Entering a waypoint with the cursor
1. Press the MENU key to open the menu.
2. Press the C: WAYPOINTS/ROUTES, A: WAYPOINTS and C: WAYPOINT BY CURSOR
soft keys. The plotter display appears.
3. Operate the Trackball to place the cursor where you want to enter a waypoint.
4. Press the D: NEW WPT soft key. The waypoint window appears and it shows waypoint
mark shape, waypoint name, comment (default: time and date), position of waypoint and
proximity alarm radius.
3-26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. PLOTTER OPERATION
NEW
WPT
MARK NAME
001WPT
COMMENT
SELECT
MARK
A
B
COORD
TYPE
0 2 : 3 6 0 1 J A N 0 1
N< - - >S
E< - - >W
LAT
C
3 4 ° 1 2 . 1 3 4 ' N
LON
1 3 4 ° 1 2 . 3 4 5 ' W
D SAVE
PROXIMITY ALARM RADIUS
E
RETURN
0 . 0 0 n m
Waypoint window
5. If you do not need to change the waypoint data, press the D: SAVE soft key to
register the waypoint. The steps which follow show you how to change waypoint data.
6. Press the A: SELECT MARK soft key.
7. Press the A: MARK SHAPE soft key to open the mark shape selection window.
SELECT MARK
Waypoint mark shape selection window
8. Operate the Trackball to select shape desired.
9. Press the C: ENTER soft key.
10. Press the A: SELECT MARK and B: MARK COLOR soft keys in that order to open the
waypoint mark color selection window. Select the color desired, then press the C:
ENTER soft key.
SELECT COLOR
▲
ꢁRED
ꢀYELLOW
ꢀGREEN
ꢀLIGHT BLUE
ꢀPURPLE
ꢀBLUE
ꢀWHITE
▲
Waypoint mark color selection window
3-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. PLOTTER OPERATION
Note: You cannot change the shape and color of a waypoint when the proximity alarm
radius for it is other than “zero.” To change shape or color, enter all zeroes as the
proximity alarm radius.
11. You can change the name (6 characters), comment (13 characters), L/L position and the
proximity alarm radius for a waypoint as follows:
Use the Trackball to select the NAME, COMMENT, position box or PROXIMITY ALARM
RADIUS field. (“Proximity alarm radius” provides for audio and visual alarms when your
boat nears a waypoint by the distance specified. The proximity alarm must be turned on
in the ALARM menu to use this feature. For details see the paragraph 3.11.6.)
Use the Trackball to select location.
Enter appropriate alphanumeric character with the alphanumeric keys.
12. Press the D: SAVE soft key to register the waypoint.
13. Enter another waypoint, or press the MENU key to close the menu.
Entering a waypoint by range and bearing
This method is useful when you want to enter a waypoint using range and bearing to a
target found on a radar.
1. Press the MENU key to open the menu.
2. Press the C: WAYPOINTS/ROUTES, A: WAYPOINTS and D: WAYPOINT BY RNG &
BRG soft keys.
3. A red “X” appears at own ship position, and it is the origin point for range and bearing.
Operate the Trackball to place the cursor on the location desired. Range and bearing
from own ship to the cursor appear at the top of the display.
Note: The origin point of range and bearing can be shifted to the location desired.
Operate the Trackball to select location, then press the D: START POINT soft key.
4. Press the C: NEW WPT soft key. The waypoint window appears and it shows mark
shape, waypoint name, comment (default: date and time), position of waypoint and
proximity alarm radius.
NEW
WPT
MARK NAME
001WPT
SELECT
MARK
A
COMMENT
COORD
TYPE
0 2 : 3 6 0 1 J A N 0 1
B
C
N< - - >S
E< - - >W
LAT
3 4 ° 1 2 . 1 3 4 ' N
LON
1 3 4 ° 1 2 . 3 4 5 ' W
D SAVE
PROXIMITY ALARM RADIUS
E
RETURN
0 . 0 0 n m
Waypoint window
5. If necessary, change waypoint data following the instructions from step 6 in “Entering a
waypoint with the cursor” on page 3-26.
6. Press the D: SAVE soft key to register the waypoint.
7. Enter another waypoint as above, or press the MENU key to finish.
3-28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. PLOTTER OPERATION
Entering a waypoint from the waypoint list
You can manually enter waypoint position from the waypoint list as follows:
1. Press the MENU key to open the menu.
2. Press the C: WAYPOINTS/ROUTES and A: WAYPOINTS soft keys.
3. Press A: LOCAL LIST soft key (lists waypoints in order from nearest to furthest,
maximum 32 points) or B: ALPHANUMERIC LIST (lists waypoints in ALPHANUMERIC
order) soft key.
WPT
ALPHA
BRG 350.9
°
WPT
LOCAL
ABALONE
BRG 065.9°
RNG 1.83nm
FISH
RNG 3.80nm
35°47.010'N
00:00 01JAN01
34°41.000'N
00:00 01JAN01
135°21.000'W
135°21.030'W
A GOTO
A GOTO
BRG 050.9°
RNG 1.98nm
BRG 050.9°
RNG 1.98nm
CRAB
CRAB
34°42.000'N
135°21.050'W
34°42.000'N
135°21.050'W
00:00 01JAN01
00:00 01JAN01
NEW
WPT
NEW
WPT
B
B
BRG 065.9°
BRG 350.9°
ABALONE
FISH
RNG 1.83nm
RNG 3.80nm
EDIT
WPT
EDIT
WPT
C
C
34°41.000'N
135°21.030'W
35°47.010'N
135°21.000'W
00:00 01JAN01
00:00 01JAN01
BRG 144.9°
BRG 144.9°
LOBSTER
LOBSTER
ERASE
WPT
RNG 4.93nm
ERASE
WPT
RNG 4.93nm
D
E
D
E
38°44.300'N
135°21.010'W
00:00 01JAN01
38°44.300'N
135°21.010'W
00:00 01JAN01
PUSH ENTER KNOB TO
SEARCH FOR
RETURN
RETURN
---
Local waypoint list
Alphanumeric waypoint list
Alphanumeric and local waypoint lists
4. Press the B: NEW WPT soft key to show the waypoint window (see the figure on the
previous page). Own ship position is shown in the position box.
5. Select the position box and enter position desired.
6. If desired, change waypoint data following the instructions from step 6 in “Editing a
waypoint from the plotter display” on page 3-30.
7. Press the D: SAVE soft key to register the waypoint.
8. Press the MENU key to close the menu.
3.8.2 Editing waypoint data
Waypoint data may be edited from the waypoint list or directly from the plotter display.
Editing waypoint data from the waypoint list
1. Press the MENU key to open the menu.
2. Press the C: WAYPOINTS/ROUTES and A: WAYPOINTS soft keys.
3. Press the A: LOCAL LIST or B: ALPHANUMERIC LIST soft key as appropriate.
4. Use the Trackball to select the waypoint you want to edit.
5. Press the C: EDIT WPT soft key.
6. Edit data as appropriate.
7. Press the D: SAVE soft key.
8. Press the MENU key to close the menu.
3-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. PLOTTER OPERATION
Editing a waypoint from the plotter display
You may edit waypoints from the plotter display as follows:
1. Press the MENU key followed by the C: WAYPOINTS/ROUTES and A: WAYPOINTS
soft key to open the waypoint menu.
2. Press the C: WAYPOINT BY CURSOR soft key.
3. Operate the Trackball to place the cursor on the waypoint which you want to change. A
flashing diamond mark appears on the waypoint when it is correctly selected.
4. Press the D: EDIT/MOVE soft key. Three soft keys replace the D: EDIT/MOVE soft key:
EDIT WPT: Edit from the waypoint entry window.
MOVE WPT: Move waypoint to new position with the cursor.
ERASE WPT: Erase waypoint. See paragraph 3.8.3.
5. Press the appropriate soft key. For the “EDIT WPT,” the waypoint entry window
appears; edit data as appropriate. For “MOVE WPT,” do the following:
a) Operate the Trackball to place the cursor on the location desired for the waypoint. A
line connects previous position and new position.
b) Push the ENTER knob. The waypoint moves to the cursor position and its position is
changed on the waypoint list. If the waypoint is set as destination or is part of a route,
you are asked if you are sure to move the waypoint. In this case, push the ENTER
knob to move the waypoint, or press the CLEAR key to cancel.
6. Press the MENU key to finish.
Range and bearing from
own ship to cursor
34° 22. 345'N 86.6°M
TRIP NU
4.53nm 99.9 nm
+
080° 22. 345'E
16.0nm
Press to alternately display
range/bearing from own ship
to cursor, range/bearing from
original waypoint position to
cursor position.
RNG
BRG
C
(1) Select waypoint to move,
then press D: EDIT/MOVE
FISH
and C: MOVE WPT soft keys. WP-002
Below is an example of the
range/bearing from original
waypoint position to cursor
position.
E
CANCEL
(2) Drag cursor to new position,
BRIDGE
then push the ENTER knob.
34° 22. 3456'N FROM 5.3°M
+
080° 22. 3456'E FISH
1.45 nm
Plotter display
3.8.3 Erasing waypoints
Erasing a waypoint directly from the plotter display
1. Operate the Trackball to place the cursor on the waypoint you want to erase. A flashing
diamond mark appears over the waypoint when the waypoint is correctly selected.
2. Press the CLEAR key. You are asked if you are sure to erase the waypoint.
3. Push the ENTER knob. The waypoint is erased from the plotter screen and the waypoint
list.
3-30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. PLOTTER OPERATION
Erasing a waypoint from the menu
1. Press the MENU key followed by the C: WAYPOINTS/ROUTES and A: WAYPOINTS
soft key to open the waypoint menu.
2. Press the C: WAYPOINT BY CURSOR soft key.
3. Operate the Trackball to place the cursor on the waypoint which you want to erase. A
flashing diamond mark appears on the waypoint when it is correctly selected.
4. Press the D: EDIT/MOVE soft key followed by the D: ERASE WPT soft key. You are
asked if you are sure to erase the waypoint.
5. Push the ENTER knob to erase the waypoint.
6. Press the MENU key to close the menu. The waypoint is erased from the plotter screen
and the waypoint list.
Erasing a waypoint from the waypoint list
1. Press the MENU key to open the menu.
2. Press the C: WAYPOINTS/ROUTES and A: WAYPOINTS soft keys.
3. Press the A: LOCAL LIST or B: ALPHANUMERIC LIST soft key.
4. Use the Trackball to select the waypoint you want to erase.
5. Press the D: ERASE WPT soft key. You are asked if you are sure to erase the waypoint.
6. Push the ENTER knob. The waypoint is erased from both the waypoint list and the
plotter screen (if it is currently displayed).
7. Press the MENU key to close the menu.
3.8.4 Changing waypoint mark size (Navionics GOLD charts)
You may change the size of all waypoint marks to small or large (default), or you may turn
them off.
1. Press the MENU key to open the menu.
2. Press the A: CHART SETUP and C: CHART CONFIGURATION soft keys.
CHART
CONFIG
LAT/LON GRID
GREEN
ON
TEXT INFORMATION
WAYPOINTS
A
B
EDIT
LARGE
ON
WAYPOINT NAMES
CHART BORDER LINES
LANDMASS
CNTOUR
LINE
ON
BRT YELLOW
BLACK
ON
BACKGROUND
NAVAIDS
LIGHT SECTOR INFO
OTHER SYMBOLS
MARK SIZE
ON
WHITE
LARGE
E
RETURN
Chart configuration menu
3. Use the Trackball to select WAYPOINTS.
4. Press the A: EDIT soft key.
3-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. PLOTTER OPERATION
5. Use the Trackball to select LARGE, SMALL or OFF.
LARGE: Shows mark in actual shape.
SMALL: Displays all waypoints with an “X” regardless of mark shape selected.
OFF: Turns off all waypoints and their names. Waypoints currently used in navigation
are shown regardless of this setting.
6. Press the C: ENTER soft key.
7. Press the MENU key to close the menu.
3.8.5 Searching waypoints
You can search for a waypoint through the alphanumeric waypoint list as follows:
1. Press the MENU key.
2. Press the C: WAYPOINTS/ROUTES, A: WAYPOINTS and B: ALPHANUMERIC LIST
soft keys to show the alphanumeric list.
WPT
ALPHA
BRG 350.9
°
ABALONE
RNG 3.80nm
35°47.010'N
135°21.000'W
00:00 01JAN01
A GOTO
BRG 050.9°
RNG 1.98nm
CRAB
34°42.000'N
135°21.050'W
00:00 01JAN01
NEW
WPT
B
BRG 065.9°
RNG 1.83nm
FISH
EDIT
WPT
C
34°41.000'N
135°21.030'W
00:00 01JAN01
BRG 144.9°
LOBSTER
ERASE
WPT
RNG 4.93nm
D
E
38°44.300'N
135°21.010'W
00:00 01JAN01
PUSH ENTER KNOB TO
SEARCH FOR
RETURN
---
Search window
Alphanumeric list
3. Use the Trackball and the alphanumeric keys to enter up to three alphanumeric
characters in the search window. Then, the waypoint searched appears at the top of the
screen.
4. Press the MENU key to close the menu.
3-32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. PLOTTER OPERATION
3.9 Routes
Often a trip from one place to another involves several course changes, requiring a series
of route points (waypoints) which you navigate to, one after another. The sequence of
waypoints leading to the ultimate destination is called a route. Your unit can automatically
advance to the next waypoint on a route, so you do not have to change the destination
waypoint repeatedly.
You can store up to 200 routes, and a route may have 35 waypoints.
3.9.1 Creating routes
Entering a route with existing waypoints
This method constructs routes by using existing waypoints. This function requires SAFE
ROUTE CHECK (C-MAP only).
1. Press the MENU key.
2. Press the C: WAYPOINTS/ROUTES soft key.
3. Press the B: ROUTES soft key to open the ROUTE menu. (No data will be shown if
there are no routes entered.)
Total length of route
Route name
LENGTH
ROUTE
001
25.6 nm
WAYPOINTS
Number of waypoints
in route
LENGTH
002
35
A GOTO
56.7 nm
WAYPOINTS
2
NEW
ROUTE
B
C
LENGTH
003
004
EDIT
ROUTE
21.1 nm
WAYPOINTS
3
LENGTH
ERASE
ROUTE
D
E
21.1 nm
WAYPOINTS
3
1/20
RETURN
PUSH ENTER KNOB TO
SEARCH FOR
---
Route menu
4. Press the B: NEW ROUTE soft key to open the new route entry screen.
3-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. PLOTTER OPERATION
NEW
ROUTE
ROUTE NAME
A PLOT
0 0 1
LOCAL
B
LIST
COMMENT
ALPHA
C
LIST
D CONECT
E
CANCEL
New route entry screen
5. If desired you can change the route name shown and/or add a comment. A route name
may consist of six characters; comment, 13 characters.
6. Press the B: LOCAL LIST or C: ALPHA LIST soft key to open the waypoint list.
7. Use the Trackball to select a waypoint, then press the A: ADD WPT soft key to add it to
the route.
8. Repeat step 7 to complete the route.
Note: To clear last-entered waypoint, press the C: ERASE LST WP soft key. Each
press of this key deletes the last waypoint entered.
9. Press the D: SAVE soft key to register the route.
10. Press the MENU key to close the menu.
Entering a route with the cursor
This method allows you to construct a route directly from the plotter display, using existing
waypoints or new positions. Any new position will be saved as a waypoint, under the
youngest empty waypoint number.
1. Follow steps 1-5 in “Entering a route from the route list” on the previous page.
2. Press the A: PLOT soft key to show the plotter display.
3. Operate the Trackball to place the cursor on an existing waypoint (C: ADD WP soft key
appears) or new location (C: ADD NEW WP soft key appears).
4. Press the C: ADD WP soft key (or C: ADD NEW WP soft key).
5. Repeat steps 3 and 4 to complete the route.
6. Push the ENTER knob to register the route.
Creating voyage-based routes
You can create routes based on your ship’s track. The route can be created automatically
by time or distance, or manually. This feature is useful when you wish to retrace previous
track.
The “SAVE” icon (SAVE) appears at the top of the screen when a voyage-based route is
being created.
3-34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. PLOTTER OPERATION
1. Press the MENU key to open the menu.
2. Press the C: WAYPOINTS/ROUTES soft key.
3. Press the D: CREATE VOYAGE-BASED ROUTE soft key.
SAVE
ROUTE
LENGTH
25.6 nm
WAYPOINTS
35
001
002
003
004
A NEW
LENGTH
56.7 nm
WAYPOINTS
2
SELECT
B
ROUTE
LENGTH
21.1 nm
WAYPOINTS
3
LENGTH
21.1 nm
WAYPOINTS
3
1/20
E
RETURN
PUSH ENTER KNOB TO
SEARCH FOR
---
Save route menu
4. Press the A: NEW soft key to show the new route window.
Note: If you want to tack voyage-based points onto the end of an existing route, select
the route with the Trackball, then press the D: SELECT ROUTE soft key instead of the
A: NEW soft key. Then, go to step 6.
SAVE
ROUTE
ROUTE NAME
BCKTRK
A
Next consecutive route number
0 0 6
TIME
BCKTRK
B
DIST
COMMENT
C MANUAL
USE FURUNO BACK TRACK FUNCTION
TO AUTOMATICALLY CREATE ROUTE
BY TIME OR DISTANCE.
E
CANCEL
Save route window
5. If required, you may change the route name and enter a comment.
6. Choose how to record points for your route, by time, by range or manual entry, by
pressing A: BCKTRK TIME, B: BCKTRK RANGE or C: MANUAL soft key as appropriate.
For manual entry, go to step 8. For BCKTRK TIME, BCKTRK DIST one of the following
displays appears.
TIME INTERVAL
DISTANCE INTERVAL
00h01m
00.1nm
(When selecting BCKTRK DIST.)
(When selecting BCKTRK TIME.)
Displays for entry of time, distance interval
3-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. PLOTTER OPERATION
7. Enter interval desired with the Trackball and the alphanumeric keys. Press the A:
START LOG and E: RETURN soft keys followed by the MENU key to close the menu.
At this moment, a voyage-based route will be created.
8. For manual entry of waypoints, do the following:
a) Press the SAVE/MOB key momentarily to enter a waypoint mark at own ship position. A
new waypoint is created under the youngest empty waypoint number and added to the
route. (At this time you may close the SAVE ROUTE screen by pressing the E:
RETURN soft key followed by the MENU key.)
b) Repeat step a) as necessary. 35 waypoints may be entered.
To stop recording waypoints and save the route
You can stop recording waypoints and save the route as shown in the procedure below.
When 35 waypoints have been entered the message “Total 35 WPTS have been already
registered in the route. Stop creating voyage-based route.” is displayed. In this case,
automatically creating voyage-based route stops.
1. Press the MENU key followed by the C: WAYPOINTS/ROUTES and D: CREATE
VOYAGE-BASED ROUTE soft keys.
2. Press the A: FINISH LOG soft key to stop recording waypoints and save the route.
3. Press the MENU key to close the menu.
3.9.2 Connecting routes
Two routes which you have created can be connected as follows to form a new route.
1. Press the MENU key to open the menu.
2. Press the C: WAYPOINTS/ROUTES soft key.
3. Press the B: ROUTES soft key.
4. Press the B: NEW ROUTE soft key.
5. If desired enter route name and comment.
6. Press the D: CONECT soft key.
7. Use the Trackball and the alphanumeric keys to enter the route name for the first route,
beneath FIRST in the connect route window.
NEW
ROUTE NAME
ROUTE
0 0 1
A F < -- > R
COMMENT
CONNECT ROUTE
FIRST
SECOND
D SAVE
_ _ _ _ _ _
_ _ _ _ _ _
FORWARD FORWARD
E
CANCEL
Connect route window
8. Press the A: F<− −>R soft key to select direction to follow the waypoints of the route,
forward or reverse.
3-36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. PLOTTER OPERATION
9. Enter the route name of the second route as you did for the first route.
10. Press the D: SAVE soft key.
11. Press the MENU key to close the menu.
Note: The maximum number of waypoints in a route is 35. If this number is exceeded an
error message appears. In this case, delete waypoints in one or both routes so the total
number of waypoints does not exceed 35.
3.9.3 Inserting waypoints
Waypoints can be inserted in a route as follows:
Inserting a waypoint from the route list
1. Press the MENU key to open the menu.
2. Press the C: WAYPOINTS/ROUTES soft key.
3. Press the B: ROUTES soft key.
4. Use the Trackball to select a route.
5. Press the C: EDIT ROUTE soft key. The route name screen appears.
6. Press the B: LOCAL LIST soft key.
ROUTE NAME: 001
EDIT
ROUTE
COMMENT:
LEG
90.0°
48°18.290'N
123°14.286'W
01
INSERT
WPT
A
B
C
007WPT
2.86nm
48°17.341'N
123°10.232'W
02
REMOVE
WPT
005WPT
322.6°
3.08nm
CHANGE
WPT
48°20.261'N
123°11.658'W
03
003WPT
75.2°
4.99nm
48°19.862'N
123°04.190'W
04
COORD
TYPE
D
E
006WPT
152.5°
19.87nm
RETURN
Edit route menu
LOCAL LIST
001
7. Use the Trackball to place the cursor at the location
where you want to insert a waypoint.
001WPT
8. Press the A: INSERT WPT or C: CHANGE WPT soft
key as appropriate. The local waypoint list appears.
9. Use the Trackball to select the waypoint you want to
insert. (You can switch between the local list and
alphanumeric list by using the C: LOCAL LIST and D:
ALPHA LIST soft keys.)
10. Press the A: SELECT WPT or A: CHANGE WPT soft
key, whichever is displayed.
11. Press the MENU key to close the menu.
34°44.111'N
135°21.134'W
002
003
004
002WPT
34°43.432'N
135°41.456'W
003WPT
34°14.124'N
135°21.567'W
004WPT
34°34.490'N
135°51.387'W
Waypoint list for editing a
route local list
(
)
3-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. PLOTTER OPERATION
Inserting a waypoint from the plotter display
Inserting a waypoint before first waypoint or after last waypoint in a route
1. Press the MENU key to open the menu.
2. Press the C: WAYPOINTS/ROUTES soft key.
3. Press the B: ROUTES soft key.
4. Use the Trackball to select a route.
5. Press the C: EDIT ROUTE soft key.
6. Press the A: PLOT soft key to show the plotter screen.
7. Operate the Trackball to place the cursor on the first (or last) waypoint of the route. A
flashing diamond appears over the waypoint when it is correctly selected.
8. Press the C: ADD TO START soft key or the C: ADD TO END soft key depending on
the waypoint you selected at step 7.
9. Operate the Trackball to place the cursor on an existing waypoint (C: ADD WPT soft
key appears) or new location (C: ADD NEW WP soft key appears).
10. Press the C: ADD WPT soft key (C: ADD NEW WP soft key).
11. Press the MENU key to close the menu.
Inserting a waypoint in an intermediate location on a route
1. Follow steps 1 through 6 in “Inserting a waypoint before the first or last waypoint in a
route.”
2. Operate the Trackball to place the cursor on a line connecting waypoints. The C: SPLIT
LEG soft key appears and the line flashes when it is correctly selected.
3. Press the C: SPLIT LEG soft key.
4. Move the cursor to a new location or select an existing waypoint, in which case the C:
INSERT WPT soft key replaces the C: INSERT NEW WP soft key.
5. Press the C: INSERT WPT soft key (C: INSERT NEW WP soft key).
6. Press the MENU key to close the menu.
3.9.4 Removing waypoints from a route
Removing a waypoint from the route list
1. Press the MENU key to open the menu.
2. Press the C: WAYPOINTS/ROUTES soft key.
3. Press the B: ROUTES soft key.
4. Select a route.
5. Press the C: EDIT ROUTE and B: LOCAL LIST soft keys.
6. Select the waypoint you want to remove.
7. Press the B: REMOVE WPT soft key.
8. Press the MENU key to close the menu.
Removing a waypoint from the plotter display
1. Press the MENU key to open the menu.
2. Press the C: WAYPOINTS/ROUTES soft key.
3. Press the B: ROUTES soft key.
4. Select a route.
5. Press the C: EDIT ROUTE soft key.
6. Press the A: PLOT soft key to show the plot screen.
3-38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. PLOTTER OPERATION
7. Operate the Trackball to place the cursor on the waypoint you want to remove from the
route.
8. Press the D: REMOVE WPT soft key. The route is redrawn, eliminating the waypoint
removed.
9. Press the MENU key to close the menu.
3.9.5 Erasing routes
1. Press the MENU key to open the menu.
2. Press the C: WAYPOINTS/ROUTES soft key.
3. Press the B: ROUTES soft key.
4. Use the Trackball to select a route.
5. Press the D: ERASE ROUTE soft key. You are asked if you are sure to erase the route.
6. Push the ENTER knob to erase the route, or the CLEAR key to escape.
7. Press the MENU key to close the menu.
3.10 Navigation
This section shows you how to get to a desired destination by “quick points,” waypoints,
port services and routes.
Note: Reciprocal setting and canceling of destination is available by outputting the data
sentence ZDA from the NavNet unit connected to the navigator.
3.10.1 Navigating to a “quick point”
The “quick point” feature allows you to navigate to point(s) without retaining the data
indefinitely in your unit’s memory.
Selecting quick point entry method
You need to tell your unit how to set the quick point: 1 POINT, 35 POINTS (up to 35 points)
or 35PTS/FIND. (For how to navigate to points/port services see “3.10.3 Navigating to ports,
port services” on page 3-41.)
1. Press the MENU key.
2. Press the B: PLOTTER SETUP soft key.
3. Use the Trackball to select SET GOTO METHOD, then press the A: EDIT soft key.
GOTO METHOD
~
{
{
1 POINT
35 POINTS
35PTS/PORT SVC*
*For C-map: "FIND"
Go to method window
4. Use the Trackball to select a method.
5. Press the C: ENTER soft key.
6. Press the MENU key to close the menu.
3-39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. PLOTTER OPERATION
Navigating to a single quick point
1. Place the cursor on an existing waypoint (D: GOTO WPT soft key appears) or a new
location (D: GOTO CURSOR soft key appears).
2. Select “1 POINT” following the procedure in the above paragraph.
3. Depending on the selection you made at step 1, press the D: GOTO CURSOR or D:
GOTO WPT soft key.
A solid blue line with arrows connects between own ship and destination, which is marked
as “<QP01>” for cursor-selected location or waypoint name in case of waypoint. This line
shows the shortest course to the destination. Arrows on the line show the direction to follow
to get to the quick point. Range and bearing from own ship to the destination appear at the
top of screen. The quick point location is saved to the waypoint list as waypoint “QP01.”
Navigating to multiple quick points
1. Select “35 POINTS” following the procedure in “Selecting quick point entry method” on
the previous page.
2. Press the D: GOTO soft key.
3. Place the cursor on an existing waypoint (C: SELECT WPT soft key appears) or a new
location (C: ADD QP soft key appears).
4. Depending on the action taken at step 3, press the C: SELECT WPT or C: ADD QP soft
key. “QP<01>” appears at the cursor location if a quick point is selected. To erase
last-entered quick point (waypoint), press the D: ERASE LST QP (D: ERASE LST WP)
soft key.
5. Repeat steps 3 and 4 to complete the route.
6. Push the ENTER knob to finish.
A solid light-blue line with arrows connects between own ship and the first point and all
other points are connected with a green dashed line with arrows. Arrows on the line show
the direction to follow to get to your destination. Quick points are numbered in sequential
order from QP<01> and are saved to the waypoint list. Range and bearing from own ship to
the first destination appear at the top of screen. The quick points are saved as a route,
under the name “Q>RTE” (Quick Route).
3.10.2 Navigating to waypoints
Selecting a waypoint from the plotter display
1. Operate the Trackball to select a waypoint.
2. Press the D: GOTO WPT soft key.
Note: GOTO method should be selected to “1 POINT” on the PLOTTER SETUP menu.
Selecting a waypoint from the waypoint list
1. Press the MENU key to open the menu.
2. Press the C: WAYPOINTS/ROUTES soft key.
3. Press the A: WAYPOINTS soft key to open the waypoint menu.
4. Press the A: LOCAL LIST or B: ALPHANUMERIC LIST soft key as desired.
5. Use the Trackball to select a waypoint.
3-40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. PLOTTER OPERATION
6. Press the A: GOTO soft key, and the plotter display appears.
For either of the above methods, a solid light-blue line with arrows runs between waypoint
selected and own ship’s position. Arrows on the line show the direction to follow to get to
the waypoint. Waypoint data appears at the top of screen.
Selecting an external waypoint
You can select a waypoint (or route) entered at an external plotter connected with NMEA
cable. This function requires RMB sentence.
1. Press the MENU key, B: PLOTTER SETUP soft key to show the PLOTTER SETUP
menu.
2. Use the Trackball to select QP.
3. Press the C: ENTER soft key or ENTER knob to show the QP window.
QP
{
~
EXT WPT (RMB)
INTERNAL
QP window
4. Select EXT WPT (RMB).
5. On a connected external plotter, set a waypoint (or route) as the destination.
Selected waypoint (route) appears on the NavNet plotter screen. (on radar screen, a lollipop
appears to show the waypoint.)
3.10.3 Navigating to ports, port services (NavChartTM only)
A port service list which shows services is available at ports or harbors. (See page 3-13.)
You can use the list to set your destination as follows:
1. Select “35 PTS/PORT SVC” following the procedure in “Selecting quick point entry
method” on page 3-39.
This procedure is necessary for NEAR SERVICE function.
2. Place the cursor on the location desired, then press the ENTER knob to show the
OBJECT INFORMATION window.
3. Press the A: FIND soft key to show the FIND window.
4. Operate the trackball to choose PORT LIST or PORT SERVICE, and then press the
ENTER knob or C: ENTER soft key to show the list.
5. Operate the trackball to choose the port (service), and then press the ENTER knob and
A: GOTO PORT soft key in order.
3-41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. PLOTTER OPERATION
SELECT SERVICE
SELECT PORTS
POSITION
xx xx.xxx'N
xxx xx.xxx'W
ACCIAROLI
ACQUAMORTA
BRG. & RNG.
xxxT x.xxxnm
AGNONE S. NICOLA
AGROPOLI
FUEL
GENERAL SERVICE
XXXXXXX
XXXXXXX
AMALFI
WATER
XXXXXXX
BAIA
CAPRI
CASA MICCIOLA-ISCHIA
OTHER UTILITIES
REPAIR
TM
Port list (NavChart , Italy)
GENERAL
FIRST AID
OTHER INFO
Port services (NavChartTM)
Port services and sample port list
6. (NavChart) If you selected PORT (Navionics only) at step 4, use the Trackball to select
a port, then press the A: GOTO soft key. Make a route using the soft keys, then push the
ENTER knob. (If you want to go directly to the port, simply press the C: ADD QP soft key
followed by the ENTER knob.)
(C-MAP) If you selected PORT at step 4, use the Trackball to select a port, and then
press the ENTER knob or ENTER soft key. Press the E: CANCEL soft key several times
to close windows, and then do the follows.
a) Operate the Trackball to select the sailboat icon at the center of the screen.
b) Press the A: GO TO soft key.
c) Press A: QUICK ROUTE soft key.
d) Press the C: SELECT WPT soft key.
e) Press the ENTER knob.
If you selected SERVICE at step 4, select service mark desired with the Trackball and
then push the C: ENTER soft key or the ENTER knob. Then, the display shows the
locations of those services nearest you. (The figure below shows the location of filling
stations in an area in southern Italy.) Use the Trackball to place the “hand cursor” on
the port service icon desired, then press the C: ENTER soft key. Make a route using the
soft keys, then push the ENTER knob. (If you want to go directly to location selected,
simply press the C: ADD QP soft key followed by pushing the ENTER knob.)
3-42
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. PLOTTER OPERATION
3.10.4 Following a route
Selecting the route to follow
1. Press the MENU key to open the menu.
2. Press the C: WAYPOINTS/ROUTES soft key.
3. Press the B: ROUTES soft key to open the route list.
4. Select a route.
5. Press the A: GOTO soft key to show the plotter display. The cursor is on the waypoint
nearest own ship.
359.2°M 104.5°M
83.2nm 10.0 kt
TRIP GOTO
ROUTE
FISH
0.7
16.0 nm
WPT002
GOTO
FISH
C
WPT
WPT001
RVRSE
ROUTE
D
E
CRAB
RETURN
Plotter display, route selected as destination
6. Operate the Trackball to place the cursor on the waypoint or leg in the route from where
to start navigating the route.
7. Press the C: GOTO WPT or C: FOLLOW LEG soft key, depending on the action taken
at step
A solid light-blue line runs between own ship and first waypoint. Green dashed lines
connect all other waypoints. The arrows on the lines show the direction to traverse the
route.
Navigating waypoints in reverse order
Press the D: RVRSE ROUTE soft key followed by the ENTER knob to navigate waypoints
in reverse order. The arrows on the route line point in the direction selected.
3-43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. PLOTTER OPERATION
Restarting navigation
When you steer to avoid an obstacle or the vessel drifts, you may go off your intended
course, as in Line 1 in the figure below. Also, if you don’t need to return to the original
course, you can go directly to the next waypoint, as in Line 2 in the figure below. In these
cases, use the restart navigation function to restart navigation.
Line 2
Line 1
Obstacle
Original course
Example of when to restart navigation
1. Press the MENU key to open the menu.
2. Press the C: WAYPOINTS/ROUTES soft key.
3. Press the C: LOG soft key.
TO Waypoint (WPT name in reverse video)
Passed waypoint (gray characters)
Estimated Time of Arrival at destination
ETA 23:59 30. APR
LOG
LEG
90.0°
48°18.290'N
123°14.286'W
01
RE-
START
A
Replaced by
"FOLLOW LEG"
when selecting
a route leg.
007WPT
0
2.86nm
48°17.341'N
123°10.232'W
02
B STOP
005WPT
322.6°
Replaces triangle
when selecting a
route leg.
3.08nm
48°20.261'N
123°11.658'W
03
C RVRSE
003WPT
75.2°
4.99nm
48°19.862'N
123°04.190'W
04
D SPEED
006WPT
152.5°
19.87nm
COORD
E
TYPE
Log display
4. Use the Trackball to select a waypoint or a route leg. When a route leg is selected the
single arrow cursor is replaced by double arrows.
5. Press the A: RESTART soft key or A: FOLLOW LEG soft key in case of route leg.
RESTART: Line 2 in the figure shown above
FOLLOW LEG: Line 1 in the figure shown above
6. Press the MENU key to close the menu.
3-44
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. PLOTTER OPERATION
Setting speed for ETA calculation
Speed, which may be input manually or automatically, is required to calculate ETA
(Estimated Time of Arrival) to a destination.
1. Press the MENU key to open the menu.
2. Press the C: WAYPOINTS/ROUTES soft key.
3. Press the C: LOG soft key.
4. Press the D: SPEED soft key.
SPEED FOR ETA
▲
ꢁSPD 010.0kt
ꢀGPS AVG. SPEED
▲
Select speed for ETA window
5. Enter speed manually in the SPD field, or use GPS speed data (if applicable) by
selecting GPS AVG. SPEED.
6. Press the C: ENTER soft key or the ENTER knob to register your selection.
7. Press the MENU key to close the menu.
Switching waypoints
When you arrive to a waypoint on a route, you can switch to the next waypoint by one of the
three methods below.
PERPENDICULAR: Automatically switches the destination waypoint when the boat comes
passes an imaginary perpendicular line passing through the center of the destination
waypoint or the boat comes within the arrival alarm range.
ARRVL ALM CRCL: Destination waypoint is automatically switched when the boat comes
within the arrival alarm range. For how to set the arrival alarm, see the paragraph 3.11.2
Arrival alarm.
MANUAL: The destination waypoint may be manually switched by using the A: RESTART
soft key (see page 3-44). This function is operative when “1 POINT” is selected as the
GOTO method (see page 3-40).
WPT 2
WPT 2
Waypoint switched
at this point.
Waypoint switched
at this point.
WPT 1
Arrival Alarm Circle
WPT 1
Perpendicular
Automatic waypoint switching methods
3-45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. PLOTTER OPERATION
To select waypoint switching method do the following:
1. Press the MENU key.
2. Press the B: PLOTTER SETUP soft key.
3. Use the trackball to select WAYPOINT SWITCHING.
4. Press the A: EDIT soft key to show the waypoint switching window.
5. Use the trackball to select appropriate waypoint switching method; PERPENDICULAR,
ARRVL ALM CRCL (default setting), or MANUAL.
6. Press the C: ENTER soft key.
7. Press the MENU key to close the menu.
3.10.5 Canceling route navigation
Through the menu
1. Press the MENU key to open the menu.
2. Press the C: WAYPOINTS/ROUTES soft key.
3. Press the C: LOG soft key.
4. Press the B: STOP soft key.
5. Push the ENTER knob.
6. Press the B: RELEASE soft key.
7. Push the ENTER knob.
On the plotter display
1. Use the trackball to place the cursor on the waypoint selected as destination.
2. Press the CLEAR key.
The message “STOP GOTO?” appears.
3. Push the ENTER knob.
3-46
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. PLOTTER OPERATION
3.11 Alarms
The plotter section has eight conditions which generate both audio and visual alarms:
arrival alarm, anchor watch alarm, XTE (Cross Track Error) alarm, proximity alarm, speed
alarm, trip alarm, water temperature alarm and bottom alarm. (The bottom and water
temperature alarms, which require depth and water temperature data, may also be set on
the sounder alarm menu. For these alarms see Chapter 4.)
You may set up the plotter alarms on the ALARM menu, which may be displayed by
pressing the ALARM key.
AUDIO ALARM
INTERNAL BUZZ
OFF 0.010nm
ALARM1
BOTTOM ALARM
OFF
ALARM2
ARRIVAL ALARM
TEMPERATURE ALARM
GROUNDING ALARM
OFF
OFF*
ANCHOR WATCH ALARM OFF 0.010nm
EDIT
EDIT
GROUNDING ALARM RANGE*
PROXIMITY ALARM
XTE ALARM
OFF
OFF 0.050nm
OFF
G ALRM
REPORT*
G ALRM
REPORT*
NEXT
PAGE
SPEED ALARM
CLEAR
ALARM
CLEAR
ALARM
TRIP ALARM
OFF 0000.0nm
NEXT
PAGE
PREV.
PAGE
ALARM INFORMATION
NO ALARM
ALARM INFORMATION
NO ALARM
PREV.
PAGE
RETURN
* C-MAP specification only
Page 1
Page 2
Plotter alarm menu
3.11.1 Audio alarm on/off
Audio and visual alarms are released whenever an alarm setting is violated. You can
enable or disable the audio alarm as follows:
1. Press the ALARM key to show the alarm menu.
2. Use the Trackball to select AUDIO ALARM.
3. Press the A: EDIT soft key to show the audio alarm window.
AUDIO ALARM
INT & EXT BUZZ
INTERNAL BUZZ
OFF
Audio alarm window
4. Use the Trackball to select INT & EXT BUZZ (Internal + External alarm), INTERNAL
BUZZ (Internal alarm) or OFF as appropriate. This turns on or off the audio alarm
globally for all alarms, including radar.
5. Press the C: ENTER soft key.
6. Press the ALARM key to finish.
3-47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. PLOTTER OPERATION
3.11.2 Arrival alarm
The arrival alarm informs you that your boat is approaching a destination waypoint. The
area that defines an arrival zone is that of a circle which you approach from the outside of
the circle. The alarm will be released if your boat enters the circle. When the arrival alarm is
active a red dashed circle marks the arrival alarm area. Note that the arrival alarm and
anchor watch alarm can be turned on together.
Alarm
range
Own ship
: Alarm area
Destination
waypoint
How the arrival alarm works
1. Press the ALARM key to open the alarm menu.
2. Use the Trackball to select ARRIVAL ALARM.
3. Press the A: EDIT soft key to show the arrival alarm window.
ARRIVAL ALARM
▲
ꢀON 0.010nm
ꢁOFF
▲
Arrival alarm window
4. Use the Trackball to select ON.
5. Use the Trackball and the alphanumeric keys to enter alarm setting: Operate the
Trackball to select digit; use the alphanumeric keys to enter value. The available arrival
alarm setting is 0.001 to 9.999 miles.
6. Press the C: ENTER soft key or push the ENTER knob to register setting.
7. Press the ALARM key to finish.
3-48
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. PLOTTER OPERATION
3.11.3 Anchor watch alarm
The anchor watch alarm informs you that your boat is moving when it should be at rest.
When the anchor watch is active, a red dashed circle with an “X” at its center marks the
anchor watch area.
Alarm
setting
Your ship's position where
you start the anchor watch
alarm.
: Alarm
area
How the anchor watch alarm works
1. Press the ALARM key to open the alarm menu.
2. Use the Trackball to select ANCHOR WATCH ALARM.
3. Press the A: EDIT soft key to open the anchor alarm window.
ANCHOR WATCH ALARM
▲
ꢀON 0.010nm
ꢁOFF
▲
Anchor watch alarm window
4. Use the Trackball to select ON.
5. Use the Trackball and the alphanumeric keys to enter alarm setting: Operate the
Trackball to select digit; use the alphanumeric keys to enter value. The available
anchor watch setting is 0.001 to 9.999 miles.
6. Press the C: ENTER soft key or push the ENTER knob to register setting.
7. Press the ALARM key to finish.
Note: If the arrival alarm range is changed, turn off the anchor watch alarm and then turn it
on again to give priority to the anchor watch alarm.
3-49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. PLOTTER OPERATION
3.11.4 XTE (Cross-Track Error) alarm
The XTE alarm warns you when your boat is off its intended course. When the XTE alarm is
active two red dashed lines mark the XTE alarm area.
Own ship
position
Destination
waypoint
Alarm
setting
Intended
course
: Alarm
How the XTE alarm works
1. Press the ALARM key to open the alarm menu.
2. Use the Trackball to select XTE ALARM.
3. Press the A: EDIT soft key to open the XTE alarm window.
XTE ALARM
▲
{
~
▲
ON 0.050nm
OFF
XTE alarm window
4. Use the Trackball and the alphanumeric keys to enter alarm setting: Operate the
Trackball to select digit; use the alphanumeric keys to enter value. The available XTE
alarm setting is 0.001 to 9.999 miles.
5. Press the C: ENTER soft key or push the ENTER knob to register setting.
6. Press the ALARM key to finish.
3.11.5 Speed alarm
The speed alarm warns when your boat’s speed is within or
under/over the speed range set.
SPEED ALARM
▲
1. Press the ALARM key to open the alarm menu.
{
WITHIN
000.0 ~ 000.0 kt
UNDER/OVER
000.0 ~ 000.0 kt
OFF
2. Use the Trackball to select SPEED ALARM.
3. Press the A: EDIT soft key to display the speed alarm
window.
4. Use the Trackball to select WITHIN, UNDER/OVER, or
OFF as appropriate.
{
~
▲
5. For WITHIN and UNDER/OVER use the Trackball and the
alphanumeric keys to enter alarm range: Operate the
Trackball to select digit; use the alphanumeric keys to enter value.
6. Press the C: ENTER soft key or push the ENTER knob to register setting.
7. Press the ALARM key to finish.
3-50
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. PLOTTER OPERATION
3.11.6 Proximity alarm
The proximity alarm alerts you when own ship nears a waypoint, which is marked with the
proximity mark, by the proximity alarm radius set for that waypoint on the waypoint list.
When own ship is within a waypoint’s proximity alarm radius, the alarm sounds. The
proximity mark remains on the screen until the waypoint is erased.
Radius in proportion to
proximity alarm radius,
which is set on waypoint list
001WPT
Proximity mark
1. Press the ALARM key to open the alarm menu.
2. Use the Trackball to select PROXIMITY ALARM.
3. Press the A: EDIT soft key to show the proximity alarm
window.
4. Use the Trackball to select ON or OFF as appropriate,
then press the C: ENTER soft key.
5. Press the ALARM key to finish.
PROXIMITY ALARM
▲
ꢀON
ꢁOFF
▲
Proximity alarm window
3.11.7 Trip alarm
The trip alarm informs you when you have traveled a certain distance.
1. Press the ALARM key to open the alarm menu.
2. Use the Trackball to select TRIP ALARM.
3. Press the A: EDIT soft key to show the trip alarm window.
4. Select ON.
TRIP ALARM
5. Use the Trackball and the alphanumeric keys to enter
alarm setting: Operate the Trackball to select digit; use
the alphanumeric keys to enter value.
6. Press the C: ENTER soft key or push the ENTER knob to
register setting.
▲
ꢀON 0000.0nm
ꢁOFF
▲
Trip alarm window
7. Press the ALARM key to finish.
3-51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. PLOTTER OPERATION
3.11.8 Grounding alarm (C-MAP specification)
The grounding alarm feature continuously scans the electronic chart data in front of the boat
to detect charted rocks, shoals, obstructions and land areas that could pose a threat if the
vessel were to continue along its current course. The area searched is user-definable and is
identified by a red triangle on the screen.
1. Press the ALARM key to open the alarm menu.
2. Choose GROUNDING ALARM from page 2 of the ALARM menu.
3. Press the A: EDIT soft key to show the grounding alarm window.
GROUNDING ALARM
▲
{
~
▼
ON 0.500nm
OFF
Grounding alarm window
4. Select ON.
5. Use the Trackball and the alphanumeric keys to enter depth setting: Operate the
Trackball to set depth. Set shallow depth for shallow waters.
6. Press the ENTER soft key or push the ENTER knob to register setting.
7. Choose GROUNDING ALARM RANGE and push the ENTER knob.
GROUNDING ALARM RANGE
0 . 2 5 0 n m
8. Use the Trackball and alphanumeric keys to enter alarm range, that is, how far ahead
to look for possible grounding situations.
9. Press the ENTER soft key.
10. Press the ALARM key to finish.
3-52
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. PLOTTER OPERATION
3.11.9 Alarm information
When an alarm setting has been violated, the buzzer sounds and the speaker icon appears
and is red. Press the CLEAR key to silence the alarm. You can see which alarm has been
violated on the ALARM menu. In the example below the arrival alarm has been violated.
1. Press the ALARM key. The name of the offending alarm appears in the alarm
information window.
AUDIO ALARM ꢀ
INTERNAL BUZZ
ON 0.010nm
ALARM1
ARRIVAL ALARMꢀ
ANCHOR WATCH ALARMꢀ OFF 0.010nm
A
EDIT
PROXIMITY ALARMꢀ
XTE ALARMꢀ
OFF
OFF 0.050nm
OFF
SPEED ALARMꢀ
CLEAR
ALARM
C
D
E
TRIP ALARMꢀ
OFF 0000.0nm
NEXT
PAGE
ALARM INFORMATION
ARRIVED
AT WAYPOINT XXX !
Alarm information
window
RETURN
Speaker icon
XXX = Destination waypoint name
Plotter alarm menu, page 1
2. Press the C: CLEAR ALARM soft key to acknowledge the alarm (and silence the buzzer
if it was not done with the CLEAR key). The color of the speaker icon changes from red
to background color. The icon remains on the screen until the cause of the alarm is
eliminated or the alarm is disabled. If more than one alarm has been violated the
message CONTINUE appears at the bottom of the alarm information window. In this
case, press the B: NEXT INFO soft key to see which other alarms have been violated.
3. Press the ALARM key to finish.
Note: The alarm icon is red when an alarm setting is violated, and changes to background
color when the CLEAR key or C: CLEAR ALARM soft key is pressed. The color does not
change regardless of how many other alarms are violated.
3-53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. PLOTTER OPERATION
Alarm messages
The table below shows the plotter alarm messages and their meanings.
Plotter alarm messages and their meanings.
Message
Meaning
ARRIVED AT WAYPOINT XXX! (XXX = waypoint name) Arrival alarm violated.
ENTERED INTO AVOIDANCE AREA!
EXCEEDED ANCHOR WATCH LIMIT!
EXCEEDED XTE LIMIT!
Proximity alarm violated.
Anchor watch alarm violated.
XTE alarm violated.
SPEED ALARM!
Speed alarm violated.
TEMPERATURE ALARM!
Water temperature alarm violated.
Trip alarm violated.
TRIP ALARM! MILEAGE EXCEEDED
GROUNDING ALARM
Grounding alarm (C=MAP
specification) violated. See next
paragraph.
Depth area (C=MAP specification)
violated. See next paragraph.
Land area (C=MAP specification)
violated. See next paragraph.
Intertidal area (C=MAP specification)
violated. See next paragraph.
Rock alarm (C=MAP specification)
violated. See next paragraph.
Shoreline construct (C=MAP
specification) violated. See next
paragraph.
GUARDIAN ALARM (DEPTH AREA)
GUARDIAN ALARM (LAND AREA)
GUARDIAN ALARM (INTERTIDAL AREA)
GUARDIAN ALARM (ROCK)
GUARDIAN ALARM (SHORELINE CONSTRUCT)
Obstruction (C=MAP specification)
violated. See next paragraph.
No data alarm (C=MAP specification)
violated. See next paragraph.
GUARDIAN ALARM (OBSTRUCTION)
GUARDIAN ALARM (NO DATA AVAILABLE)
3-54
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. PLOTTER OPERATION
3.12 Resetting Trip Distance
Trip distance is shown on the navigation data display. You can reset the trip distance to
zero as follows:
1. Press the MENU key.
2. Press the E: SYSTEM CONFIGURATION and A: GENERAL SETUP soft keys in that
order to show the GENERAL SETUP menu.
GENERAL
SETUP1
KEY BEEP
ON
LANGUAGE
RANGE UNIT
ENGLISH
nm, kt
A
EDIT
TEMPERATURE UNIT
DEPTH UNIT
WIND UNIT
°F
ft
ft
AIS
OPTION
B
WIND DATA
APPARENT
60 seconds
9H 0m
NO
15 seconds
SPEED AVERAGING
LOCAL TIME OFFSET
RESET TRIP LOG
TIMEOUT DISP. SETTING
SAVE MOB KEY FUNCTION
START UP PICTURE
NEXT
PAGE
D
E
RETURN
DEFAULT
General setup menu, page 1
Note: B: AIS OPTION soft key is currently inoperative.
3. Use the Trackball to select RESET TRIP LOG, then press the A: EDIT soft key.
4. Use the Trackball to select YES, then press the C: ENTER soft key.
5. Press the MENU key to close the menu.
3-55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. PLOTTER OPERATION
This page intentionally left blank.
3-56
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. VIDEO SOUNDER OPERATION
With connection of the optional Network Sounder ETR-6/10N/30N you can show video
sounder images on the display.
4.1 Sounder Displays
4.1.1 Selecting a sounder display
There are seven display modes from which to choose: dual frequency, single frequency,
marker zoom, bottom zoom, bottom lock, bottom discrimination, and A-scope.
To select a display;
1. Press the DISP key and then select sounder display desired.
2. If not already displayed, press the HIDE/SHOW key to show the sounder soft keys.
3. Press the D: DISPLY MODE soft key to show the display mode window.
DISPLAY MODE
ꢁDUAL FREQ
ꢀSINGLE FREQ
ꢀMARKER ZOOM
ꢀBOTTOM ZOOM
ꢀBOTTOM LOCK
ꢀBOTTOM DSCRM
HF: 200.0 kHz
LF: 50.0 kHz
Display mode window
4. Use the Trackball or the ENTER knob to select a display.
5. Press the E: RETURN soft key to close the window.
Note: On menus which show the E: RETURN soft key you may use it or the ENTER knob
to register setting and close the window.
4-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. VIDEO SOUNDER OPERATION
4.1.2 Description of sounder displays
Single-frequency display
Variable Range Marker
(White)
Display mode
SOUNDER DUAL
SOUNDER SINGLE
SOUNDER M. ZOOM
SOUNDER B. ZOOM
SOUNDER B/L
Depth scale
Minute marker
Time
0'30"
Zero line
Icons (alarm,
battery,
SOUNDER
SINGLE
0
S
I
SOUNDER B/D
M
°
F
simulation)
50
A
B
C
D
E
SHIFT
50.0
50
Color bar
Fish
echo
40
30
AUTO/
D.BOX
Cross-hair
cursor
Temp.
scale
100
FREQ
LF /HF
Water
temp.
graph
DISPLY
MODE
150
120
SPLIT
/
Water
temp.
display
LF
200
Soft keys
Bottom echo
Tx frequency
Depth
Indications on the single frequency display
Note: The water temperature display requires an appropriate water temperature sensor. It
can be turned on or off with TEMPERATURE GRAPH on the SOUNDER MENU.
Selecting transmission frequency
The single frequency display shows either the LF (low frequency) picture or HF (high
frequency) picture. To select transmission frequency, press the C: FREQ LF/HF soft key.
“LF” or “HF” is highlighted on its key label with each press of the key.
0.0
Dual-frequency display
The dual-frequency display provides both
LF and HF pictures. This display is useful
for comparing the same picture with two
different sounding frequencies.
LF picture
The sounder uses ultrasonic pulses to
LF
HF
detect bottom conditions. The lower the
frequency of the pulse, the wider the
detection area. Therefore, the low
Dual-frequency display
frequency is useful for general detection and judging bottom condition.
4-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. VIDEO SOUNDER OPERATION
HF picture
The higher the frequency of the ultrasonic pulse the better the resolution. Therefore, the
high frequency is ideal for detailed observation of fish school.
low frequency
high frequency
Sounding area and transmission frequency
Marker-zoom display
The marker-zoom display expands a selected area of the normal sounder picture to full
vertical size of the screen on the left-half window. You may specify the portion to expand by
operating the VRM (Variable Range Marker), which you can shift with the ENTER knob.
The area between the VRM and zoom marker is expanded. The length of the segment is
equal to one division of the depth scale.
Note: The VRM is set independently from other displays in case of multiple displays.
Fish school
0'20"
0
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Fish
school
50
60
70
-
-
-
VRM
42.0
This part
is zoomed.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
50
-
-
-
-
Zoom marker
100
-
80
HF
-
-
MARKER-ZOOM
DISPLAY
NORMAL
DISPLAY
Marker-zoom display plus normal sounder display
4-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. VIDEO SOUNDER OPERATION
Bottom-zoom display
The bottom-zoom display expands bottom and bottom fish echoes by the zoom range
selected on the SOUNDER RANGE SETUP menu (see paragraph 7.9.3), and is useful for
determining bottom hardness. A bottom displayed with a short echo tail usually means it is
a soft, sandy bottom. A long echo tail means a hard bottom.
0
-
0
-
20.0
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
10
20
30
50
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Zoom marker
Bottom
100
-
HF
-
80
BOTTOM-ZOOM NORMAL DISPLAY
DISPLAY
Bottom-zoom display plus normal sounder display
Bottom-lock display
The bottom-lock display provides a compressed normal picture on the right half of the
screen and a 10 or 20 feet (3 or 6 meter) wide layer in contact with the bottom is expanded
onto the left half of the screen. This mode is useful for discriminating bottom fish from the
bottom echo. You may select the bottom lock range from the SOUNDER RANGE SETUP
menu. For details, see paragraph 7.9.3.
10
0
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
8
Fish
school
Zoom marker
6
4
50
-
-
-
-
This part
is zoomed.
2
10
-
-
-
100
80
-
0
HF
-
BOTTOM-LOCK NORMAL DISPLAY
DISPLAY
Bottom-lock display plus normal sounder display
4-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. VIDEO SOUNDER OPERATION
Bottom discrimination display
The bottom discrimination mode displays the bottom echo to help you determine bottom
hardness. A bottom displayed with a short echo tail usually means it is a soft, sandy bottom.
A long echo tail means a hard bottom.
-
-
-
4
20.0
-
-
-
-
-
2
-
-
-
Zoom marker
50
-
Bottom tail
0
Long tail = Hard bottom
Short tail = Soft bottom
-
100
-
50
-
-
-
80
HF
BOTTOM
NORMAL DISPLAY
DISCRIMINATION
DISPLAY
Bottom discrimination display
A-scope display (display only)
The A-scope display, available in all modes, shows echoes at each transmission with
amplitudes and tone proportional to their intensities, on the right 1/10 of the screen. It is
useful for estimating fish species and bottom composition. To turn on the A-scope display,
press the D: DISPLAY MODE soft key, select display mode desired, then press the A:
A-SCPE soft key to show “ON” on its label. For modes other than SINGLE FREQ the
screen must be split horizontally to show the A-scope display.
0
-
-
-
A-scope display
-
No response
50
-
-
-
-
Weak echo (fish)
Strong echo (bottom)
100
-
-
84
HF
SINGLE FREQ DISPLAY A-SCOPE
DISPLAY
A-scope display
4-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. VIDEO SOUNDER OPERATION
4.1.3 Selecting screen split method in combination displays
On combination sounder displays you can split the screen vertically or
horizontally, using the E: SPLIT soft key as below.
0.0
0.0
SPLIT
/
E
HF
SPLIT
/
E
LF
HF
LF
How to use the SPLIT soft key (example: dual frequency display)
4.2 Automatic Sounder Operation
Automatic sounder operation is useful when you are preoccupied with other tasks and do
not have the time to adjust the display.
4.2.1 How the automatic sounder works
The automatic sounder function automatically selects the proper gain, range scale and
clutter suppression level according to the depth. It works as follows:
•
The range changes automatically to locate the bottom on the lower half of the screen.
The range jumps to one step shallower range when the bottom echoes reach a half way
point of the full scale from the top and to one step deeper range when they come to the
lower edge of the scale.
•
•
The gain is automatically adjusted to display the bottom echo in reddish brown (default
color arrangement).
Clutter, which suppresses low level noise, is automatically adjusted.
4.2.2 Types of automatic sounder modes
Two types of automatic sounder modes are available: CRUISING and FISHING. CRUISING
is for tracking the bottom, and FISHING is for searching fish schools. CRUISING uses a
higher clutter rejection setting than FISHING therefore it is not recommended for fish
detection - weak fish echoes may be erased by the clutter suppression circuit.
4-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. VIDEO SOUNDER OPERATION
4.2.3 How to enable automatic sounder operation
1. If not displayed, press the HIDE/SHOW key to show the sounder soft keys.
2. Press the B: AUTO/D. BOX soft key.
AUTO MODE
▲
ꢁCRUISING
ꢀFISHING
ꢀOFF (MANUAL)
▲
Mode/frequency window
3. Use the Trackball or the ENTER knob to select CRUISING or FISHING as appropriate.
4. Press the E: RETURN soft key.
4.3 Manual Sounder Operation
Manual operation is useful for observing fish schools and bottom using a fixed gain setting.
The gain, range and range shift functions used together give you the means to select the
depth you can see on the screen. The basic range can be thought of as providing a
“window” into the water column and range shifting as moving the “window” to the desired
depth.
4.3.1 Selecting the manual mode
1. If not displayed, press the HIDE/SHOW key to show the sounder soft keys.
2. Press the B: AUTO/D. BOX soft key to show the mode/frequency window.
3. Select OFF (MANUAL).
4. Press the E: RETURN soft key.
4.3.2 Selecting display range
Press the [RANGE +] or [RANGE -] key to select a range. The default ranges in feet, meters,
fathoms and passi/braza are as below. Note that the range cannot be changed in the
automatic sounder mode.
Default sounder ranges
Range 1 Range 2 Range 3 Range 4 Range 5 Range 6 Range 7
Range 8
ETR-6/10N ETR-30N
15 ft
5 m
30 ft
10 m
5 fa
60 ft
120 ft
40 m
200 ft
80 m
400 ft
1000 ft
300 m
150 fa
200 P/B
4000 ft
1200 m
650 fa
4500 ft
1500 m
900 fa
20 m
10 fa
10 P/B
150 m
80 fa
3 fa
20 fa
40 fa
3 P/B
5 P/B
30 P/B
50 P/B
100 P/B
700 P/B
900 P/B
4-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. VIDEO SOUNDER OPERATION
4.3.3 Adjusting the gain
Normally, set the gain to the point where excessive noise does not appear on the screen.
Use a higher gain setting for greater depths and a lower setting for shallow waters.
Gain too high
Gain proper
Gain too low
Examples of proper and improper gain
Press the GAIN key to show the gain window, and adjust the ENTER knob or Trackball.
Current level is shown on the bar, and the setting range is 0-100(%). Press the E: RETURN
soft key to finish.
GAIN - LF
▲
HIGH
57
LOW
▲
Gain window
Note 1: On the dual-frequency display, the gain can be independently set for LF and HF.
Use the C: FREQ LF/HF soft key to select the frequency for which to adjust gain.
Note 2: Gain cannot be adjusted in the automatic sounder mode. The message
“SOUNDER GAIN CANNOT BE CHANGED IN AUTO MODE” is displayed when you
attempt to do so.
4.3.4 Shifting the range
The basic range may be shifted up or down as desired by pressing the A: SHIFT soft key
followed by adjusting the ENTER knob. Press the E: RETURN soft key to finish.
Shift
Shift concept
4-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. VIDEO SOUNDER OPERATION
4.4 Measuring Depth, Time
The VRM measures the depth and the cross-hair cursor, time.
1. Rotate the ENTER knob to shift the VRM; counterclockwise to shift it downward,
clockwise to shift it upward. You may also use the Trackball to shift the VRM.
2. Roll the Trackball horizontally to adjust the cross-hair cursor to measure time.
Depth to VRM
Time for a scan line to travel
from the right edge of the
display to the cross-hair cursor
0'33"
0
VRM (white)
40.0
50
Cross-hair
cursor
100
150
97
200
LF
How to measure depth and time
Note: If, when the range setting is over 1000 ft (m, fa, p/b), the VRM indication and depth
scale may overlap one another, shift the cross-hair cursor slightly to show them completely.
Further, when the display is shifted, the depth scale may obscure the time indication.
4.5 Reducing Interference
Interference from other acoustic equipment operating nearby or other electronic equipment
on your boat may show itself on the display as shown below.
Interference from
other sounder
Electrical inteference
Types of interference
To reduce interference, do the following:
4-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. VIDEO SOUNDER OPERATION
1. Press the MENU key.
2. Press the A: SOUNDER MENU soft key.
3. Select NOISE LIMITER, then press the A: EDIT soft key to show the noise limiter
window.
NOISE LIMITER
L
OFF
LOW
MEDIUM
HIGH
L
Noise limiter window
4. Use the Trackball to select the degree of suppression desired (LOW, MEDIUM, HIGH),
or turn the noise limiter off.
5. Press the E: RETURN soft key followed by the MENU key to close the menu.
Turn the noise limiter circuit off when no interference exists, otherwise weak echoes may be
missed.
4.6 Reducing Low Level Noise
Light-blue dots may appear over most of the screen. This is mainly due to sediment in the
water, or noise. This noise can be suppressed by adjusting CLUTTER on the SOUNDER
menu.
Appearance of clutter
When the automatic sounder mode is used, clutter is automatically adjusted. To reduce low
level noise in manual sounder operation do the following:
1. Press the MENU key.
2. Press the A: SOUNDER MENU soft key.
3. Select CLUTTER, then press the A: EDIT soft key to show the clutter window.
CLUTTER
LLLLL
09
LLLLL
Clutter window
4-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. VIDEO SOUNDER OPERATION
4. Adjust the Trackball upward or downward to select clutter rejection level desired; 0
(OFF) through 16. The higher the number the higher the degree of suppression. Note
that the clutter suppressor may erase weak echoes. Therefore, turn off the clutter when
its use is not required.
5. Press the E: RETURN soft key followed by the MENU key to close the menu.
Note: Unlike the signal level feature, clutter does not reduce display colors. However, if you
do not wish to change the relation between weak and strong echoes, use signal level
instead.
4.7 Erasing Weak Echoes
Sediments in the water or reflections from plankton may be painted on the display in green
or light blue. These weak echoes may be erased as below.
Weak
echoes
Appearance of weak echoes
1. Press the MENU key.
2. Press the A: SOUNDER MENU soft key.
3. Select SIGNAL LEVEL, and press the A: EDIT soft key to show the signal level window.
SIGNAL LEVEL
▲
ꢁOFF
ꢀSL1
ꢀSL2
ꢀSL3
ꢀSL4
ꢀSL5
ꢀSL6
▲
SIGNAL LEVEL
▲
ꢁOFF
ꢀSL1
ꢀSL2
ꢀSL3
▲
8-color display
16-color display
Signal level window
4. Use the Trackball to select level of erasure or OFF as appropriate. The higher the
number the stronger the echo that will be erased.
5. Press the E: RETURN soft key followed by the MENU key to close the menu.
Note: Unlike “clutter,” signal level reduces display colors. Therefore, if you do not wish to
reduce colors, use clutter instead.
4-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. VIDEO SOUNDER OPERATION
4.8 White Marker
The white marker functions to display a particular echo color in white. For example, you
may want to display the bottom echo in white to discriminate fish echoes near the bottom.
1. Press the MENU key.
2. Press the A: SOUNDER MENU soft key.
3. Select WHITE MARKER, then press the A: EDIT soft key to open the white marker
window.
WHITE MARKER
▲
OFF
▲
White marker window
4. Use the Trackball to select the color to display in white. As you use the Trackball, the
number in the white marker window changes, the white marker on the echo strength bar
shifts and the selected echo color is displayed in white.
White marker shows
color currently
displayed in white.
←
Color bar (16 color) when white marker function is active
5. Press the E: RETURN soft key followed by the MENU key to close the menu.
To turn the white marker function off, display “OFF” in the white marker window.
4.9 Picture Advance Speed
The picture advance speed determines how quickly the vertical scan lines run across the
screen. When selecting a picture advance speed, keep in mind that a fast advance speed
will expand the size of the fish school horizontally on the screen and a slow advance speed
will contract it.
The advancement speed may be set independent of or synchronized with ship’s speed.
4.9.1 Advancement independent of ship’s speed
1. Press the MENU key.
2. Press the A: SOUNDER MENU soft key.
3. Select PICTURE ADVANCE, and press the A: EDIT soft key to open the picture
advance window.
4-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. VIDEO SOUNDER OPERATION
PICTURE ADVANCE
▲
ꢁ2/1
ꢀ1/1
ꢀ1/2
ꢀ1/4
ꢀ1/8
ꢀ1/16
ꢀSTOP
▲
Picture advance window
4. Use the Trackball to select speed desired. The fractions in the window denote the
number of scan lines produced per transmission. For example, 1/8 means one scan line
is produced every eight transmissions. STOP freezes the display and it is convenient for
observing an echo.
5. Press the E: RETURN soft key followed by the MENU key to close the menu.
Note: When using the plotter/sounder combination display, advancement of the sounder
picture may be temporarily interrupted while the plotter display is being shifted or its display
range is being changed.
4.9.2 Advancement synchronized with ship’s speed
With speed data provided by a speed-measuring device, picture advance speed may be set
according to ship’s speed, the ship’s speed dependent mode. As shown in the figure below
the horizontal scale of the display is not influenced by the change of ship’s speed, thus the
speed-dependent picture advance permits judgment of fish school size and abundance at
any speed. The choice “SPD SENSING PRR” means the ship’s speed dependent mode,
where the PRR changes automatically with ship’s speed.
Fish school shrinks as speed
is increased; expanded
as speed is decreased.
Normal Mode
Same size
fish schools
HALF
SPEED
FULL
SPEED
Fish schools are shown
same size regardless
of ship's speed.
Speed
Actual Movement
Speed-Dependent Picture Advance Mode
How the speed-dependent picture advance mode works
4-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. VIDEO SOUNDER OPERATION
Activating/deactivating the speed-dependent picture advance mode
1. Press the MENU key followed by the A: SOUNDER MENU soft key.
2. Select PRR LEVEL.
3. Press the A: EDIT soft key to open the setting window.
4. Use the Trackball to select SPD SENSING PRR.
5. Press the E: RETURN soft key followed by the MENU key to close the menu.
Note: Use the same speed data sentence (STG or STW) throughout the network for
smooth advancement of the sounder picture. See the paragraph 6.5 for how to output data
through the network.
4.10 Display Colors
You can select the number of colors and background color to display as follows:
1. Press the MENU key.
2. Press the A: SOUNDER MENU soft key.
3. Select HUE, then press the A: EDIT soft key to show the hue window.
HUE
▲
1
▲
Hue window
4. Use the Trackball to select hue number, referring to the table below. (You can see the
result of your selection on the display.)
Hue no. and background and echo colors
Hue No.
Echo Color
16 color
Background Color
Blue
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
8 color
16 color
8 color
16 color
8 color
16 color
8 color
Blue
Dark blue
Dark blue
White
White
Black
Black
Monochrome yellow, eight intensities
5. Press the E: RETURN soft key followed by the MENU key to close the menu.
4-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. VIDEO SOUNDER OPERATION
4.11 Alarms
The sounder section has five conditions which generate audio and visual alarms: bottom
alarm, fish alarm (bottom lock), fish alarm (normal) and water temperature alarm
(temperature sensor required).
You may set up the sounder alarms on the ALARM menu, which may be displayed by
pressing the ALARM key.
SOUNDER
ALARM
AUDIO ALARM
INTERNAL BUZZ
OFF
BOTTOM ALARM
TEMPERATURE ALARM OFF
A
C
E
EDIT
FISH ALARM
OFF
OFF
FISH ALARM (B/L)
CLEAR
ALARM
ALARM INFORMATION
NO ALARM
RETURN
Sounder alarm menu
4.11.1 Audio alarm on/off
The audio alarm sounds whenever an alarm setting is violated. You can enable or disable
the audio alarm as follows:
1. Press the ALARM key to show the ALARM menu.
2. Use the Trackball to select ALARM AUDIO.
3. Press the A: EDIT soft key to show the audio alarm window.
AUDIO ALARM
ꢀINT & EXT BUZZ
ꢁINTERNAL BUZZ
ꢀOFF
Alarm audio window
4. Use the Trackball to select INT & EXT BUZZ (Internal + External alarm), INTERNAL
BUZZ (Internal alarm) or OFF. External buzzer required to select “INT+EXT BUZZ.” OFF
globally turns the audio alarm on or off for all modes, including radar.
5. Press the C: ENTER soft key.
6. Press the ALARM key to close the menu.
4-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. VIDEO SOUNDER OPERATION
4.11.2 Bottom alarm
The bottom alarm sounds when the bottom echo is within the alarm range set. To activate
the bottom alarm, the depth must be displayed. Note that the bottom alarm is turned on or
off reciprocally with the bottom alarm on the plotter alarm menu.
1. Press the ALARM key to show the ALARM menu.
2. Use the Trackball to select BOTTOM ALARM.
3. Press the A: EDIT soft key to show the bottom alarm window.
BOTTOM ALARM
▲
ꢀON
0000.0-0000.0 ft
ꢁOFF
▲
Bottom alarm window
4. Use the Trackball to select ON or OFF as appropriate. For ON, enter alarm range with
the Trackball and numeric keys: Adjust the Trackball to select digit; hit appropriate
numeric key to enter value.
5. Press the C: ENTER soft key or push the ENTER knob to register setting.
6. Press the ALARM key to close the menu.
4.11.3 Fish alarm
The fish alarm sounds when a fish echo is within the preset alarm range. Note that the
sensitivity of the fish alarm can be set on the SOUNDER SYSTEM SETUP menu.
1. Press the ALARM key to show the ALARM menu.
2. Use the Trackball to select FISH ALARM.
3. Press the A: EDIT soft key to show the fish alarm window.
FISH ALARM
▲
ꢀON
0000.0-0000.0 ft
ꢁOFF
▲
Fish alarm window
4. Use the Trackball to select ON or OFF as appropriate. For ON, use the Trackball and
numeric keys to enter range: Adjust the Trackball to select digit; hit the appropriate
numeric key to enter value.
5. Press the C: ENTER soft key or push the ENTER knob to register setting.
6. Press the ALARM key to close the menu.
4-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. VIDEO SOUNDER OPERATION
4.11.4 Fish alarm (B/L)
The bottom-lock fish alarm sounds when a fish echo is within a predetermined distance
from the bottom. Note that the sensitivity of the fish alarm can be set on the SOUNDER
SYSTEM SETUP menu.
1. Press the ALARM key to show the ALARM menu.
2. Use the Trackball to select FISH ALARM (B/L).
3. Press the A: EDIT soft key to show the fish alarm (B/L) window.
FISH ALARM (B/L)
▲
ꢀON
0000.0-0000.0 ft
ꢁOFF
▲
Fish alarm (B/L) window
4. Use the Trackball to select ON or OFF as appropriate. For ON, use the Trackball and
numeric keys to enter range: Adjust the Trackball to select digit; hit appropriate numeric
key to enter value.
5. Press the C: ENTER soft key or push the ENTER knob to register setting.
6. Press the ALARM key to close the menu.
4.11.5 Water temperature alarm
There are two types of water temperature alarms: WITHIN RANGE and OUT OF RANGE.
The WITHIN RANGE alarm sounds when the water temperature is within the range set, and
the OUT OF RANGE alarm sounds when the water temperature is higher or lower than the
range set. Note that the water temperature alarm is turned on or off reciprocally with the
water temperature alarm on the plotter menu.
1. Press the ALARM key to show the ALARM menu.
2. Use the Trackball to select TEMPERATURE ALARM.
3. Press the A: EDIT soft key to show the temperature alarm window.
TEMPERATURE ALARM
▲
ꢀWITHIN RANGE
+000.0 - +000.0°F
ꢀOUT OF RANGE
+000.0 - +000.0°F
ꢁOFF
▲
Water temperature alarm window
4. Use the Trackball to select WITHIN RANGE, OUT OF RANGE or OFF as numeric key
to enter alarm range: Adjust the Trackball to select digit; hit appropriate numeric key to
enter value. To switch between plus and minus and vice versa use the A: +< - ->- soft
key.
5. Press the C: ENTER soft key or push the ENTER knob to register setting.
6. Press the ALARM key to close the menu.
4-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. VIDEO SOUNDER OPERATION
4.11.6 When an alarm setting is violated...
When an alarm setting has been violated the buzzer sounds and the speaker icon appears
in red. Press the CLEAR key to silence the alarm. At this time the color of the speaker icon
changes from red to background color. You can see which alarm has been violated on the
alarm menu display. In the example below the bottom alarm has been violated.
To see which alarm(s) has been violated:
1. Press the ALARM key. The name of the offending alarm is shown in the ALARM
INFORMATION window.
SOUNDER
ALARM
AUDIO ALARM
INTERNAL BUZZ
0050.0-0100.0ft
BOTTOM ALARM
TEMPERATURE ALARM OFF
A
C
E
EDIT
FISH ALARM
OFF
OFF
FISH ALARM (B/L)
CLEAR
ALARM
ALARM INFORMATION
DEPTH ALARM!
Alarm information
window
RETURN
Speaker icon
Sounder alarm menu
2. Press the C: CLEAR ALARM soft key to acknowledge the alarm (and silence the buzzer
if it has not already been done with the CLEAR key). The color of the speaker icon
changes from red to background color. The icon remains on the screen until the reason
for the alarm is eliminated or the alarm is disabled. If more than one alarm has been
violated, the message CONTINUE appears at the bottom of the alarm information
window. In this case, press the B: NEXT INFO soft key to see which other alarms have
been violated.
Note: The alarm icon is red when an alarm setting is violated, and changes to
background color when the CLEAR key or C: CLEAR ALARM soft key is pressed. The
color remains the same regardless of how many times another alarm is violated.
3. Press the ALARM key to close the menu.
Alarm messages
The table below shows the sounder alarm messages and their meanings.
Sounder alarm messages and their meanings
Message
DEPTH ALARM!
Meaning
Bottom alarm violated.
FISH ALARM!
Fish alarm violated.
TEMPERATURE ALARM!
Water temperature alarm violated.
4-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. VIDEO SOUNDER OPERATION
4.12 Water Temperature Graph
The water temperature graph (appropriate sensor required) plots water temperature on the
sounder display. (See the figure on page 4-3.) It can be turned on or off as below.
1. Press the MENU key to open the menu.
2. Press the A: SOUNDER MENU soft key.
3. Select TEMPERATURE GRAPH and press the A: EDIT soft key.
4. Select OFF (default setting) or ON as appropriate.
5. Press the C: ENTER soft key.
6. Press the MENU key to close the menu.
4.13 Changing Pulse Repetition Rate
Pulse repetition rate can be changed. Normally, the highest rate (20) is used. When in
shallow waters, second reflection echoes may appear between surface and actual bottom
echo. In this case lower the PRR level. The option “SPD SENSING PRR” means the ship’s
speed dependent mode, where the PRR changes automatically with ship’s speed (required
speed input.) For further information about the ship’s speed dependent mode, see page
4-13.
1. Press the MENU key to open the menu.
2. Press the A: SOUNDER MENU soft key.
3. Select PRR LEVEL.
4. Press the A: EDIT soft key to open the setting window.
5. Use the Trackball to select the rate for repetition.
6. Press the C: ENTER soft key followed by the MENU key to close the menu.
Too small setting reduces the number of pulse repetition. This may cause a problem to
search fish schools. Select “20” unless multistage reflections appear on the display.
4.14 Saving Sounder Picture to an SD Card
You may save the current sounder picture to an SD card, using a function key programmed
to save the sounder picture.
1. Program a function key in order to save the sounder picture. See paragraph 7.9.4 for the
procedure.
2. Hit the SHOW/HIDE key to show the function keys if they are not currently shown.
3. Press the function key programmed to save the sounder picture.
The sounder picture stops advancing and the message “NOW SAVING SOUNDER
PICTURE TO CARD” appears on the display while the picture is being saved. If no card is
inserted, the message “PLEASE INSERT THE CARD. PUSH ANY KEY TO CONTINUE.”
appears. If there is not sufficient memory remaining in the card the message “THERE IS
NO MEMORY TO SAVE PICTURE. PUSH ANY KEY TO CONTINUE.” appears. After the
picture has been recorded, normal sounder operation is restored.
4-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. VIDEO SOUNDER OPERATION
4.15 Interpreting the Sounder Display
4.15.1 Zero line
The zero line (sometimes referred to as the transmission line) represents the transducer’s
position, and moves off the screen when a deep phased range is used.
Zero line
Shift
Zero line
4.15.2 Bottom echo
Echoes from the bottom are normally the strongest and are displayed in reddish-brown, but
the color and width will vary with bottom composition, water depth, frequency, sensitivity,
etc.
In a comparatively shallow depth, a high gain setting will cause a second or sometimes a
third or a fourth echo to be displayed at the same interval between them below the first
echo trace. This is because the echo travels between the bottom and the surface twice or
more in shallow depths.
The color of the bottom echo can be used to help determine the density of the bottom
materials (soft or hard). The harder the bottom, the wider the trace. If the gain is set to show
only a single bottom echo on mud, a rocky bottom will show a second or third bottom return.
The range should be chosen so the first and second bottom echoes are displayed when
bottom hardness is being determined.
Intensity difference
in water depth
Rock base
Mud and sand
Second bottom
echo
Bottom echoes
4-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. VIDEO SOUNDER OPERATION
4.15.3 Fish school echoes
Fish school echoes will generally be plotted between the zero line and the bottom. Usually
the fish school/fish echo is weaker than the bottom echo because its reflection property is
much smaller compared to the bottom. The size of the fish school can be ascertained from
the density of the display.
Large
school
Small
school
Size of
fish school
Fish school echoes
4.15.4 Surface noise/Aeration
When the waters are rough or the boat passes over a wake, surface noise may appear near
the zero line. As surface turbulence is acoustically equivalent to running into a brick wall,
the bottom echo will be displayed intermittently. Similar noise sometimes appears when a
water temperature difference (thermocline) exists. Different species of fish tend to prefer
different temperature zones, so the thermocline may be useful to help identify target fish.
200 kHz tends to show shallow thermoclines better than 50 kHz.
In rough waters the display is occasionally interrupted due to below-the-ship air bubbles
obstructing the sound path. This also occurs when the boat makes a quick turn or reverses
movement. Lowering the picture advance speed may reduce the interruption. However,
reconsideration of the transducer installation may be necessary if the interruption occurs
frequently.
Surface noise
Caused by aerated
water
Thermocline
Surface noise/aeration
4-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. VIDEO SOUNDER OPERATION
This page intentionally left blank.
4-22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5. AIS OPERATION
Connected to an AIS Interface, your NavNet unit can show the name, position and other
nav data of AIS transponder equipped ships.
5.1 Turning AIS Feature On/Off
1. Press the MENU key to display the main menu.
2. Press the E: SYSTEM CONFIGURATION soft key.
3. Press the A: GENERAL SETUP soft key.
GENERAL
SETUP1
KEY BEEP
LANGUAGE
RANGE UNIT
ON
ENGLISH
nm, kt
A
EDIT
TEMPERATURE UNIT
DEPTH UNIT
WIND UNIT
°F
ft
ft
AIS
OPTION
B
WIND DATA
APPARENT
60 seconds
9H 0m
NO
SPEED AVERAGING
LOCAL TIME OFFSET
RESET TRIP LOG
TIMEOUT DISPLAY SETTING 15 sec
SAVE MOB KEY FUNCTION SAVE SHIP
NEXT
PAGE
D
E
RETURN
POSITION & MOB
DEFAULT
WALLPAPER
GENERAL SETUP menu, page 1
4. Press the C: AIS OPTION soft key to show the AIS OPTION menu. (The C: AIS
OPTION soft key is shown in grey unless the AIS Interface Unit or FURUNO FA-150 is
connected.)
AIS
OPTION
AIS DISPLAY MODE
OFF
THE NUMBER OF AIS TARGET 100
PROXIMITY ALARM
CPA
OFF
OFF
A
EDIT
TCPA
OFF
VECTOR TIME
VECTOR MODE
HISTORY INTERVAL
30 minutes
TRUE
30 seconds
E
RETURN
AIS OPTION menu
5. Choose AIS DISPLAY MODE and press the A: A: EDIT soft key.
5-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5. AIS OPERATION
AIS DISPLAY MODE
▲
~
{
{
{
{
▼
RANGE 1.0 nm
SECTOR
CPA
TCPA
OFF
AIS DISPLAY MODE window
6. Choose desired option from the following and push the A: EDIT soft key.
RANGE: Choose to use the AIS function within the range you specify. Use the numeric
keys to enter the range from own ship and then go to step 8.
SECTOR: Set an area from which to receive AIS data. Go to step 7.
CPA:
TCPA:
OFF:
Displays targets according to their CPA, from nearest to furthest.
Displays targets according to their TCPA, from nearest to furthest.
Choose to turn off the AIS function, and then press the ENTER soft key.
7. If you chose SECTOR, do the following to set the area to use.
Choose the radar display if it is not already displayed. Head-up mode is chosen
automatically.
a) Rotate the ENTER knob to set the left side of the sector and push the ENTER knob.
b) Rotate the ENTER knob to set the right side of the sector and push the ENTER knob.
8. Press the C: ENTER soft key.
9. Press the MENU key twice to close the menu.
Note 1: For the OFF setting, all AIS symbols are erased from the screen, however AIS
functions continue internally.
Note 2: AIS symbols are momentarily erased after the screen is redrawn when bow
direction is changed in the Head-up mode.
Note 3: AIS is automatically turned off under any of the conditions noted below.
a) EPFS or gyro alarm generated.
b) Manual ship’s position is used.
c) DTM sentence with no WGS-84 is received.
Note 4: In case of multiple display units connected via the NavNet network, the AIS feature
can only be turned on or off from the display unit to which the AIS transponder is connected.
Vector mode
You may reference the vector to North (True, requires heading and speed data) or ship’s
heading (Relative) as desired on the AIS option menu.
5-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5. AIS OPERATION
5.2 AIS Symbols
When RANGE or SECTOR is selected, AIS-equipped ships are marked on the display at
their current position with the appropriate AIS symbol as shown below.
AIS symbols
Symbol
Description
Activated automatically or manually. The dashed line shows ship’s
SOG and COG (or STW and CTW). The solid shows target bearing.
Activated target
A target whose CPA and TCPA are within the CPA and TCPA values
set by the operator.
Dangerous
target
A target is declared a lost target when no data is received for three to
five reporting intervals. When this occurs, the target is marked with the
(flashing) lost target symbol.
Lost target
Target selected on radar display. (Dashed square does not appear
when target is selected on plotter display.)
Target selected
for data display
5.3 Setting Number of AIS Targets to Display
Up to 100 of the closest AIS targets may be displayed on the screen. If you do not require
all targets you choose the number of targets to display, from 1-100.
1. Press the MENU key to display the main menu.
2. Press the E: SYSTEM CONFIGURATION soft key.
3. Press the A: GENERAL SETUP soft key.
4. Press the C: AIS OPTION soft key to show the AIS OPTION menu.
5. Choose THE NUMBER OF AIS TARGET and press the A: EDIT soft key.
6. Enter the number of AIS targets you wish to display and press the C: ENTER soft key.
7. Press the MENU key to close the menu.
5-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5. AIS OPERATION
5.4 Activating Targets
Use the trackball to place the cursor on the sleeping AIS target (indicates only the presence
of a vessel equipped with AIS in a certain location) you wish to activate; that is, know more
about a vessel’s motion.
SOG and
COG vector
*1
Turning
direction
Heading
line*2
Activated target
*1: Vector shows STW (speed thru water) and CSE (course) when water tracking mode is
selected at the radar.
*2: If there is no heading data, the line points in direction of COG.
5.5 Displaying Target Data
1. Place the cursor on an AIS target symbol.
2. Plotter display: Press the ENTER knob.
Radar display: Press D: TARGET INFO.
Activated target selected for data display
MMSI No.
Ship's Name
MMSI 123456789
NAME QUEEN ELIZABETH
Course over Ground*, Speed over Ground
#
COG 359 SOG 23.2kt
°
CPA and TCPA
Bearing, Range
Beam, Length
CPA 2nm TCPA 12:35
BRG 359.4 RNG 10.8nm
BEAM 32m LENGTH 294m
* = CSE (course) when water tracking mode is selected at radar.
# = STW (speed thru water) when water tracking mode is selected at radar.
AIS target data display
5-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5. AIS OPERATION
5.6 Lost Target
A target is declared a lost target when no data is received for three to five reporting intervals.
When this occurs, the target is marked with the (flashing) lost target symbol. However, the
target which becomes a lost target is a activated target or a sleeping target within the lost
target range.
Lost target
Confirming a lost target
1. Use the trackball to place the cursor where there is no ARPA target, marks or lines.
2. Push the ENTER knob.
5.7 Setting CPA and TCPA
When the predicted CPA of any target becomes smaller than a preset CPA alarm range or
its predicted TCPA less than a preset TCPA alarm limit, an audio alarm sounds, the
messages CPA ALARM and TCPA ALARM appear, and the speaker icon appears (in red).
In addition, the AIS target plot symbol of the offending target changes to a triangle and
flashes together with its vector. You may silence the audio alarm with the CLEAR key.
Press the ALARM key and the message “COLLISION ALARM” appears. Press the D:
CLEAR soft key to acknowledge the alarm. The flashing of the triangle plot symbol
continues until you intentionally terminate tracking of the target. The ARP continuously
monitors the predicted range at the Closest Point of Approach (CPA) and predicted time to
CPA (TCPA) of each track to own ship.
This feature helps alert you to targets which may be on a collision course with own ship.
However, it is important that gain, A/C SEA, A/C RAIN and other radar controls are properly
adjusted and the ARP is set up so that it can track targets effectively.
CPA/TCPA alarm ranges must be set up properly taking into consideration the size,
tonnage, speed, turning performance and other characteristics of own ship.
Follow the steps shown below to set the CPA/TCPA alarm range:
1. Press the MENU key followed by the ARP SETUP soft key.
2. Press the E: SYSTEM CONFIGURATION soft key.
3. Press the A: GENERAL SETUP soft key.
4. Press the C: AIS OPTION soft key to show the AIS OPTION menu.
5. Choose CPA and then press the A: EDIT soft key to show the CPA window.
5-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5. AIS OPERATION
CPA
S
~
OFF
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
0.5nm
1nm
2nm
3nm
4nm
5nm
6nm
T
CPA window
6. Select a CPA limit desired from 0.5 nm, 1 nm, 2 nm, 3 nm, 5 nm and 6 nm with the
Trackball.
7. Press the C: ENTER soft key.
8. Choose TCPA.
9. Press the A: EDIT soft key to show the TCPA window.
TCPA
S
~
30 seconds
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
T
1 minute
2 minutes
3 minutes
4 minutes
5 minutes
6 minutes
12 minutes
TCPA window
10. Select a TCPA limit from 30 sec, 1 min, 2 min, 3 min, 4 min, 5 min, 6 min and 12 min.
11. Press the C: ENTER soft key.
12. Press the MENU key to close the menu.
5.8 Proximity Alarm
The proximity alarm alerts when there are AIS targets within the range you set. When an
AIS target comes within the proximity alarm range, the message AIS TARGET COMES
CLOSE appears.
1. Press the MENU key followed by the ARP SETUP soft key.
2. Press the E: SYSTEM CONFIGURATION soft key.
3. Press the A: GENERAL SETUP soft key.
4. Press the C: AIS OPTION soft key to show the AIS OPTION menu.
5. Choose PROXIMITY ALARM and push the ENTER knob.
6. Enter proximity alarm range (0.01-24 nm) and press the C: ENTER soft key.
7. Press the MENU key to close the menu.
5-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5. AIS OPERATION
5.9 Showing, Hiding AIS Target Tracks
AIS target tracks may be shown or hidden as follows
1. Press the MENU key followed by the A: CHART SETUP and B: TRACKS & MARKS
CONTROL soft keys to open the TRACK CONTROL menu.
2. Use the Trackball to select TARGET TRACK DISPLAY.
3. Press the A: EDIT soft key to show the target track display window.
4. Use the Trackball to select one of the following:
OFF (no ARP nor AIS): Turn off target tracks.
ON (ARP and AIS): Turn on target tracks
ARP ONLY (ARP equipped): Show only ARP tracks.
AIS ONLY (AIS equipped): Show only AIS tracks.
BOTH: Show both ARP and AIS tracks.
5. Press the C: ENTER soft key.
6. Press the MENU key to close the menu.
5.10 Choosing Vector Time
The vector is the line extending from a tracked target which shows estimated speed and
course of the target. The vector tip shows an estimated position of the target after the
selected vector time elapses. It can be useful to extend the vector length (time) in order to
evaluate the risk of collision with any target.
1. Press the MENU key followed by the ARP SETUP soft key.
2. Press the E: SYSTEM CONFIGURATION soft key.
3. Press the A: GENERAL SETUP soft key.
4. Press the C: AIS OPTION soft key to show the AIS OPTION menu.
5. Choose VECTOR TIME and then press the A: EDIT soft key to show the AIS vector time
window.
AIS VECTOR TIME
▲
~
{
{
{
{
{
▼
30 seconds
1 minute
3 minutes
6 minutes
15 minutes
30 minutes
AIS vector time window
6. Operate the Trackball to select vector time among 30 sec, 1 min, 3 min, 6 min, 15 min
and 30 min.
7. Press the C: ENTER soft key.
8. Press the MENU key to close the menu.
5-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5. AIS OPERATION
5.11 Displaying Past Positions of AIS Targets
You can display time-spaced dots (maximum ten dots) marking the past positions of any
AIS targets being tracked. You can evaluate a target’s actions by the spacing between dots.
Below are examples of dot spacing and target movement.
(a) Ship turning
(b) Ship running
straight
(d) Ship increased
speed
(c) Ship reduced
speed
AIS past position displays
To turn the AIS past position display on or off:
1. Press the MENU key to display the main menu.
2. Press the E: SYSTEM CONFIGURATION soft key.
3. Press the A: GENERAL SETUP soft key.
4. Press the C: AIS OPTION soft key to show the AIS OPTION menu.
5. Choose HISTORY INTERVAL and then press the A: EDIT soft key.
HISTORY INTERVAL
▲
~
{
{
{
{
▼
OFF
30 seconds
1 minute
3 minutes
6 minutes
History interval window
6. Operate the Trackball to select history interval among 30 sec, 1 min, 3 min and 6 min,
or select OFF to turn off the past position display.
7. Press the C: ENTER soft key.
8. Press the MENU key to close the menu.
5-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6. DATA TRANSFER
This chapter provides information for saving and replaying data to and from memory cards,
and receiving and outputting data through the network.
6.1 Memory Card Operations
The memory cards store these data: marks, lines, waypoints, routes, track, position, water
temperature and setting data (plotter only). The following memory cards may be used:
Kingstone: SD-M64B1 (64 MB), SD-M128B1 (128 MB)
Viking: 32SD-M32B1 (32 MB), 64SD-M64B1 (64 MB)
EP Memory: 32 MB, 64 MB
SANDISK: 64SDSDB-64-J60 (64 MB), 128SDSDB-128-J60 (128 MB)
Panasonic: 64 RP-SD064BL1A (64 MB), 128RP-SD128BL1A (128 MB)
Toshiba: 64 SD-NAD064MT (64 MB), 128 SD-NA128MT (128 MB)
6.1.1 Deleting all data (other than chart data) from memory cards
Follow the procedure below to delete all data (other than chart data) from memory cards.
1. Insert a blank memory card into the card slot.
2. Press the MENU key followed by the E: SYSTEM CONFIGURATION, D: DATA
TRANSFER, A: SAVE/LOAD DATA and C: SAVE DATA TO MEMORY CARD soft keys
to show the SAVE DATA menu.
SAVE
DATA
TRACKS
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
MARKS & LINES
WAYPOINTS & ROUTES
SETTING DATA*
A
B
EDIT
SAVE
* = Plotter data only
D
E
DELETE
RETURN
Save data menu
3. Press the D: DELETE soft key. You are asked if you are ready to delete the contents of
the memory card.
4. Push the ENTER knob to format (or press the CLEAR key to escape). “NOW
DELETING MEMORY CARD” appears. Do not remove the card while its contents are
being deleted. When the formatting is completed, “DELETE COMPLETED. PUSH
ENTER KNOB TO CONTINUE.” appears.
5. Push the ENTER knob to continue.
6-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6. DATA TRANSFER
Note: If the memory card was not inserted correctly, the message “FAILED TO DELETE
MEMORY CARD.” appears.
6.1.2 Saving data to a memory card
1. Insert a formatted memory card into the slot.
2. Press the MENU key followed by the E: SYSTEM CONFIGURATION, D: DATA
TRANSFER, A: SAVE/LOAD DATA and C: SAVE DATA TO MEMORY CARD soft keys
to show the SAVE DATA menu.
3. Use the Trackball to select item to save.
4. Press the A: EDIT soft key.
5. Use the Trackball to select ON.
6. Press the C: ENTER soft key.
7. Repeat steps 3 to 6 to choose other data to save if desired.
8. Press the B: SAVE soft key, then press the ENTER knob. The message “NOW SAVING
DATA TO MEMORY CARD. DO NOT TURN OFF DISPLAY UNIT UNTIL
COMPLETED.” appears.
When saving is completed, “COMPLETED SAVING DATA. PUSH ENTER KNOB TO
CONTINUE.” appears. Push the ENTER knob to continue.
Memory card messages
Various memory card messages appear to alert you to memory card-related error. These
are tabulated below.
Memory card messages
Message
Memory card is not
inserted. Please insert
memory card. Push
ENTER knob to continue.
Overwrite data?
(Track)
Reason
Memory card not
inserted.
Remedy
Push the ENTER knob to return to the
SAVE DATA display and then insert card.
Data type to be
recorded exists on
Push the ENTER knob to overwrite same
data type on the card, or press the CLEAR
(Mark)
(WPT)
(Config)
memory card. (Two or key to escape.
more of same type of
data cannot be
recorded.)
Failed to save data. Push
ENTER knob to continue.
Could not save data.
Push the ENTER knob to continue.
6-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6. DATA TRANSFER
6.1.3 Playing back data from a memory card
Data (track, marks, lines, waypoints, routes and setting data) can be loaded from a memory
card and displayed on the screen. This feature is useful for observing past data and setting
up the equipment for a specific purpose with “setting data.”
1. Press the MENU key followed by the E: SYSTEM CONFIGURATION and D: DATA
TRANSFER soft keys.
2. Press the A: SAVE/LOAD DATA soft key.
3. Press the A: LOAD DATA FROM MEMORY CARD soft key to show the LOAD DATA
menu.
LOAD
DATA
TRACKS
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
MARKS & LINES
WAYPOINTS & ROUTES
SETTING DATA*
WALLPAPER
A
EDIT
LOAD
B
* = Plotter data onl
E
RETURN
Load data menu
4. Use the Trackball to select item to load.
5. Press the A: EDIT soft key. (The A: EDIT soft key is inoperative when no memory card
is inserted or there is no data in the memory card.)
6. Use the Trackball to select ON. (Select OFF not to load selected data.) Press the C:
ENTER soft key. If the memory card does not contain the item selected, the unit beeps
and ON cannot be selected.
7. After selecting all items desired, press the B: LOAD soft key, then press the ENTER
knob. The message “START LOADING FROM MEMORY CARD.” appears.
8. After loading is completed, the message “COMPLETED LOADING DATA. PUSH
ENTER KNOB TO CONTINUE.” appears. Push the ENTER knob to continue.
Notes on loading data
Tracks: Since loaded track data is added to internal track, oldest track will be erased when
the track memory capacity is exceeded.
Waypoints & routes: The loaded data replaces like stored data.
Marks & lines: The loaded data is added to internal data. When the mark/line memory
becomes full no marks may be entered.
Setting data: The loaded data replaces current configuration settings. If the memory card
contents could not be loaded, push the ENTER knob to restart with default settings. Note
that track memory capacity is not saved or loaded. To use loaded setting data, turn the
power off and on again.
Wallpaper: Load desired wallpaper. (See Chapter 7.)
6-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6. DATA TRANSFER
6.2 Receiving Data Via Network Equipment
You can receive waypoints, routes, marks and lines from NavNet equipment.
1. Press the MENU key.
2. Press the E: SYSTEM CONFIGURATION soft key.
3. Press the D: DATA TRANSFER soft key.
4. Press the C: RECEIVE DATA VIA NETWORK soft key.
RECEIVE
HOST NAME
PLOT1 - - -
OFF
DATA
MARKS & LINES
WAYPOINTS & ROUTES OFF
A
B
EDIT
RCV
E
RETURN
Receive data menu
5. Select HOST NAME, then press the A: EDIT soft key.
HOST NAME
▲
1 (NAVNET1)
2 (NAVNET2)
3 (NAVNET3)
4 (NAVNET4)
▲
Host name window
6. Use the Trackball to choose host name from which to receive data, then push the
ENTER knob.
7. Select the data you wish to receive, then press the A: EDIT soft key. For example, select
MARKS & LINES.
MARKS & LINES
▲
ON
OFF
▲
Marks & lines window
8. Select ON or OFF as appropriate, then press the C: ENTER soft key.
9. Turn WAYPOINTS & ROUTES on or off as appropriate.
10.Press the B: RCV soft key followed by the ENTER knob. The message “START
RECEIVING DATA VIA NETWORK.” is displayed. If no data could be found, the
message “(HOST NAME)’ IS NOT FOUND.” appears. When the transfer is completed,
the message “DATA TRANSFER COMPLETED. PUSH ENTER KNOB TO CONTINUE.”
appears. Push the ENTER knob to finish.
11.Press the MENU key to close the menu.
6-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6. DATA TRANSFER
6.3 Outputting Data Through the Network
Follow the procedure below to output data through the network. To prevent trouble, do not
output the same data from multiple sources.
1. Press the MENU key to open the menu.
2. Press the E: SYSTEM CONFIGURATION, C: SYSTEM SETUP, A: PORT SETUP and
D: OUTPUT THROUGH NETWORK soft keys.
SELECT
SNTNC
AAM
APB
BOD
BWR
DPT
GGA
GLL
GTD
MTW
RMA
RMB
RMC
VHW
VTG
WPL
XTE
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
A
ON/OFF
E
RETURN
ZDA
HDT
HDG
MWV
Select sentence menu
3. Select sentence with the Trackball.
4. Press the A: ON/OFF soft key to turn sentence on or off.
5. Press the E: RETURN soft key.
6. Press the MENU key to close the menu.
AAM: Waypoint arrival alarm
APB: Autopilot sentence B
BOD: Bearing origin to destination
BWR: Bearing and distance to waypoint - rhumb line
DPT: Depth
GGA: Global positioning system(GPS) fix data
GLL: Geographic position - latutude/longitude
GTD: Own ship information-TD
MTW: Water temperature
RMA: Recommended minimum specific LORAN-C data
RMB: Recommended minimum navigation information
RMC: Recommended minimum specific GPS/TRANSIT data
VHW: Water speed and heading
VTG: Course over ground and ground speed
WPL: Waypoint location
XTE: Cross-track error, measured
ZDA: Time and date
HDT: Heading true,
HDG: Heading, deviation and variation
MWV: Wind speed and angle
6-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6. DATA TRANSFER
This page intentionally left blank.
6-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7. CUSTOMIZING YOUR UNIT
This chapter describes the various options which allow you to set up your unit to suit your
needs. For mode-specific menus, e.g. radar, plotter and sounder, make sure that you select
the appropriate display when making changes or viewing menu options.
7.1 General Setup
This paragraph shows you how to set up functions common to the plotter, radar and
sounder displays. This is done on the GENERAL SETUP menu, which you may display
from any mode. These items include language, key beep, units of measurement, data
sources, etc.
1. Press the MENU key to display the main menu.
2. Press the E: SYSTEM CONFIGURATION soft key.
3. Press the A: GENERAL SETUP soft key.
GENERAL
SETUP1
GENERAL
SETUP2
KEY BEEP
LANGUAGE
RANGE UNIT
TEMPERATURE UNIT
DEPTH UNIT
WIND UNIT
WIND DATA
SPEED AVERAGING
LOCAL TIME OFFSET
RESET TRIP LOG
ON
ENGLISH
nm, kt
°F
ft
LAT/LON DISPLAY
TD DISPLAY
DD˚MM.MMMM'
LORAN C
SPEED
SOG
A
EDIT
A
EDIT
POSITION DISPLAY
TIME DISPLAY
LAT/LON
DST
ON/OFF
24 HOURS
RHUMB LINE
MAGNETIC
B
C
ft
RANGE & BEARING MODE
BEARING READOUT
MAGNETIC VARIATION
APPARENT
60 seconds
9H 0m
NO
AIS
OPTION
AUTO 07.0
°E
NEXT
PAGE
D
E
TIMEOUT DISPLAY SETTING 15 sec
SAVE MOB KEY FUNCTION SAVE SHIP
PREV.
PAGE
RETURN
E
POSITION & MOB
DEFAULT
WALLPAPER
Page 2
Page 1
General setup menu
4. Press the D: NEXT PAGE or E: PREV. PAGE soft key to switch pages if necessary.
5. Use the Trackball to select item.
6. Press the A: EDIT soft key.
7. Use the Trackball to select option desired, then press the C: ENTER soft key.
8. Press the MENU key to close the menu.
7-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7. CUSTOMIZING YOUR UNIT
Contents of general setup menu
Item
Description
Settings
Key Beep
Language
Turns key beep on/off.
Chooses menu language.
On, Off
English, French, German, Italian, Portuguese,
Spanish, Danish, Swedish, Norwegian
nm, kt; km, km/h; sm, mph; nm & yd, kt; nm &
m, kt; km & m, km/h; sm & yd, mph
°C,°F
Range Unit
Chooses unit of range and speed
measurement.
Temperature Chooses unit of water temperature
Unit
measurement.
Depth Unit
Wind Unit
Wind Data
Chooses unit of depth measurement.
Chooses unit of wind measurement.
Chooses how to display wind data.
m, ft, fa, P/B (Passi/Braza)
Kt, km/h, MPH, m/s
Apparent: The wind felt aboard a moving
vessel. It is the combination of the true wind
and the boat wind. True: The true speed and
direction of the wind, not modified by the
effects of the boat's movement.
Speed
Averaging
Calculation of ETA is based on average 0-9999 seconds
ship’s speed over a given period. If the
period is too long or too short,
calculation error will result. Change this
setting if calculation error occurs. The
default setting is suitable for most
conditions.
Local Time
Offset
Enter time difference between local
time and UTC time to use local time.
-13:30 to +13:30. For multiple display unit
configuration, all units should have the same
time offset.
Reset Trip Log Resets trip log.
Yes, No
Timeout
Display
Setting
Sets number of seconds to show a
window (for example, BRILL, GAIN)
before it is erased from the screen.
15 s, 30 s, 60 s, Continue (no timeout)
Save MOB
Defines the function of the SAVE/MOB Save Ship Position & MOB: Short press to
Key Function key.
save ship position, long press to save MOB.
MOB Without Confirmation: Position saved
as MOB position without confirmation. This
setting is only effective with automatic range
selection and with waypoint marker displayed
on radar display.
Quick Point Function: Position saved as
quick point.
Wallpaper
Chooses what to display in menu
Default: Default wallpaper
background.
User: User wallpaper. To use your own
wallpaper, save Microsoft Photo Editor or
Adobe Photoshop created png image (see
conditions at left) to SD card, load file to
equipment (see Chapter 6) and then choose
this User option.
Requirements for user wallpaper
Size: 252 KB or less, 640(H)x480(V)
Name: wallpaperh.png
No. of Colors: 256
Compression Level: None
Interlace: None
Permeation Color: None
Lat/Lon
Display
Chooses how many digits (or seconds) DD°MM.MM’, DD°MM.MMM’,
to display after decimal point in latitude DD°MM.MMMM’, DD°MM’SS.S”
and longitude position.
(Con’t on next page)
7-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7. CUSTOMIZING YOUR UNIT
Contents of general setup menu (con’t from previous page)
Item
Description
Settings
Loran C, Decca
TD Display
Speed
Chooses type of TD to display.
Chooses speed format to display.
SOG (Speed over ground), STW (Speed
through water)
Latitude, Longitude; Loran or
Decca TDs, or MGRS
Position
Display
Chooses how to display position.
Examples of MGRS indications:
(Military Grid Reference
18S: Locating a point within the Grid
Zone Designation
18SUU: Locating a point within a
100,000-meter square
18SUU80: Locating a point within a
10,000-meter square
18SUU8401: Locating a point within a
1,000-meter square
System).
What is MGRS?
For convenience, the world is generally
divided into 6° by 8° geographic areas,
each of which is given a unique
identification, called the Grid Zone
Designation. These areas are covered by
a pattern of 100,000-meter squares.
Each square is identified by two letters
called tie 100,000-meter square
identification. This identification is unique
within the area covered by the Grid Zone
Designation. Exceptions to this general
rule have been made in the post to
preserve the 100,000-meter
18SUU836014: Locating a point within
a 100-meter square
identifications on mapping that already
exists.
A reference keyed to a gridded map of
any scale is made by giving the 100,000-
meter square identification together with
the numerical location. Numerical
references within the 100,000-mater
square are given to the desired accuracy
in terms of the easting (E) and northing
(N) grid coordinates for the point. The
Grid Zone Designation usually is prefixed
to the identification when references are
made in more than one grid zone
designation area.
Time Display Chooses time notation.
12 hours, 24 hours
(Con’t on next page)
7-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7. CUSTOMIZING YOUR UNIT
Contents of general setup menu (con’t from previous page)
Item
Description
Settings
Range &
Bearing
Mode
Chooses how to calculate range and
bearing.
Great Circle: Shortest course between
two points on the surface of the earth.
Rhumb Line: Straight line drawn
between two points on a nautical chart.
Bearing
Readout
Chooses bearing display format for
course, course over ground and cursor
bearing.
True, Magnetic
Auto, Manual
Magnetic
Variation
The magnetic variations for all areas of
the earth are preprogrammed into this
unit. The preprogrammed variation is
accurate for most instances, however
you may wish to manually enter a
variation. For manual input, select
Manual, hit the A: EDIT soft key, enter
value, then hit the C: ENTER soft key to
set. “AUTO” requires position data.
AIS OPTION
soft key
See Chapter 5.
7.2 Radar Setup
This paragraph explains how to customize the radar display to suit your operational needs.
7.2.1 Radar display setup
The radar display may be set up from the RADAR DISPLAY SETUP menu, which contains
items such as EBL reference and cursor position format.
1. Press the MENU key to show the main menu.
2. Press the A: RADAR DISPLAY SETUP soft key.
DISPLAY
SETUP
EBL REFERENCE
CURSOR POSITION
TUNING
RELATIVE
RNG & BRG-REL
AUTO
A
B
EDIT
TX SECTOR BLANKING
NOISE REJECTION
BACKGROUND COLOR
ECHO COLOR
OFF 000
°
001°
D. BOX
OFF
BLACK/GREEN
GREEN
OFF
2ND ECHO REJECTION
WATCHMAN TIME
RANGE UNIT
5 minutes
nm
TRAIL MODE
RELATIVE
E
RETURN
Radar display setup menu
7-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7. CUSTOMIZING YOUR UNIT
Contents of radar display setup menu
Item
Description
Settings
EBL
Reference
References EBL bearing, shown in the
EBL data box, to North (True) or
heading (Relative). Relative with no
heading input. True only in course-up,
north-up and true motion.
True, Relative
Cursor
Position
Chooses how to display cursor position. LAT/LON: Lat/Long position of cursor
TD: Loran C or Decca TDs
RNG & BRG-REL: Range and bearing
Note: “RNG & BRG-TRUE” requires
in relative bearing.
heading data, true bearing. Reverts to
RNG & BRG-TRUE: Range and
relative bearing when heading data is
bearing in true bearing.
lost.
MGRS: MGRS format position
Tuning
Selects receiver tuning method. For
further details see the paragraph “2.3
Tuning.”
Auto, Manual
TX Sector
Blanking
Turns on/off dead sector graphic, which On, Off
shows area where no echoes are
received. To set sector, select ON, then
enter range. Max. sector is 135°.
Dashed lines mark the dead sector.
Note that noise may occasionally
appear in the TX sector when the echo
trail feature is turned on.
Dead sector
Noise
Rejection
Electrical noise, appearing on the
screen as “speckles,” may be
suppressed with the noise rejector.
Note that some forms of interference
cannot be suppressed.
Off, Low, High
(Con’t on next page)
7-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7. CUSTOMIZING YOUR UNIT
Contents of radar display setup menu (con’t from previous page)
Item
Description
Settings
Background Chooses colors of background,
Black/Green
Color
range rings and characters.
Effective when C: HUE soft key is
set for MANUAL SET.
Background: Black
Rings: Green
Characters: Green
Black/Red
Background: Black
Rings: Green
Characters: Red
Blue/White
Background: Blue
Rings: White
Characters: White
DK Blue/White
Background: Dark Blue
Rings: Green
Characters: Red
White/Green
Background: White
Rings: Green
Characters: Green
Echo Color
Chooses echo color.
Yellow, Green,
Multi-color. (Multi-color shows echoes
in red, yellow or green in order of
descending strength.)
2ND Echo
Rejection
Reduces second-trace echoes. See On, Off
the paragraph “2.24 Suppressing
Second-trace Echoes.”
Watchman
Time
Sets watchman stand-by period.
For further details see the
5, 10, 20 minutes
paragraph “ 2.23 Watchman.”
Range Unit
Trail Mode
Select unit of range measurement.
Sets echo trail reference.
nm, km, sm
True: Echo trails plotted in actual
courses and speeds. Requires
compass signal and speed input.
Relative: Echo trails move relative to
own ship.
Note: Relative trail is available in all
presentation modes except true
motion. True trail is available in all
modes.
7-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7. CUSTOMIZING YOUR UNIT
7.2.2 Radar range setup
You may choose the radar ranges you wish to use, from the RADAR RANGE SETUP menu.
After choosing the ranges desired, change the range with the RANGE key to activate range
settings. Available ranges depends on the radar used.
At least two ranges must be turned on. When less than two ranges are turned on you
cannot escape from the RADAR RANGE SETUP menu.
Note that this function is not available with the GD-1920C-BB.
1. Press the MENU key to show the main menu.
2. Press the B: RADAR RANGE SETUP soft key to show the RADAR RANGE SETUP
menu.
RANGE
SETUP
0.125nm
0.25nm
0.5nm
0.75nm
1nm
1.5nm
2nm
3nm
4nm
6nm
8nm
12nm
16nm
24nm
36nm
48nm
64nm
72nm
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
RANGE
SETUP
0.25km
0.5km
0.75km
1km
1.5km
2km
3km
4km
6km
8km
12km
16km
24km
36km
48km
64km
72km
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
A
ON/OFF
A
ON/OFF
E
RETURN
E
RETURN
MAXIMUM RANGE XXkm
*
MAXIMUM RANGE XXnm
*
* = Max. range depends on network radar used and is set on the network radar at installation.
Range unit: nm Range unit: km
Radar range setup menu
3. Use the Trackball to select the range which you want to turn on or off.
4. Press the A: ON/OFF soft key to turn a range on or off as appropriate.
5. Press the E: RETURN soft key to register settings.
6. Press the MENU key to close the menu.
Model
Maximum Range
24 nm, km, sm
36 nm, km, sm
48 nm, km, sm
64 nm, km, sm
72 nm, km, sm
1824C-BB
1834C-BB
1934C-BB
1944C-BB
1954C-BB, 1964C-BB
7-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7. CUSTOMIZING YOUR UNIT
7.2.3 Function key setup
The function keys provide one-touch execution of a desired function. The default radar
function key settings are as shown in the table below.
Function Key
Default Function
Function Key Label
1
2
3
4
5
Turn heading line off.
Turn range rings on/off.
Turn echo trail on/off.
Turn display offcenter on/off.
STBY/TX
HL
RNG
TRL
OFC
TX
If the above settings are not to your liking you may change them as follows:
1. Press the MENU key.
2. Press the D: FUNCTION KEY SETUP soft key.
FUNC
Function key
SOFT KEY 1
H
L
KEY
setting
Function
key label
HL: HDG LINE OFF
A
EDIT
SOFTKEY 2
RNG: RINGS ON/OFF
R
N
G
SOFT KEY 3
TRL: ECHO TRIAL
T
R
L
SOFT KEY 4
OFC: OFFCENTER
O
F
C
SOFT KEY 5
T
X
TX: STBY/TX
E
RETURN
Radar function key menu
3. Select the function key you want to program, then press the A: EDIT soft key.
SOFT KEY 1
SOFT KEY 1
SOFT KEY 1
S
S
OFC: OFFCENTER
TRL: ECHO TRAIL
RNG: RINGS ON/OFF
TLL: TLL OUTPUT
ALM: GUARD ALARM
EBL: EBL
ACQ: ACQUISITION
TX: STBY/TX
OFF
HL: HDG LINE OFF
MOD: MODE
GAI: GAIN
SEA: A/C SEA
RAI: A/C RAIN
FTC: FTC
RSR: SOURCE RADAR
DBX: D. BOX ON/OFF
CHG: CHANGE CNTRL
QP: QUICK POINT
MRK: MARK ENTRY
Scroll
down
Scroll
down
VRM: VRM
TTM: TTM ON/OFF
WMK: WPT ON/OFF
WTM: WATCHMAN
ES: ECHO STRETCH
PLS: PULSE LENGTH
ZOM: ZOOM
T
T
Radar function key options
4. Select function desired with the Trackball, then press the C: ENTER soft key or ENTER
knob to register your selection.
5. Press the MENU key to close the menu.
7-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7. CUSTOMIZING YOUR UNIT
Radar function keys
Function
Function Key
Label
Menu Item
OFF
Assigns no function.
—
HL: HDG LINE OFF
MOD: MODE
GAI: GAIN
Turns heading line off.
Selects presentation mode.
HL
MOD
Shows gain sensitivity adjustment window.
Shows A/C SEA adjustment window.
Shows A/C RAIN adjustment window.
GAI
SEA
RAI
FTC
SEA: A/C SEA
RAI: A/C RAIN
FTC: FTC
Displays FTC window. Available with Model 1700
series radar. Inoperative otherwise.
ES: ECHO STRETCH
PLS: PULSE LENGTH
ZOM: ZOOM
Turns echo stretch on/off.
Sets pulselength (long or short).
Turns zoom on/off.
ES
PLS
ZOM
OFC
Press to shift display center to cursor location.
Press again to turn shift off and return cursor to
display center.
OFC: OFFCENTER
TRL: ECHO TRAIL
RNG: RINGS ON/OFF
TLL: TLL OUTPUT
Starts/stops echo trails.
Turns range rings on/off.
TRL
RNG
TLL
Outputs cursor position, in NMEA format, to
navigator.
ALM: GUARD ALARM
EBL: EBL
Displays alarm soft keys.
ALM
EBL
Switches control between EBL1 and EBL2 with
each press.
Switches control between VRM1 and VRM2 with
each press.
VRM: VRM
VRM
TTM
Turns TTM (Tracked Target Message) display
on/off.
TTM: TTM ON/OFF
WMK: WPT ON/OFF
WTM: WATCHMAN
ACQ: ACQUISITION
Turns waypoint marker on/off.
Turns watchman on/off.
WMK
WTM
ACQ
Acquires and tracks cursor-selected target.
(Requires ARP-equipped Model 18x4/19x4 series
network radar.)
TX: STBY/TX
Toggles between standby and transmit
Selects source for radar picture.
TX
RSR: RADAR SOURCE
DBX: D. BOX ON/OFF
CHG: CHANGE CNTRL
QP: QUICK POINT
MRK: MARK ENTRY
RSR
DBX
CHG
QP
Turns data boxes on/off.
Changes display control in combination display.
Sets quick point (for navigation).
Enters the mark at the cursor position.
MRK
Note: To use CHANGE CNTRL set it on all displays, with the same soft key number.
7-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7. CUSTOMIZING YOUR UNIT
7.3 Plotter Setup
This paragraph provides the information necessary for setting up the plotter display.
7.3.1 Navigation options
Navigation options, for example, waypoint switching method, may be set on the PLOTTER
SETUP menu.
1. Show the plotter display, then press the MENU key open the main menu.
2. Press the B: PLOTTER SETUP soft key.
PLOTTER
SETUP
WAYPOINT SWITCHING ARRVL ALM CRCL
COURSE VECTOR
SET GOTO METHOD
QP
LINE
A
B
EDIT
1 POINT
INTERNAL
OFF
D. BOX
SAFE ROUTE CHECK
POPUP INFO
OFF
QPT/MARK SOFT KEY
QUICK POINT
E
RETURN
Plotter setup menu
Contents of plotter setup menu
Item
Description
Settings
Waypoint Switching
Chooses waypoint switching method. See “switching
waypoints” on page 3-45.
Perpendicular, Arrvl
Alm Crcl, Manual
Course Vector
You may extend a line from the own ship position to
show ship’s course. It may be a vector (length depends
on ship’s speed) or a simple line (course bar).
Line, Vector, Off
Set GOTO Method
QP
Sets the method by which to navigate to a quick point.
See “3.10.1 Navigating to a quick point.”
1 Point, 35 Points,
35 Pts/Port Service
Set “EXT WPT (RMB)” when a destination waypoint is
displayed from a external navigation equipment.
EXT WPT (RMB),
Internal
Safe Route Check
(C-MAP only)
The safe route check feature checks for interfering
objects (such as wrecks) within a route when creating or
editing a route.
On, Off
Popup Info
You may show the information for objects as below.
OFF: No information appears.
ALL ON, POINTS
ON, OFF
ALL ON: When the cursor is placed on anywhere on
chart, the information for that location appears.
POINTS ON: When the cursor is placed on an object
symbol, the information for it appears.
QPT/MARK SOFT
KEY
Chooses the function of the uppermost soft key on the
plotter display between QUICK POINT and MARK
ENTRY.
QUICK POINT,
MARK ENTRY
QUICK POINT: Enters the quick point at the cursor or
own ship position.
MARK ENTRY: Enters the mark at the cursor or own ship
position.
B: D. BOX (soft key) Sets up data boxes. See paragraph 7.5.
7-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7. CUSTOMIZING YOUR UNIT
7.3.2 Function key setup
The function keys provide one-touch execution of a desired function. The default plotter
function key settings are as shown in the table below.
Function
Key
1
Function Key Label
Default Function
Start/stop recording/plotting own ship’s track.
Edit mark/line.
TRK
EML
RUL
ADD
ALP
2
3
Ruler (measure range and bearing between two points).
Add new waypoint.
4
5
Alphanumeric waypoint list.
If the above settings are not to your liking you may change them as follows:
1. Press the MENU key.
2. Press the D: FUNCTION KEY SETUP soft key.
FUNC
Function key
SOFT KEY 1
T
R
K
KEY
setting
Function
key label
TRK: TRACK ON/OFF
A
EDIT
SOFT KEY 2
EML: EDIT MK/LINE
E
M
L
SOFT KEY 3
RUL: RULER
R
U
L
SOFT KEY 4
ADD: ADD NEW WPT
A
D
D
SOFT KEY 5
A
L
ALP: ALPHA LIST
P
E
RETURN
Plotter function key menu
3. Select the soft key you want to program, then press the A: EDIT soft key. A menu shows
the functions available and the current selection is highlighted.
SOFT KEY 1
OFF
ADD: ADD NEW WPT
MWP: MOVE WPT
RUL: RULER
GWP: GOTO WPT
GRT: GOTO ROUTE
EML: EDIT MK/LINE
TRK: TRACK ON/OFF
TTM: TTM ON/OFF
DTT: DEL TGT TRK
Scroll
ALP: ALPHA LIST
LCL: LOCAL LIST
RTE: ROUTE LIST
DBX: D. BOX ON/OFF
CHG: CHANGE CNTRL
QP: QUICK POINT
MRK: MARK ENTRY
Plotter function key options
7-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7. CUSTOMIZING YOUR UNIT
4. Select function desired with the Trackball, then press the C: ENTER soft key or ENTER
knob to register your selection.
5. Press the MENU key to close the menu.
Plotter function keys
Function Key
Label
Menu Item
Function
OFF
Assigns no function.
—
ADD: ADD NEW WPT
Registers waypoint at cursor position. Place cursor
for waypoint location, then press function key.
ADD
MWP: MOVE WPT
RUL: RULER
Moves selected waypoint to different position.
Select waypoint, press function key, select new
position, then press the ENTER knob.
MWP
RUL
Measures range and bearing between two points.
Press D: START POINT soft key to change starting
point if necessary. Range and bearing between two
points appears at the top of the screen.
GWP: GOTO WPT
Specify waypoint to set as destination. Enter
waypoint name in window, then press the C:
ENTER soft key.
GWP
GRT: GOTO ROUTE
EML: EDIT MK/LINE
TRK: TRACK ON/OFF
Specify route to follow. Enter route name in window, GRT
then press the C: ENTER soft key.
Displays mark & line menu. Press appropriate soft
key to access menu item.
EML
Each press starts or stops recording/plotting own
ship’s track.
TRK
TTM: TTM ON/OFF
DTT: DEL TGT TRACK
ALP: ALPHA LIST
Turns TTM (target track) display on/off.
Erases all TTM track.
TTM
DTT
ALP
LCL
RTE
DBX
CHG
QP
Displays waypoint alphanumeric list.
Displays waypoint local list.
Displays route list.
LCL: LOCAL LIST
RTE: ROUTE LIST
DBX: D. BOX ON/OFF
CHG: CHANGE CNTRL
QP: QUICK POINT
Shows/hides data boxes.
Changes control in combination screen.
Sets quick point (for navigation).
MRK: MARK ENTRY
Enters the mark at the cursor position.
MRK
Note: To use CHANGE CNTRL set it on all displays, with the same soft key number.
7-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7. CUSTOMIZING YOUR UNIT
7.4 Chart Setup
This paragraph shows you how to setup digital charts, from offsetting chart position to
turning chart attributes on or off.
7.4.1 Chart offset
In some instances position may be off by a few seconds. For example, the position of the
ship is shown to be at sea while it is in fact moored at a pier. You can compensate for this
error by offsetting chart position as shown in the procedure below.
1. Show the plotter display, then press the MENU key followed by the A: CHART SETUP
and A: CHART OFFSET soft keys.
34° 22. 3456'N
353.9°M TRIP
CHART
+
080° 22. 3456'E
0.75nm
9.9
OFFSET
16.0nm
SET
OFFSET
C
WP-002
FISH
BRIDGE
RESET
OFFSET
D
E
RETURN
Plotter display, chart offset selected
2. Use the Trackball to place the cursor at the correct latitude and longitude position of
own ship.
3. Press the C: SET OFFSET soft key.
4. Press the MENU key to close the menu. The “chart offset icon” ( ) appears at the top of
the display.
To cancel chart offset, press the D: RESET OFFSET soft key at step 3 in the above
procedure.
7-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7. CUSTOMIZING YOUR UNIT
7.4.2 Navionics GOLD chart attributes
Navionics GOLD chart attributes may be turned on or off from the CHART CONFIG menu,
which you may display as follows:
1. Press the MENU key.
2. Press the A: CHART SETUP and A: CHART CONFIGURATION soft keys.
CHART
CONFIG
CHART
CONFIG
LAT/LON GRID
GREEN
ON
OBJECT INFORMATION
CHART DISPLAY
ALL ON
TEXT INFORMATION
WAYPOINTS
DETAILED
INTERNATIONAL
EDIT
A
EDIT
A
B
LARGE
ON
NAVAIDS SYMBOL
WAYPOINT NAMES
CHART BORDER LINES
LIGHT SECTOR INFO
CAUTION & ROUTING DATAON
CNTOUR
LINE
ON
MARINE FEATURES
LAND FEATURES
ON
ON
ON
NEXT
PAGE
D
E
PREV.
PAGE
RETURN
E
Page 1
Page 2
Chart configuration menu (Navionics)
Contents of chart configuration menu (Navionics)
Item
Description
Settings
Lat/Lon Grid
Latitude and longitude grids
Red, yellow, green, light-blue,
purple, blue, white, Off
On, Off
Text Information
Waypoints
Geographic place, name
Waypoint size
Large, Small, Off
Waypoint Names
Chart Border Lines
Light Sector Info
Object Information
Waypoint name
On, Off
Border lines (indices)
Lighthouse viewing sector
Map data
On, Off
On, Off
Off, All On (display area data for
cursor-selected object), Points
On (display only point data for
cursor-selected object)
Detailed, Simple
Chart Display
Choose level of detail for map
Choose what kind of navaids
symbols to display.
Navaids Symbol
International, US
Caution & Routing
Data
Turn caution and routing data on
or off.
On, Off
(Con’t on next page)
7-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7. CUSTOMIZING YOUR UNIT
Contents of chart configuration menu (Navionics GOLD) (con’t from previous page)
Item
Description
Settings
Marine Features
Land Features
Turn marine features on or off.
Turn land features on or off.
On, Off
On, Off
CONTOUR LINE Soft key
Spot Soundings
Safe Contour
Shading
Turn water depth display on or off. On, Off
Paint areas in dark blue (default
color) which are shallower than
depth value set.
2m (or equivalent ft, fa or PB)
5 m (or equivalent ft, fa or PB)
10 m (or equivalent ft, fa or PB)
20 m or equivalent ft, fa or PB)
ALL: Display all depth contours
5 m: Display only 5 m* depth
contours
Depth Contour
Display depth contours.
10 m: Display only 10 m* depth
contours.
20 m: Display only 20 m* depth
contours
OFF: Turn off depth contours.
* Or equivalent ft, fa or PB.
7.4.3 C-MAP chart attributes
Displaying the CHART CONFIGURATION menu
C-MAP chart attributes may be turned on or off from the CHART CONFIGURATION menu:
1. Press the MENU key.
2. Press the A: CHART SETUP and C: CHART CONFIG soft keys.
CHART
CHART
CONFIG
CONFIG
SEABED TYPE
PLOTTER/OVERLAY
PLOTTER/OVERLAY
PLOTTER/OVERLAY
PLOTTER/OVERLAY
PLOTTER/OVERLAY
PLOTTER/OVERLAY
PLOTTER/OVERLAY
PLOTTER/OVERLAY
AUTO
PERSPECTIVE
DE-CLUTTER
CHART DISPLAY MODE
SAFETY STATUS
WAYPOINT
ON
PORTS & SERVICES
TRACKS & ROUTES
UNDERWATER OBJECTS
RIVERS & LAKES
LAND FEATURES
LANDMARKS
ON
FULL
PLOTTER/OVERLAY
PLOTTER/OVERLAY
PLOTTER/OVERLAY
PLOTTER/OVERLAY
PLOTTER/OVERLAY
US
EDIT
EDIT
A
B
A
WAYPOINT NAME
NAMES
DEPTH
CONFIG
DEPTH
CONFIG
B
LAT/LON GRID
BUOYS NAME
NAV-AIDS
CHART BOUNDARIES
PLOTTER/OVERLAY
OFF
LIGHT SECTORS
FLASHING
MIXING
PLOTTER/OVERLAY
PLOTTER/OVERLAY
PLOTTER/OVERLAY
CHART LEVEL
UNLOCK
ATTENTION AREAS
TIDES & CURRENTS
NEXT
PAGE
PREV
PAGE
D
E
D
RETURN
Page 1
Page 2
Chart configuration menu (C-MAP)
7-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7. CUSTOMIZING YOUR UNIT
CHART CONFIGURATION menu description
CHART CONFIGURATION menu description
Object
Content
Settings
ON
OFF
Description
PERSPECTIVE Perspective
display on/off
DE-CLUTTER
Turns perspective display on.
Turns perspective display off.
Removes overlapping objects from
display.
Overlapping
object on/off
ON
OFF
FULL
Displays overlapping objects.
All chart attributes are displayed.
CHART
Choose chart
DISPLAY MODE display mode
SIMPLE
Some attributes such as SEABED
TYPE, TRACKS and ROUTES are
displayed.
FISHING
LOW
Setting for use in fishing.
Only NAV AIDS and water depth are
shown.
CUSTOM
ON
User chooses which chart attributes to
turn on or off.
Safety status ON (See Safety Status
Indication on page 7-18 for
description.)
SAFETY
Safety status
indication
STATUS*1
OFF
Safety status OFF
WAYPOINT
Waypoints marks PLOT/OVERLAY Shown on plotter and overlay
and waypoint
names
displays.
PLOT
OFF
Shown on plotter display.
Waypoint markers and waypoint
names are turned off. Waypoint
names are not displayed regardless if
WAYPOINT NAME (below) is set to
ON.
WAYPOINT
NAME
Waypoint names
PLOTTER/OVER Shown on plotter and overlay
LAY
displays.
PLOT
OFF
Shown on plotter display.
Waypoint names are turned off.
NAMES
Text for land and
sea areas
PLOTTER/OVER Shown on plotter and overlay
LAY
displays.
PLOT
Shown on plotter display.
OFF
Names are turned off.
BUOYS NAME
NAV-AIDS
Name of buoys
PLOTTEROVERL Shown on plotter and overlay
AY
displays.
PLOT
OFF
US
Shown on plotter display.
Buoy names are turned off.
NOAA symbols are shown.
Complex object shown with single
icon.
Lighthouses,
buoys, etc.
US SIMPLE
INT
INT SIMPLE
International symbols are shown.
Complex object shown with single
icon.
PLOTTER/OVER Shown on plotter and overlay
LAY
displays.
PLOT
OFF
ON
Shown on plotter display.
Navaids are turned off.
Light sectors displayed.
Light sectors displayed and flashing.
LIGHT
Light sector
SECTORS
FLASHING
(Con’t on next page)
7-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7. CUSTOMIZING YOUR UNIT
CHART CONFIGURATION menu description (con’t from previous page)
Object
Content
Setting
Description
ATTENTION
AREAS
Attention areas
PLOTTER/OVER Shown on plotter and overlay
LAY
displays.
PLOT
OFF
Shown on plotter display.
Attention areas are turned off.
TIDES &
CURRENTS
Tidal station and
current station
PLOTTER/OVER Shown on plotter and overlay
LAY
displays.
PLOT
Shown on plotter display.
OFF
Tidal station and current station are
not shown. Tidal graph is also turned
off.
SEABED TYPE
Seabed type
PLOTTER/OVER Shown on plotter and overlay
LAY
displays.
PLOT
Shown on plotter display.
OFF
Tidal station and current station are
not shown. Tidal graph is also turned
off.
PORTS &
SERVICES
Ports and
services
PLOTTER/OVER Shown on plotter and overlay
LAY
displays.
PLOT
Shown on plotter display.
OFF
Ports and services are not shown.
Near Service also not shown.
TRACKS &
ROUTES
Tracks and routes PLOTTER/OVER Shown on plotter and overlay
LAY
displays.
PLOT
Shown on plotter display.
OFF
Tracks and routes are turned off.
UNDERWATER Below-surface
PLOTTER/OVER Shown on plotter and overlay
OBJECTS
obstructions such LAY displays.
as wrecks
PLOT
OFF
Shown on plotter display.
Underwater objects are turned off.
RIVERS &
LAKES
Rivers and lakes
PLOTTER/OVER Shown on plotter and overlay
LAY
displays.
PLOT
Shown on plotter display.
OFF
Rivers and lakes are turned off.
LAND
FEATURES
Land features
Landmarks
PLOTTER/OVER Shown on plotter and overlay
LAY
displays.
PLOT
Shown on plotter display.
OFF
Rivers and lakes are turned off.
LANDMARKS
LAT/LON GRID
PLOTTER/OVER Shown on plotter and overlay
LAY
displays.
PLOT
Shown on plotter display.
OFF
Landmarks are turned off.
Latitude and
PLOTTER/OVER Shown on plotter and overlay
longitude grids
LAY
displays.
PLOT
Shown on plotter display.
OFF
Latitude and longitude grids are
turned off.
(Con’t on next page)
7-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7. CUSTOMIZING YOUR UNIT
CHART CONFIGURATION menu description (con’t from previous page)
Object
Content
Setting
Description
CHART
BOUNDARIES
Chart boundary
lines
ON
Shown on plotter and overlay
displays.
AUTO
Chart border lines are shown for the
last four charts in a chart card on the
plotter and overlay displays
PLOTTER/OVER Chart border lines show on plotter and
LAY
overlay displays.
PLOT
Chart border lines show on plotter
display.
OFF
ON
OFF
Chart boundaries are turned off.
Mixing is active.
Mixing is disabled.
MIXING
Changes chart
scale to fit whole
chart on display
CHART LEVEL
Maintains current LOCK
Keeps current chart scale.
chart scale
UNLOCK
Chart scale may chosen freely.
regardless of
zoom setting
*1 SAFETY STATUS INDICATION
The following indications are shown beneath the range indication to denote safety
status:
NORMAL
BEST MAP
DATA OFF
DE-CLUTTER
DANGER
NORMAL (or U.ZOOM or O.ZOOM):
This indication appears to help you select a suitable chart scale.
NORMAL: Suitable chart scale is selected.
U.ZOOM: Chart scale is too small.
O.ZOOM: Chart scale is too large.
BEST MAP: Shown in red when the unsuitable chart scale is selected.
DATA OFF: Mixing levels can be turned on when the electronics chart coverage area
does not provide enough coverage to completely fill the display screen. When the
cursor or own ship mark is placed in the area with coverage, the chart data is shown as
below.
On: The chart line in the area with no coverage is shown. This area is filled with dots.
Off: The area with no coverage is not shown (goes to white).
DECLUT.: For C-MAP MAX charts, symbols of low priority (ex. map symbols on land)
can be automatically hidden to unclutter the screen when you change the scale. When
the function is turned on, DECLUT. appears in red.
7-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7. CUSTOMIZING YOUR UNIT
DANGERS: Shown in red when the GROUNDING alarm detects the high-risk object
(listed in the grounding report) when the GROUNDING alarm is turned on.
CAUTIONS: Shown in red when the GROUNDING alarm detects the low-risk object
when the GROUNDING alarm is turned on.
B: DEPTH CONFIG soft key
1. Press the MENU key.
2. Press the A: CHART SETUP and C: CHART CONFIGURATION soft keys.
3. Press the B: DEPTH CONFIG soft key.
DEPTH
CONFIG
DEPTH SHADING CONFIRMATION
AUTO
DEPTH SHADING DISPLAY
EDIT
A
SHOW FROM: 7 ft TO: 30 ft
DEPTH LINE & SPOT SOUNDINGS
DISPLAY MODES:
PLOTTER/OVERLAY
DEPTH LINES & SPOT SOUNDINGS DISP:
SHOW FROM: 00000 ft TO: 01000 ft
ROCKS BOTTOM TYPE DEPTH DISPLAY:
SHOW FROM: 00000 ft TO: 00030 ft
E
RETURN
DEPTH CONFIG menu
DEPTH CONFIG menu description
DEPTH SHADING CONFIRMATION: Choose the display color depending on depth.
Setting
AUTO
Description
Default Setting
Displays the chart in 32-color specified by C-MAP.
MANUAL
Displays the chart in three colors, blue, light-blue
and white. Areas for each color can be set at
DEPTH SHADING DISPLAY.
AUTO
NONE
Turns off depth area display.
DEPTH SHADING DISPLAY: Set the depth boundaries for shallow-medium and medium-
deep depths when DEPTH SHADING CONFIRMATION is set to MANUAL. For example,
setting 18 ft and 60 ft will show depths up to 18 ft in white, depths from 18 to 60 ft in
light-blue and depths greater than 60 ft in blue. (Setting value: 7, 18, 30 and 60 m/ft/fa/pb,
Default setting: Shallow-Medium; 7, Medium-Deep; 30 ft)
7-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7. CUSTOMIZING YOUR UNIT
DEPTH LINES & SPOT SOUNDINGS DISPLAY MODES: Choose where to display depth
contours, depth data etc.
Setting
Description
Default Setting
PLOT/OVERLAY Shows depth lines and soundings on the plotter and
overlay displays.
PLOT/OVERLAY
PLOTTER
OFF
Shows depth lines and soundings on the plotter display.
Turns off depth lines and soundings.
DEPTH LINES & SPOT SOUNDINGS DISP: Choose the depth range at which to show
depth lines and soundings (depth contours, depth data, etc.)
Setting
SHOW FROM
TO
Setting Range
Default Setting
0 m/ft/fa/pb
0-99999 m/ft/fa/pb
1000 m/ft/fa/pb
ROCKS BOTTOM TYPE DEPTH DISPLAY: Choose range for rocks depth display.
Setting
SHOW FROM
TO
Setting Range
Default Setting
0 m/ft/fa/pb
0-99999 m/ft/fa/pb
30 m/ft/fa/pb
7-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7. CUSTOMIZING YOUR UNIT
7.5 Data Boxes Setup
You may select the data to show in the data boxes for the plotter, radar and sounder
displays. Six boxes may be displayed in case of small size data box and two for large size
data box.
1. Display the radar, plotter or sounder display, whichever you want to set.
2. Press the MENU key to open the main menu.
3. Press one of the following sets of soft keys depending on the display selected at step 1.
Plotter mode: B: PLOTTER SETUP, B: D. BOX
Radar mode: A: RADAR DISPLAY SETUP, B: D. BOX
Sounder mode: A: SOUNDER MENU, B: D. BOX
DATA
DATA BOX SIZE
POSITION
WAYPOINT
COG
SMALL
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
X
BOX
EDIT
SOG
STW
BEARING
RANGE
TIME TO GO
ETA
TEMPERATURE
DEPTH
TRIP LOG
DATE
TIME
WIND
HEADING
RETURN
Data box menu
4. Use the Trackball to select an item, then press the A: EDIT soft key.
5. Select ON or OFF as desired.
6. Press the C: ENTER soft key or the ENTER knob to register your selection. Six items
may be set to ON for small data boxes; two for large data boxes.
7. Repeat steps 4-6 to turn other items on or off.
8. Press the MENU key to close the menu.
7-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7. CUSTOMIZING YOUR UNIT
7.6 Hot Page Setup
Six user-arrangeable hot pages are provided for quick selection of desired display. If the
default hot pages are not to your liking you may change them as shown below.
1. Press the MENU key followed by pressing the E: SYSTEM CONFIGURATION, C:
SYSTEM SETUP, C: HOT PAGE & NAV DISP SETUP and A: HOT PAGE SETUP soft
keys in that order.
2. Use the Trackball to select the hot page number to set, then press the A: EDIT soft key.
The “SELECT SCREEN TYPE” window appears.
HOTPAGE
SETUP
HOT PAGE 1
HOT PAGE 2
HOT PAGE 3
HOT PAGE 4
HOT PAGE 5
HOT PAGE 6
SELECT SCREEN TYPE
FULL SCREEN
SPLIT x 2
C ENTER
SPLIT x 3
E
CANCEL
Hot page setup menu
3. Use the Trackball to select screen type desired among FULL SCREEN, SPLIT X 2 and
SPLIT X 3 and push the ENTER knob.
4. For the full-screen display, rotate the ENTER knob to select screen desired, then press
the ENTER knob. If you selected a split screen, for example, SPLIT X 3, the display now
looks as in the figure below.
HOT PAGE 1
RADAR
PLOTTER
SOUNDER
Red cursor shows
current screen selection
OVERLAY
NAV DATA
Hot page setup menu, SPLIT X 3 screen, main screen selection
7-22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7. CUSTOMIZING YOUR UNIT
5. Rotate the ENTER knob to select a main screen, then press the ENTER knob. For
example, select the radar display. Your choice is then shaded to show that is has been
selected.
HOT PAGE 1
PLOTTER
RADAR
SOUNDER
Sub screen
COMPASS
HIGHWAY EXT VIDEO
Hot page setup menu, SPLIT X 3 screen, sub screen selection
6. Rotate the ENTER knob to select the screen to show at the top right 1/4 screen, then
press the ENTER knob or the C: ENTER soft key.
7. Rotate the ENTER knob to select the screen to show at the bottom right 1/4 screen,
then press ENTER knob or the C: ENTER soft key.
Note: The A: SELECT WINDOW soft key functions to select the window to process.
8. Press the MENU key to close the menu.
7.7 Navigator Setup
This section provides the information necessary for selecting the type of navigator
connected to your plotter.
7.7.1 Navigation data source
POSITION SOURCE
SPEED SOURCE
ALL
ETR
The NAV SETUP menu mainly selects the
source of nav data. For GPS receiver other than
the GP-310B/320B, speed averaging and local
time offset (to use local time) are also available.
Press the MENU key followed by the E: SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION, B: NAV OPTION and A: NAV
SOURCE SETTINGS soft keys to display this
menu.
TEMPERATURE SOURCE
DE`PTH SOURCE
ETR
ETR
STW CALIBRATION
TEMP CALIBRATION
DEPTH CALIBRATION
WIND AVERAGING
0%
+0.0°F
+0.0ft
5 minutes
P0.0°
WIND DIRECTION OFFSET
WIND SPEED CALIBRATION 00°F
7-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7. CUSTOMIZING YOUR UNIT
Contents of nav setup menu
Settings
Item
Description
Position
Source
FURUNO BB GPS: GPS Receiver
GP-310B/320B
GP: GPS navigator (via NETWORK
or NMEA port)
Chooses source of position data.
Note: When FURUNO BB GPS is selected,
GGA, VTG and ZDA sentences are set to
ON automatically.
LC: Loran C navigator (via
NETWORK or NMEA port)
ALL: Multiple navaid connection (via
NETWORK or NMEA port)
Speed
Source
Chooses source of speed data
ETR (NavNet sounder), NMEA
Temperature
Source
ETR, NMEA. Select ETR to show
water temperature data fed from the
network sounder.
Chooses source of water temperature data.
Depth
Chooses source of depth data.
ETR (NavNet sounder), NMEA
Source
STW
Calibration
Calibrates NMEA speed data. Enter amount
in percentage.
-50 to +50%
Temp
Calibration
Calibrates NMEA temperature data. Enter
offset to correct NMEA temperature data.
-40.0°C to +40.0°C (or equivalent
in °F)
Depth
Calibration
Calibrates NMEA depth data. Enter offset to
correct NMEA depth data.
-15.0 to +90.0 m (or equivalent in ft,
fa or P/B)
Wind
Averaging
Enter a value to smooth wind speed/direction
data. Ship’s bow is referenced to smooth
wind vector movement.
1-600 s
Wind
Direction
Offset
Offsets wind direction data.
S180°-P180°
-50 to +50%
Wind Speed Offsets NMEA wind speed data. Enter
Calibration
amount in percentage.
7-24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7. CUSTOMIZING YOUR UNIT
7.7.2 GPS receiver setup (Set equipped with GP-310B/320B)
The GPS SETUP menu sets up the GPS Receiver GP-310B/320B. Press the
MENU key followed by the E: SYSTEM CONFIGURATION, B: NAV OPTION
and B: GPS SENSOR SETTINGS soft keys to display this menu.
GPS
SETUP
GEODETIC DATUMꢀ
POSITION SMOOTHINGꢀ
SPD/CSE SMOOTHINGꢀ
LATITUDE OFFSETꢀ
LONGITUDE OFFSETꢀ
DISABLE SATELLITEꢀ
LATITUDEꢀ
WGS-84
000 second (s)
005 second (s)
0.000'N
A
B
EDIT
0.000'E
GPS
STATUS
- - - - - -
45
°
35.000'N
00.000'W
Appears only when
GPS-320B is connected.
WAAS
SET UP
C
LONGITUDEꢀ
125
°
ANTENNA HEIGHTꢀ
GPS FIX MODEꢀ
005 m
2D/3D
NO
COLD STARTꢀ
E
RETURN
GPS setup menu
Contents of GPS setup menu
Settings
Item
Description
Geodetic Datum
Geodetic datum is a reference for geodetic See Appendix for full list.
survey measurements consisting of fixed
latitude, longitude and azimuth values
associated with a defined station of
reference. You must have the correct
geodetic datum selected in your plotter so
that it will reference the correct point on
the chart for a given latitude and longitude.
Although WGS-84 is now the world
standard, other categories of charts still
exist. Refer to Appendix for a full list of
geodetic datum.
(Con’t on next page)
7-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7. CUSTOMIZING YOUR UNIT
Contents of GPS setup menu (con’t on previous page)
Item
Description
Settings
Position Smoothing
When the DOP or receiving condition is
unfavorable, the GPS fix may change
greatly, even if the vessel is not moving.
This change can be reduced by smoothing
the raw GPS fixes. A setting between 000
to 999 is available. The higher the setting
the more smoothed the raw data. If the
setting is too high, the response time
required to show a change of latitude and
longitude will be too long. This is
0-999 seconds
especially noticeable if the vessel is
moving fast. Increase the setting if the
GPS fix changes randomly.
During position fixing, ship’s velocity
(speed and course) is directly measured
by receiving GPS satellite signals. The raw
velocity data may vary too much
Spd/Cse Smoothing
0-999 seconds
depending on receiving conditions and
other factors. You can reduce this random
variance by increasing the smoothing. The
higher the smoothing setting, the more the
raw data will be averaged. If this setting is
high, the response to speed and course
changes will slow. For no smoothing, enter
all zeroes.
Latitude, Longitude
Offset
Offsets latitude position to further refine
position accuracy.
0.001’S – 9.999’S
0.000’N – 9.999’N
0.001’E – 9.999’E
0.000’W – 9.999’W
(Con’t on next page)
7-26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7. CUSTOMIZING YOUR UNIT
Contents of GPS setup menu (con’t on previous page)
Item
Description
Settings
Every GPS satellite is broadcasting
abnormal satellite number(s) in its
Almanac, which contains general orbital
data about all GPS satellites, including
those which are malfunctioning. Using this
information, the GPS receiver
Disable Satellite
Max. 3 satellites
automatically eliminates any
malfunctioning satellite from the GPS
satellite schedule. However, the Almanac
sometimes may not contain this
information. If you hear about a
malfunctioning satellite from another
source, you can disable it manually. Enter
satellite number (two digits, max. 3
satellites),then press the C: ENTER soft
key.
Sets initial latitude position after cold start.
Use the A: N < - -> S soft key to switch
coordinate.
Latitude
—
Sets initial longitude position after cold
start. Use the A: W < - -> E soft key to
switch coordinate.
Longitude
—
Enters the height of the GPS antenna unit
above sea surface. For further details refer
to the installation manual.
Antenna Height
GPS Fix Mode
Cold Start
0-999 m
2D, 2D/3D
No, Yes
Chooses position fixing method: 2D (three
satellites in view), 2D/3D (three or four
satellites in view whichever is greater).
Clears the Almanac to receive the latest
Almanac.
B: GPS STATUS
(soft key)
Displays GPS satellite status display.
Requires GPS Receiver GP-310B/320B or
GPS navigator outputting the data
sentence GSA or GSV. For further details
see the chapter on Maintenance.
7-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7. CUSTOMIZING YOUR UNIT
WAAS SETUP
Press the C: WAAS SETUP soft key to show the WAAS SETUP display.
Note: This function requires GP-320B antenna.
Contents of WAAS SETUP menu
Item
Description
Settings
WAAS MODE
WAAS SEARCH
Select ON to use the WAAS mode.
On, Off
WAAS satellite can be searched automatically
or manually. For manual search, enter
appropriate WAAS satellite number.
Auto, Manual
WAAS ALARM
When the WAAS signal is lost, the audible
alarm sounds with the visual message “NO
WAAS SIGNAL.”
On, Off
On: Alarm continues to sound until the WAAS
positioning mode is available again or the alarm
is recognized by key operation.
Off: Alarm sounds three times.
CORRECTION
DATA SET
Selects the type of message for WAAS
correction. Use “02 (default setting)” until the
system becomes operational.
00 to 27, 99
7.7.3 TD display setup
The TD SETUP menu sets which Loran C or Decca chain to use to display TD position.
(Connection of a Loran C or Decca navigator is not necessary to display TD position.)
1. Press the MENU key.
2. Press the E: SYSTEM CONFIGURATION, B: NAV OPTION and C: TD SETUP soft
keys to display the TD SETUP menu.
TD
LORAN-C
SETUP
GRI
9940 11-27
U.S. WEST COAST
+000.0 µs
A
EDIT
CORRECTION 1
CORRECTION 2
+000.0 µs
DECCA
01 R-G
CHAIN
S BALTIC
+00.00 lane
+00.00 lane
CORRECTION 1
CORRECTION 2
E
RETURN
TD setup menu
7-28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7. CUSTOMIZING YOUR UNIT
Displaying Loran C TDs
1. Select GRI, then press the A: EDIT soft key to show the GRI & station pair window.
GRI & STATION PAIR
▲
9940
11-27
▲
U.S. WEST COAST
Loran GRI & station pair window
2. Adjust the Trackball upward or downward to select GRI code.
3. Roll the Trackball rightward to show the display below, to enable selection of station
pair.
GRI & STATION PAIR
▲
11-27
9940
▲
U.S. WEST COAST
Loran C GRI & station pair window
4. Adjust the Trackball vertically to select station pair.
5. Press the C: ENTER soft key to register your selection.
6. If necessary, you may enter a position offset to refine Loran C position accuracy. Select
(GRI) CORRECTION 1 or CORRECTION 2, then press the A: EDIT soft key. Enter
correction value with the Trackball and alphanumeric keys. Use the A: + < − −> - soft key
to switch from plus to minus and vice versa. Press the C: ENTER soft key or push the
ENTER knob.
7. Press the E: RETURN soft key twice.
8. Press the A: GENERAL SETUP soft key followed by the D: NEXT PAGE soft key.
9. Select “LORAN C” from “TD DISPLAY” and “TD” from “POSITION DISPLAY.”
10. Press the MENU key twice to close the menu.
Displaying DECCA TDs
1. Select CHAIN, then press the A: EDIT soft key to show the chain & station pair window.
CHAIN STATION PAIR
▲
01
R-G
▲
S BALTIC
Decca chain and station pair window
7-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7. CUSTOMIZING YOUR UNIT
2. Adjust the Trackball upward or downward to select Decca chain number.
3. Roll the Trackball rightward to show the display below, to enable selection of station
pair.
CHAIN STATION PAIR
▲
01
R-G
▼
S BALTIC
Decca chain and station pair window
4. Adjust the Trackball upward or downward to select station pair (R: red, G: green and P:
purple).
5. Press the C: ENTER soft key to register your selection.
6. If necessary, you may enter position offset to refine Decca position. Select (CHAIN)
CORRECTION 1 or CORRECTION 2, then press the A: EDIT soft key. Enter correction
value with the Trackball and alphanumeric keys. Use the A: + < − −> - soft key to switch
from plus to minus and vice versa. Press the C: ENTER soft key or push the ENTER
knob.
7. Press the E: RETURN soft key twice.
8. Press the A: GENERAL SETUP soft key followed by the D: NEXT PAGE soft key.
9. Select “DECCA” from “TD DISPLAY” and “TD” from “POSITION DISPLAY.”
10. Press the MENU key twice to close the menu.
7.8 Nav Data Display Setup
The nav data display shows various navigation data, fed from a navigator, network
equipment, etc. You may select the data to display and where to display it as follows:
1. Press the MENU key to open the main menu.
2. Press the E: SYSTEM CONFIGURATION, C: SYSTEM SETUP, C: HOT PAGE & NAV
DISP SETUP and B: NAV DATA DISPLAY SETUP soft keys.
NAV
DATA
1
POSITION
A
EDIT
2
4
WPT POS
STW
3
5
SOG
COG
6
8
BEARING
DEPTH
7
9
RANGE
TEMP
E
RETURN
Nav data setup screen
7-30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7. CUSTOMIZING YOUR UNIT
3. Use the Trackball to select a location.
4. Press the A: EDIT soft key. The following display appears.
DISPLAY DATA
ꢁ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
POSITION
WPT POSITION
SOG
STW
COG
BEARING
RANGE
DEPTH
TEMPERATURE
LOG TRIP
TIME TO GO
ETA
DATE
TIME
WIND
Nav data setup window
5. Select the data to display, then press the C: ENTER soft key or ENTER knob to register
your selection.
6. Press the E: RETURN soft key followed by the MENU key to close the menu.
7.9 Sounder Setup
This section shows you how to customize your network sounder to your liking. You can set
fish alarm sensitivity, fine tune sensors, etc.
7.9.1 System setup
1. Show the sounder display, then press the MENU key.
2. Press the B: SOUNDER SYSTEM SETUP soft key.
SYSTEM
SETUP 2
SYSTEM
SETUP 1
STC - HF
00
FISH ALARM LEVEL
TRANSMISSION
TVG - HF
MEDIUM
ON
STC - LF
00
FREQ. ADJ. - HF
FREQ. ADJ. - LF
TARGET ECHO
+00.0%
+00.0%
NORMAL
3
A
B
EDIT
A
B
EDIT
TVG - LF
3
ECHO OFFSET - HF
ECHO OFFSET - LF
BOTTOM LEVEL - HF
BOTTOM LEVEL - LF
KP PULSE
+00
SENSOR
SETUP
SENSOR
SETUP
+00
+000
+000
INTERNAL
SM3
ON
NEXT
PAGE
D
SMOOTHING
TLL OUTPUT
PREV.
PAGE
E
E
RETURN
Page 1
Page 2 (when connected ETR-30N only)
Sounder system setup menu
7-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7. CUSTOMIZING YOUR UNIT
Sounder system setup menu description
Item
Description
Settings
Fish Alarm
Level
Sets the fish alarm sensitivity; that is,
the minimum echo strength which will
trigger the fish alarms.
High: Orange and stronger echoes
trigger the alarm.*
Medium: Yellow and stronger echoes
trigger the alarm.*
Low: Green and stronger echoes
trigger the alarm.*
* = 8-color display
On, Off
Transmission Turns TX power on/off.
TVG
TVG (Time Varied Gain) compensates 0-9
(HF,LF)
for propagation attenuation of the
ultrasonic waves. It does this by
equalizing echo presentation so that
fish schools of the same size appear in
the same density in both shallow and
deep waters. In addition, it reduces
surface noise. Note that if the TVG
level is set too high short range
echoes may not be displayed.
Echo Offset
(HF, LF)
If the on-screen echo level appears to -50 - +50
be too weak or too strong and the
level cannot be adjusted satisfactorily
with the gain control, adjust echo
offset to compensate for too weak or
too strong echoes.
Bottom Level
(HF, LF)
If the depth indication is unstable in
automatic operation or the bottom
echo cannot be displayed in
-100 - +100
reddish-brown by adjusting the gain
control in manual operation, you may
adjust the bottom echo level detection
circuit, for both HF and LF, to stabilize
the indication. Note that if the level is
set too low weak echoes may be
missed and if set too high the depth
indication will not be displayed.
KP Pulse
Internal, External (See installation
manual.)
Selects source of keying pulse.
Smoothing
Smoothes echoes to present stable
display. The higher the setting the
greater the smoothing.
SM1-SM4, OFF
TLL Output
Outputs current position to plotter
where it is marked with TLL mark. Use
soft key to output TLL.
ON, OFF
(Con’t on next page)
7-32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7. CUSTOMIZING YOUR UNIT
Sounder system setup menu description (con’t from previous page)
Item
Description
Settings
STC (HF, LF) Adjusts STC level for the high and low 0-10
frequencies, and is useful for
suppressing surface noise. The
only)
(For ETR-30N
setting range is 0-10; the higher the
setting the greater the extent of
suppression. Setting 10 suppresses
noise up to several meters. Turn off
the STC when there is no noise on the
screen, otherwise weak echoes may
be missed.
FREQ. ADJ.
(HF, LF) (For
ETR-30N
only)
Interference from other acoustic
equipment operating nearby or other
electronic equipment on your boat
may show itself on the display. You
may suppress these type of
-10 - +10 %
interference by adjusting frequency.
TARGET
ECHO
Sets fishing objective.
Normal, Surface
Normal for general fishing, Surface for
(For ETR-30N detecting surface. Pulse repetition
only)
rate is higher than NORMAL on the
specified transducer.
B: SENSOR
SETUP
soft key
Offsets speed, depth and water
temperature indications and speed of
sound.
See next section for details.
(See next
page.)
7-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7. CUSTOMIZING YOUR UNIT
7.9.2 Sensor setup
The SENSOR SETUP menu lets you further refine speed, water temperature and depth
data fed from the network sounder.
1. Show the sounder display, then press the MENU key.
2. Press the B: SOUNDER SYSTEM SETUP and B: SENSOR SETUP soft keys to show
the SENSOR SETUP menu. The current ship’s speed, water temperature, depth and
speed of sound are shown at the bottom of the menu.
SENSOR
SPEED CALIBRATION
TEMP. CALIBRATION
+ 00%
+ 00
SETUP
°
F
A
EDIT
DEPTH CALIBRATION
ACSTC SPD CALIBRATION
+ 00ft
+ 000m/s
SPEED
TEMP
78.8
ACSTC SPD
°F
12.3kt
DEPTH
E
RETURN
1500m/s
125.0ft
Sensor setup menu
3. Select item to adjust, then press the A: EDIT soft key.
4. Adjust the Trackball upward or downward to set appropriate value.
Speed and temperature calibrations: Enter plus or minus value. For example, if the
water temperature readout is 77°F but the actual water temperature is 75°F, enter
–2(°F).
Depth calibration: If you desire the depth readout to show the distance between ship’s
draft and bottom (rather than transducer and bottom), set ship’s draft here. Enter a plus
or minus value.
Acoustic speed calibration: Sets the speed of sound used by the network sounder.
Normally no adjustment is required, however if echoes are returning too slow or too fast
adjust the value as appropriate. This is only used if water salinity is at an extreme level.
Under normal circumstances, do not adjust.
Sensor setup menu settings
Item
Setting range (for default)
-50 -+50%
Default Setting
0 (no offset)
Speed Calibration
Temperature Calibration
Depth Calibration
-20°F – +20°F
0 (no offset)
0 (no offset)
0 (no offset)
-15 - +90 ft
Acoustic Speed Calibration -500 - +500 m/s
5. Press the E: RETURN soft key followed by the MENU key.
7-34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7. CUSTOMIZING YOUR UNIT
7.9.3 Sounding range, zoom range, bottom lock range
This paragraph shows you how to set custom ranges for basic range, zoom range (marker
and bottom zoom) and bottom lock range. All default basic ranges are restored whenever
the unit of depth measurement is changed. Therefore, change the depth unit before
changing the basic ranges.
1. Show the sounder display, then press the MENU key to open the main menu.
2. Press the C: SOUNDER RANGE SETUP soft key to show the SOUNDER RANGE
SETUP menu.
RANGE
SETUP
RANGE 1
15 ft
30 ft
RANGE 2
A
EDIT
RANGE 3
60 ft
RANGE 4
120 ft
200 ft
RANGE 5
RANGE
6
400
ft
RANGE 7
1000 ft
4000 ft
30 ft
RANGE 8*
ZOOM RANGE
BOTTOM LOCK RANGE
20 ft
E
RETURN
Sounder range setup menu
3. Select the range to change, then press the A: EDIT soft key.
4. Rotate the Trackball or ENTER knob to set range desired, then press the E: RETURN
soft key. For basic range, set depth from lowest to highest; a range cannot be higher
than its succeeding neighbor.
5. Press the MENU key to finish.
Default basic ranges
Range
1
Range
2
Range
3
Range
4
Range
5
Range
6
Range
7
Range 8
ETR-6/10N
1200 m
ETR-30N
1500 m
4500 ft
5 m
10 m
30 ft
5 fa
20 m
60 ft
10 fa
40 m
120 ft
20 fa
80 m
200 ft
40 fa
150 m
400 ft
80 fa
300 m
15 ft
3 fa
1000 ft 4000 ft
150 fa 650 fa
900 fa
3 P/B
5 P/B
10 P/B 30 P/B 50 P/B
100 P/B 200 P/B 700 P/B
900 P/B
Setting range (ETR-6/10N): 2 m –1200 m, 7 ft – 4000 ft, 2 fa – 650 fa, 1 P/B – 1000 P/B
Zoom range and bottom-lock ranges
Item
Settings
Default Setting
Zoom Range
2 m – 120 m, 7 ft – 400 ft,
1 fa – 60 fa, 1 P/B – 70 P/B
10 m, 30 ft, 10 fa, 10 P/B
Bottom-lock
Range
3 or 6 m, 10 or 20 ft, 2 or 3
fa, 2 or 3 P/B
6 m, 20 ft, 3 fa, 3 P/B
7-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7. CUSTOMIZING YOUR UNIT
7.9.4 Function key setup
The function keys provide one-touch execution of a desired function. The default sounder
function key settings are as shown in the table below.
Function Key
Default Function
Output current position.
Suppress clutter.
Function Key Label
1
2
3
4
5
TLL
CLT
SLV
NL
Erase weak signal.
Suppress noise.
Set picture advancement speed. PA
If the above settings are not to your liking you may change them as follows:
1. Show the sounder display.
2. Press the MENU key.
3. Press the D: FUNCTION KEY SETUP soft key.
FUNC
KEY
Function key
SOFT KEY 1
T
L
L
KEY
setting
Function
key label
TLL: TLL OUTPUT
A
EDIT
SOFTKEY 2
CLT: CLUTTER
C
L
T
SOFT KEY 3
SLV: SIGNAL LEVEL
S
L
V
SOFT KEY 4
NL: NOISE LIMITER
N
L
SOFT KEY 5
PA: PICTURE ADV
P
A
E
RETURN
Sounder function key menu
4. Select the function key you want to program, then press the A: EDIT soft key.
SOFT KEY 1
SOFT KEY 1
SOFT KEY 1
OFF
PA: PICTURE ADV
TG: TEMP. GRAPH
TVH: TVG - HF
SSR: SNDR SOURCE
DBX: D. BOX ON/OFF
CHG: CHANGE CNTRL
SAV: SAVE SCREEN
QP: QUICK POINT
MOD: AUTO MODE
GHF: GAIN - HF
GLF: GAIN - LF
SFT: SHIFT
NL: NOISE LIMITER
CLT: CLUTTER
WMK: WHITE MARKER
HUE: HUE
SLV: SIGNAL LEVEL
Scroll
down
Scroll
down
TVL: TVG - LF
EOH: OFFSET - HF
EOL: OFFSET - LF
SMT: SMOOTHING
ZMR: ZOOM RANGE
BLR: B/L RANGE
TLL: TLL OUTPUT
MRK: MARK ENTRY
Sounder function key options
5. Select function desired with the Trackball, then press the C: ENTER soft key or ENTER
knob to register your selection.
6. Press the MENU key to close the menu.
7-36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7. CUSTOMIZING YOUR UNIT
Sounder function keys
Function
Function Key
Label
Menu Item
OFF
Assigns no function.
Display automatic mode selection window.
Displays high frequency gain adjustment window. GHF
MOD: AUTO MODE
GHF: GAIN – HF
GLF: GAIN – LF
SFT: SHIFT
MOD
Displays low frequency gain adjustment window.
Shifts range in manual operation.
Suppresses noise.
GLF
SFT
NL
NL: NOISE LIMITER
CLT: CLUTTER
WMK: WHITE MARKER
HUE: HUE
Suppresses clutter.
CLT
WMK
HUE
SLV
PA
Sets white marker.
Sets hue.
SLV: SIGNAL LEVEL
PA: PICTURE ADV
TG: TEMP. GRAPH
TVH: TVG – HF
Erases weak signals.
Sets picture advance speed.
Turns temperature graph on/off.
Sets TVG for high frequency
Sets TVG for low frequency.
Offsets echo strength for high frequency.
Offsets echo strength for low frequency.
Sets echo smoothing rate.
Sets zoom range.
TG
TVH
TVL
EOH
EOL
SMT
ZMR
BLR
TVL: TVG – LF
EOH: OFFSET – HF
EOL: OFFSET -LF
SMT: SMOOTHING
ZMR: ZOOM RANGE
BLR: B/L RANGE
Sets bottom lock range for bottom-lock display.
Outputs current position to plotter. Also inscribes
line on sounder and registers position as a
waypoint on plotter.
TLL: TLL OUTPUT
TLL
SSR: SNDR SOURCE
DBX: D. BOX ON/OFF
CHG: CHANGE CNTRL
SAV: SAVE SCREEN
QP: QUICK POINT
Selects source for sounder data.
Turns data boxes on/off.
SSR
DBX
CHG
SAV
QP
Switches control in combination display.
Saves sounder picture to SD card.
Sets quick point (for navigation).
Enters the mark at the own ship position.
MRK: MARK ENTRY
MRK
Note: To use CHANGE CNTRL, set it on all displays, with the same soft key number.
7-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7. CUSTOMIZING YOUR UNIT
7.10 Nav Graphic Display Setup
The nav graphic display (see paragraph 3.1.2) shows either the compass display or the
wind angle display, together with depth and temperature graphs. You may choose which to
display and setup the depth and temperature graphs as follows:
1. Press the MENU key to open the menu.
2. Press the E: SYSTEM CONFIGURATION, C: SYSTEM SETUP, C: HOT PAGE & NAV
DISP SETUP and C: NAV GRAPHIC DISPLAY SETUP soft keys.
NAV
GRAPHIC
GRAPHIC METER
COMPASS
1S/DOT
DEPTH GRAPH UP~DATE
TEMP GRAPH UP-DATE
EDIT
1S/DOT
RETURN
NAV GRAPHIC menu
3. Choose GRAPHIC METER and press the EDIT key.
GRAPHIC METER
▲
ꢁ
COMPASS
WIND ANGLE
ꢀ
▲
Graphic meter window
4. Choose COMPASS or WIND ANGLE as appropriate and press the C: ENTER soft key.
5. Choose DEPTH GRAPH UP-DATE and press the A: EDIT soft key.
DEPTH GRAPH UP-DATE
▲
ꢁ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
▲
0.5s./dot
1s/dot
2s/dot
4s/dot
Depth graph up-date window
6. Choose desired update period/number of dots and press the C: ENTER soft key.
7. Set TEMP GRAPH UP-DATE similarly.
8. Press the MENU key to close the menu.
7-38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8. MAINTENANCE,
TROUBLESHOOTING
This chapter provides information necessary for keeping your unit in good working order
and remedying simple problems.
WARNING
Do not open the equipment.
Hazardous voltage which can
cause electrical shock exists
inside the equipment. Only
qualified personnel should
work inside the equipment.
8.1 Preventive Maintenance
Regular maintenance is important for optimum performance. A maintenance program
should be established and should at least include the items shown in the table below.
Maintenance program
Item
Check point
Remedy
Connectors of
processor unit and
control unit
Check for tight connection.
Tighten loosened connectors.
Ground terminal
Check for tight connection and Clean or replace ground wire as
corrosion. necessary.
8-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8. MAINTENANCE, TROUBLESHOOTING
8.2 Replacement of Batteries
Battery on circuit board
A lithium battery (Type CR2450-F2 ST2L, Code No. 000-144-941) fitted on a circuit board
inside the processor unit preserves data when the equipment is turned off, and its life is
about three years. When its voltage is low the battery icon ( ) appears at the top of the
display. When the icon appears, contact your dealer to request replacement of the battery.
WARNING
Ensure battery polarity is correct.
Wrong polarity may cause the batteries to
explode.
8.3 Replacement of Fuse
The fuse on the power cable protects the equipment from reverse polarity of the ship’s
mains and equipment fault. If the fuse blows, find out the cause before replacing it. Use the
correct fuse. Using the wrong fuse will damage the equipment and void the warranty.
1824C-BB, 1834C-BB: 7A for 12V device, 3A for 24V device
1934C-BB , 1944C-BB: 15A for 12V device, 7A for 24V device
1954C-BB, 1964C-BB, GD-1920C-BB: 3A for 12/24 V device
1954C-BB/1964C-BB’s Power Supply Unit PSU-005: 15A for 12V device, 7A for 24V device
WARNING
Use the proper fuse.
Use of a wrong fuse can result in damage
to the equipment or cause fire.
8-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8. MAINTENANCE, TROUBLESHOOTING
8.4 Replacing the Magnetron
When the magnetron has expired, distant targets cannot be seen on the display. When you
feel that long range performance has decreased, contact a FURUNO agent or dealer about
replacement of the magnetron.
Radar model and magnetron used
Model
Magnetron Type
Code No.
000-146-866
000-146-867
MODEL 1824C-BB
E3588
E3571
MODEL 1834C-BB
MODEL 1934C-BB
MG4004
MAF1421B
000-158-895
000-158-786-10
000-146-871
MAF1422B
MODEL 1944C-BB
000-158-788-10
000-158-896
MG4006
MAF1425B
M1458F
MODEL 1954C-BB
MODEL 1964C-BB
000-158-790-10
000-158-780-10
8.5 Replacing the Synchro Belt (1824C-BB only)
When the synchro belt of MODEL1824C-BB has worn out, the sweep is not synchronized
with antenna rotation, which results in an abnormal picture.
When you suspect that the synchro belt has worn out, contact a FURUNO agent or dealer
about replacement. (Type: 40 S2M 266UG, Code No.: 000-808-743)
8.6 Trackball Maintenance
If the cursor skips or moves abnormally, you may need to clean the Trackball.
1. Turn the retainer ring counterclockwise 45° to unlock it.
2. Remove the retainer ring
and ball.
SAVE
MOB
HIDE
SHOW
CLEAR
ALARM
GAIN
A
B
C
D
E
ABC
1
DEF
2
GHI
3
3. Clean the ball with a soft
lint-free cloth, and then
blow carefully into the
ball-cage to dislodge
dust and lint.
RANGE
DISP
MENU
JKL
4
MNO
5
PQR
6
Retainer Ring
STU
7
VWX
8
YZ&
9
POWER
TX
_'#
0
EBL
VRM
PUSH TO ENTER
4. Look for a build-up of dirt on the metal rollers. If dirty, clean the rollers using a cotton
swab moistened lightly with isopropyl-rubbing alcohol.
5. Make sure that fluff from the swab is not left on the rollers.
6. Replace the ball and retainer ring. Be sure the retainer ring is not inserted reversely.
Note: Trackball maintenance parts are available as below.
Part
Type
Code No.
Retainer ring and ball
MU3721
000-144-645
8-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8. MAINTENANCE, TROUBLESHOOTING
8.7 Simple Troubleshooting
This section provides simple troubleshooting procedures which the user can
follow to restore normal operation. If you cannot restore normal operation do not
attempt to check inside the unit. Any trouble should be referred to a qualified
technician.
8.7.1 General
General troubleshooting
If…
you cannot turn on the
power
Then…
• check for blown fuse.
• check that the power connector is firmly fastened.
• check for corrosion on the power cable connector.
• check for damaged power cable.
• check battery for proper voltage output (10.8 to 31.2 V).
there is no response
when a key is pressed
• turn off and on the power. If there still is no response the key may
be faulty. Request service.
8.7.2 Radar
GD-1920C-BB requires a network radar.
Radar troubleshooting
If…
But…
Then…
you pressed the POWER/TX nothing appears on the
• check that the antenna cable is
firmly fastened.
• check if radar source is correct.
key and the C: RADAR TX
soft key to show the radar
picture
display
marks, legends appear
no echo appears
—
• check that the antenna cable
is firmly fastened.
the picture is not updated or
it freezes
• check antenna cable.
• for freeze up, turn the
processor unit on and off
again.
tuning is adjusted
sensitivity is poor
• magnetron may need to be
replaced. Contact your dealer.
• try to hit the [+] and [-] keys
again.
the range is changed
radar picture does not
change
• turn the processor unit on and
off again.
there is poor discrimination in —
range
• adjust A/C SEA.
the true motion presentation
is not working properly
—
• reselect true motion mode.
• check if heading and speed are
input.
the range rings are not
displayed
—
• hit the B: RADAR DISPLY and
C: RINGS soft keys to display
them.
8-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8. MAINTENANCE, TROUBLESHOOTING
8.7.3 Plotter
Requires GPS Receiver GP-310B/GP-320B.
Plotter troubleshooting
If…
Then…
• check that antenna connector is firmly fastened.
• check number of satellites received, on the GPS status display. (See
position is not fixed
within three minutes
page 8-12.) There should be three or more.
• check that the correct geodetic chart system is selected, on the GPS
position is wrong
SENSOR SETTINGS menu.
• enter position offset, on the GPS SENSOR SETTINGS menu.
• track is not being plotted. (“H” icon appears at the top of the display.)
Press the B: TRACK HALT soft key on the TRACKS & MARKS
CONTROL menu to start plotting again.
the track is not plotted
the bearing is wrong
• check that correct magnetic variation is entered, on the GENERAL
SETUP menu.
• check that LORAN C (or DECCA) is selected at TD DISPLAY on the
GENERAL SETUP menu. Also, check that proper Loran C (Decca)
chains codes are entered, on the TD SETUP menu.
Loran C (or Decca)
TDs do not appear
• enter TD offset, on the TD SETUP menu.
Loran C (or Decca)
TDs are wrong
• try to decrease speed/course smoothing, on the GPS SENSOR
the ship’s speed
indication is not zero
after the ship is
stopped
SETTINGS menu.
8-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8. MAINTENANCE, TROUBLESHOOTING
8.7.4 Sounder
Requires Network Sounder ETR-6/10N/30N.
Sounder troubleshooting
If…
But…
Then…
• check that the network
sounder’s signal cable is firmly
fastened.
you selected a sounder
display with the DISP key
picture does not appear
• Check that sounder source is
correct.
• check that the network sounder
is plugged in. The LED on the
network sounder should flash
every second.
• check for loosened transducer
marks and characters
appear
picture does not appear
connector.
• the picture is shifted. Confirm
the picture appears
zero line does not appear
—
shift setting.
• check gain setting, if using
picture sensitivity is too low
manual operation.
• marine life or air bubbles may
be clinging to transducer face.
• bottom may be too soft to return
a suitable echo.
• adjust gain and range to display
the bottom echo (in reddish
brown), if you are using the
manual sounder mode.
the depth indication is not
displayed
—
—
• check to be sure the transducer
noise or interference shows
on the display
cable is not near ship’s engine.
• check the ground.
• other video sounders of the
same frequency as yours may
be operating near you.
• check that sensor cable is tightly
the water temperature graph data is wrong
appears
fastened.
8-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8. MAINTENANCE, TROUBLESHOOTING
8.8 Diagnostics
This paragraph provides the procedures for testing the equipment for proper operation.
Four tests are provided: Memory I/O test, Keyboard test, Remote controller test, and Test
pattern.
8.8.1 Memory I/O test
The memory I/O test provides for individual testing of the processor unit, control unit, GPS
Receiver GP-310B/320B, Network Sounder ETR-6/10N, ETR-30N and ARP, displaying
program number and checking for proper operation.
1. Press the MENU key to show the menu.
2. Press the E: SYSTEM CONFIGURATION soft key.
3. Press the C: SYSTEM SETUP soft key.
4. Press the B: TEST & CLEAR soft key.
5. Press the A: MEMORY I/O TEST soft key.
MEMORY
I/O TST
A
B
C
D
PROCESSOR UNIT TEST
GPS SENSOR TEST*
NETWORK SOUNDER TEST**
ARP TEST***
E
RETURN
* = Requires GPS Receiver GP-310B/320B.
** = Requires Network Sounder ETR-6/10N or ETR-30N.
*** = Requires ARP-equipped Model
18x4-BB/19x4-BB series network radar.
MEMORY I/O TEST menu
7. Then, press appropriate soft key to start a diagnostic test.
8-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8. MAINTENANCE, TROUBLESHOOTING
Processor unit test
Press the A: PROCESSOR UNIT TEST soft key at the MEMORY I/O TEST menu to test
the processor unit. The equipment displays program version number and checks devices.
Results for device checks are shown as OK or NG (No Good). For any NG, request service.
A test connector is required to check ports. “ - - “ shown when no test connector is
connected. Chart number shown when chart is inserted. Press the E: RETURN soft key to
return the MEMORY I/O TEST menu.
* = For NAVIONICS model. 1950026 XX.XX for C-MAP model.
Program No. 1950025 XX.XX*
Program No. 1950025 XX.XX*
ROM1
: OK
: OK
: OK
: OK
: OK
ROM1
: OK
: OK
: OK
: OK
: OK
ROM2
SDRAM
SRAM
INT. BATTERY
PORT
ROM2
SDRAM
SRAM
INT. BATTERY
PORT
NMEA IN/OUT 1 : - -
NMEA IN/OUT 2 : - -
NMEA IN/OUT 1 : - -
NMEA IN/OUT 2 : - -
RS232
: OK
RS232
: OK
HEADING
NETWORK
FPGA No.
: 352.2
°
HEADING
NETWORK
CARD SLOT
FPGA No.
: 352.2
°
: - -
:
: - -
:
:
HEADING PULSE : OK
No results appear when
"sub" radar selected as
radar source.
BEARING PULSE : OK (XX.Xrpm)
TOTAL ON TIME : 000000.0 h
TOTAL TX TIME : 000000.0 h
Machine Status +130
Machine Status +130
XX.XX* = Program Version No.
XX.XX* = Program Version No.
GD-1920C-BB
Model 18x4C-BB/19x4C-BB Series
Processor unit test results
GPS sensor test (Requires GPS Receiver GP-310B/320B)
Press the B: GPS SENSOR TEST soft key at the MEMORY I/O TEST menu to test the
GPS Receiver GP-310B/320B. The equipment displays GPS receiver program version
number, and checks the GPS unit for proper operation, displaying OK or NG (No Good) as
the result. For NG, request service. Press the E: RETURN soft key to return the MEMORY
I/O TEST menu.
PROGRAM No. *48502180XX
GPS UNIT
: OK
Machine Status +115
*: This is for GPS-310B,
"48502380XX" appears for GPS-320B.
XX = Program Version No.
GPS receiver test results
8-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8. MAINTENANCE, TROUBLESHOOTING
Network sounder test (Requires Network Sounder ETR-6/10N, ETR-30N)
Press the C: NETWORK SOUNDER TEST soft key at the MEMORY I/O TEST menu to test
the Network Sounder ETR-6/10N or ETR-30N. The equipment displays network sounder
program version number, checks the ROM and RAM, and displays water temperature
(appropriate sensor required) and depth. The results of the ROM and RAM check are
shown as OK or NG (No Good). For any NG, request service. Press the E: RETURN soft
key to return to the MEMORY I/O TEST menu.
PROGRAM No. 02523060XX
ROM 1
RAM
: OK
: OK
TEMPERATURE: 65.61°F
DEPTH : 100ft
Machine Status +115
XX = Program Version No.
ETR-30N: 0252310XX.XX
Network sounder test results
ARP test (Requires ARP pcb in Model 18x4/19x4 series network radar)
The ARP test is mainly provided for the service technician. Press the D: ARP TEST soft key
at the MEMORY I/O TEST menu to test the ARP. The results of the ROM and RAM check
are shown as OK or NG (No Good). For any NG, request service. Press the E: RETURN
soft key to return the MEMORY I/O TEST menu.
PROGRAM No. 18590271XX
ARP ROM
ARP RAM
SPEED
: OK
: OK
: OK 12.3kt
COURSE
TRIGGER
VIDEO
: OK 359.9
: OK
: OK
°
BP
: OK
HP
: OK
MIN-HIT
SCAN-TIME
MAN-ACQ
AUTO ACQ
FE-DATA1
FE-DATA2
: 0003
: 0250
: 00
: 00
: 000
: 000
Machine Status +115
XX = Program Version No.
ARP test results
8-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8. MAINTENANCE, TROUBLESHOOTING
8.8.2 Test pattern
The test pattern test checks the display for proper display of colors.
1. Press the MENU key to show the menu.
2. Press the E: SYSTEM CONFIGURATION soft key.
3. Press the C: SYSTEM SETUP soft key.
4. Press the B: TEST & CLEAR soft key.
5. Press the C: TEST PATTERN soft key to show the test pattern.
6. Push the ENTER knob consecutively to show white, red, green, blue and black colors
individually.
7. Press the E: RETURN soft key.
8. Press the MENU key to close the menu.
BLACK
BLUE
GREEN
RED
E RETURN
WHITE
PUSH ENTER KNOB TO CHANGE PATTERN.
[ENTER] knob
WHT
[ENTER] knob
RED
[ENTER] knob
GRN
[ENTER] knob
BLU
[ENTER] knob
BLK
[ENTER] knob
Test pattern sequence
8-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8. MAINTENANCE, TROUBLESHOOTING
8.8.3 Keyboard test
The keyboard test checks the controls on the control unit for proper operation.
1. Press the MENU key to show the menu.
2. Press the E: SYSTEM CONFIGURATION soft key.
3. Press the C: SYSTEM SETUP soft key.
4. Press the B: TEST & CLEAR soft key.
5. Press the B: KEYBOARD & REMOTE TEST soft key.
PROGRAM No. 0359203-03.01
ROM
ROM
:OK
:OK
Screen for testing keyboard
6. Operate each control on the keyboard one by one. A key is functioning properly if its
on-screen location “fills” in black when the key is pressed. For the ENTER knob and
Trackball, rotate them to show their X-Y positions digitally, and push the ENTER knob
to confirm its function. Their ranges are –999 to +999.
7. Press the CLEAR key three times on the control unit to escape from the test.
8. Press the MENU key to close the menu.
8-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8. MAINTENANCE, TROUBLESHOOTING
8.9 GPS Status Display
The GPS status display provides data about the GPS satellites. It is available with
connection of the GPS Receiver GP-310B/320B or a GPS navigator outputting the data
sentence GSA or GSV.
1. Press the MENU key.
2. Press the E: SYSTEM CONFIGURATION, B: NAV OPTION and B: GPS SENSOR
SETTINGS soft keys to display the GPS SENSOR SETTINGS menu.
3. Press the B: GPS STATUS soft key.
DOP value
GPS position fix
DOP
ALT
1.2
GPS 3D
23:59:59
Date
and
SEP 20 2003
1 m
GPS antenna height
Time
SAT
SNR
40
No.
30
50
WAAS satellite
(GP-320B only)
N
23
12
29
27
01
17
Receive signal level
Bars show satellite
signal levels. Satellites
whose signal level
extends past 40 are
used to fix position.
21
W
12
26
23
20
30
29
W
E
28
26
05
05
01
20
21
30
28
27
17
E
RETURN
S
123
WAAS satellite
(in three digits, GP-320B only)
Estimated position of satellite in the sky.
Satellites used for fixing position are circled.
GPS status display
4. Press the E: RETURN soft key to quit the GPS status display.
8-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8. MAINTENANCE, TROUBLESHOOTING
8.10 Clearing Memories
Your equipment has a memory for each of the plotter, radar and sounder sections. These
memories can be cleared to restart operation with default settings.
The following data are not cleared:
Radar: Heading adjustment, timing adjustment, MBS level, tuning point, tuning indication
(short, medium, long), video level, dead sector, antenna height, STC curve, antenna type,
on time, tx time, Sounder: White marker, hue, signal level, TLL output, depth calibration,
range.
1. Press the MENU key to open the menu.
2. Press the E: SYSTEM CONFIGURATION soft key.
3. Press the C: SYSTEM SETUP soft key.
4. Press the B: TEST & CLEAR soft key.
5. Press the D: MEMORY CLEAR soft key.
MEMORY
PROCESSOR UNIT
GPS SENSOR
NO
NO
CLEAR
A
EDIT
NETWORK SOUNDER NO
E
RETURN
Memory clear menu
6. Use the Trackball to choose the memory to clear.
7. Press the A: EDIT soft key.
8. Use the Trackball to select YES, then press the C: ENTER soft key. One of the
following displays appears depending on the selection made at step 6.
BEGIN COLD START
TO CLEAR GPS
ALL SETTNGS EXCEPT
SNDR ARE RESET TO
SOUNDER WILL BE
SET TO DEFAULT.
MEMORY. ARE YOU SURE?
YES ... PUSH ENTER KNOB
NO ... PUSH CLEAR KEY
DEFAULT. ARE YOU SURE?
YES ... PUSH ENTER KNOB
NO ... PUSH CLEAR KEY
ARE YOU SURE?
YES ... PUSH ENTER KNOB
NO ... PUSH CLEAR KEY
Processor Unit Clear
GPS Receiver Clear
Network Sounder Clear
Windows for clearing memory
9. Push the ENTER knob to clear the memory selected.
10.Press the MENU key to close the menu.
11.Turn the power off and on again.
Note: The message “SYSTEM HAS FAILED START UP TEST. PLEASE CONTACT A
LOCAL FURUNO REPRESENTATIVE FOR REPAIR. PUSH ANY KEY TO CONTINUE.”
may appear when powering on the processor unit immediately after clearing any memory. It
is not an indication of malfunction. Press any key to continue operation.
8-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8. MAINTENANCE, TROUBLESHOOTING
8.11 Error Messages
In addition to alarm messages your equipment also displays error messages.
Error messages
Error Message
General
Meaning
Remedy
Control unit disconnected
• Check the cable between
the processor unit and
control unit.
Connection with the control
unit was cut
Network sounder disconnected. • Check that processor unit
where the sounder is
Connection with the ETR was
cut.
connected is turned on.
• Check network sounder’s
cabling.
Radar disconnected.
• Check that processor unit
where the radar is
Connection with the RADAR
was cut.
connected is turned on.
• Check antenna cable.
Have a qualified technician
replace the battery.
Voltage of battery on circuit
board in processor unit is low.
No bearing pulse from radar
antenna.
Low Voltage! Internal Battery
No bearing pulse detected.
No position data.
Check antenna cable.
GPS navigator is turned off or
no GPS position data.
There may be obstacles
around GPS antenna.
Disconnect GPS cable from
the processor unit, and then
contact your dealer.
Possible trouble with
GP-310B/320B.
No GPS fix!
No heading pulse detected.
HEADING DATA MISSING!
Check heading sensor.
Check heading cable.
No heading pulse
8-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
APPENDIX
Menu Overview
Radar
MENU Key
RADAR
DISPLAY
SETUP
EBL REFERENCE (TRUE, RELATIVE)
CURSOR POSITION (LAT/LON, TD, RNG&BRG-REL, RNG&BRG-TRUE, MGRS)
TUNING (AUTO, MAN)
TX SECTOR BLANKING (ON (FROM 000°, SECTOR 001°), OFF)
NOISE REJECTION (OFF, LOW, HIGH)
BACKGROUND COLOR (BLACK/GREEN, BLACK/RED, BLUE/WHITE,
DK BLUE/WHITE, WHITE/GREEN)
ECHO COLOR (YELLOW, GREEN, MULTI-COLOR)
2ND ECHO REJECTION (ON, OFF)
WATCHMAN TIME (5, 10, 20 minutes)
RANGE UNIT (nm, km, sm)
TRAIL MODE (TRUE, RELATIVE)
D. BOX soft key
(DATABOX SIZE SMALL/LARGE, POSITION, WAYPOINT, COG, SOG, STW,
BEARING, RANGE, TIME TO GO, ETA, TEMPERATURE, DEPTH, TRIP LOG,
DATE, TIME, WIND, HEADING)
Max. range
24 nm/sm, km = 1824C
36 nm/sm, km = 1834C
48 nm/sm, km = 1934C
64 nm/sm, km = 1944C
72 nm/sm, km = 1954C,
1964C
RADAR
RANGE
SETUP#
0.125/0.25/0.5/0.75/1/1.5/2/3/4/
6/8/12/16/24/36/48/64/72 (nm & sm)
0.25/0.5/0.75/1/1.5/2/3/4/6/8/12/16/24/36/48/64/72 (km)
# = Not used on GD-1920C.
ARP TARGET INFO (INTERNAL ARP, EXTERNAL ARP, OFF)
CANCEL ALL TARGETS (YES, NO)
ARP VECTOR MODE (RELATIVE, TRUE)
ARP VECTOR TIME (30 seconds; 1, 3, 6, 15, 30 minutes)
HISTORY INTERVAL (OFF, 30 seconds; 1, 3, 6 minutes)
CPA (OFF, 0.5, 1, 2, 3, 5, 6 nm)
ARP SETUP
(Requires ARP
circuit board in
network radar
18X4C/19X4C.)
TCPA (30 seconds; 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 12 minutes)
AUTO ACQUISITION AREA (ON, OFF)
TARGET ID NUMBER (ON, OFF)
FUNCTION
SOFT KEY 1 - SOFT KEY 5
KEY SETUP*
(OFF, HDG LINE OFF, MODE, GAIN, A/C SEA, A/C RAIN, FTC
(Model 17X4C series radar only), ECHO STRETCH, PULSE
LENGTH, ZOOM, OFFCENTER, ECHO TRAIL, RINGS ON/OFF,
TLL OUTPUT, GUARD ALARM, EBL, VRM, TTM ON/OFF, WPT
ON/OFF, WATCHMAN, ACQUISITION (ARP-equipped Model
18X4C/19X4C series network radar only), STBY/TX, RADAR
SOURCE, D. BOX ON/OFF, CHANGE CNTRL, QUICK POINT,
MARK ENTRY)
1
* Default settings for function keys:
SOFT KEY 1, HDG LINE OFF; SOFT KEY 2, RINGS ON/OFF; SOFT KEY 3, ECHO TRAIL;
SOFT KEY 4, OFFCENTER, SOFT KEY 5, STBY/TX
AP-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
APPENDIX
1
SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION
KEY BEEP (ON, OFF)
GENERAL
SETUP
LANGUAGE (ENGLISH, OTHERS)
RANGE UNIT
(nm, kt; km, km/h; sm, mph; nm&yd, kt; nm&m, kt; km&m, km/h; sm&yd, mph)
Page 1
TEMPERATURE UNIT (°C, °F)
DEPTH UNIT (m, ft, fa, PB)
WIND UNIT (kt, km/h, MPH, m/s)
WIND DATA (APPARENT, TRUE)
SPEED AVERAGING (0-9999 seconds, 60 seconds)
LOCAL TIME OFFSET (-13:30 - +13:30, 0)
RESET TRIP LOG (YES, NO)
TIMEOUT DISPLAY SETTING (15, 30, 60 seconds, CONTINUE)
SAVE MOB KEY FUNCTION (SAVE SHIP POSITION & MOB,
MOB WITHOUT CONFIRMATION, QUICK POINT FUNCTION)
WALLPAPER (DEFAULT, USER)
LAT/LON DISPLAY
Page 2
(DD° MM. MM’
DD° MM. MMM’
DD° MM. MMMM’
DD° MM’ SS.S")
TD DISPLAY (LORAN C, DECCA)
SPEED (SOG, STW)
POSITION DISPLAY (LAT/LON, TD, MGRS)
TIME DISPLAY (12 HOURS, 24 HOURS)
RANGE & BEARING MODE
(GREAT CIRCLE, RHUMB LINE)
BEARING READOUT (TRUE, MAGNETIC)
MAGNETIC VARIATION (AUTO, MANUAL 07.0 °W)
NAV
NAV
POSITION SOURCE
OPTION
SOURCE
SETTINGS
(FURUNO BB GPS, GP, LC, ALL)
SPEED SOURCE (ETR, NMEA)
TEMPERATURE SOURCE (ETR, NMEA)
DEPTH SOURCE (ETR, NMEA)
STW CALIBRATION (-50 - +50 %, 0 %)
TEMP CALIBRATION (-40 - +40 °F, 0 °F)
DEPTH CALIBRATION (-15 - +90 ft, 0 ft)
WIND AVERAGING (1 - 600 seconds, 1 seconds)
WIND DIRECTION OFFSET (S(P)0 - 180 °, S0 °)
WIND SPEED CALIBRATION (-50 - +50 %, 0 %)
GPS
GEODETIC DATUM (WGS-84, OTHERS: See page A-10.)
POSITION SMOOTHING (0 - 999 seconds, 0 seconds)
SPD/CSE SMOOTHING (0 - 999 seconds, 5 seconds)
LATITUDE OFFSET (0.000 - 9.999’N(S), 0.000’N)
LONGITUDE OFFSET (0.000 - 9.999’W(E), 0.000’E)
DISABLE SATELLITE (Max. 3)
SENSOR
SETTINGS
LATITUDE (45°35.000’N)
LONGITUDE (125°00.000’W)
ANTENNA HEIGHT (0 - 999 m, 5 m)
GPS FIX MODE (2D, 2D/3D)
WAAS MODE (ON, OFF)
COLD START (YES, NO)
WAAS SEARCH (AUTO, MANUAL 134)
WAAS ALARM (ON, OFF)
GPS STATUS soft key
(Displays status of GPS satellites.)
CORRECTIONS DATA SET (02)
WAAS SETUP soft key
(Only when GPS-320B is connected.)
TD SETUP
LORAN-C GRI (9940: 11-27 (US west coast))
CORRECTION 1 (-999.9-+999.9 μs, 000.0 μs)
CORRECTION 2 (-999.9-+999.9 μs, 000.0 μs)
DECCA CHAIN (01: R-G (S Baltic))
2
CORRECTION 1 (-99.99-+99.99 lane, 00.00 lane)
CORRECTION 2 (-99.99-+99.99 lane, 00.00 lane)
AP-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
APPENDIX
2
PORT
SETUP
DATA 1:
GPS/NMEA
PORT
OUTPUT FORMAT
(NMEA 0183 Ver.1.5, 2.0)
LAT/LON FORMAT
(DD° MM. MM'
SYSTEM
SETUP
DD° MM. MMM'
DD° MM. MMMM')
XTE FORMAT (X.XX, X.XXX)
OUTPUT DESTINATION
(YES, NO)
SELECT SNTNC soft key*
PORT MNITR soft key*
OUTPUT FORMAT
CLEAR WINDOW
DATA 2:
NMEA PORT
(NMEA 0183 Ver.1.5, 2.0)
BAUD RATE
(AUTO, 4800 bps, 38400 bps)
LAT/LON FORMAT
(DD° MM. MM'
DD° MM. MMM'
DD° MM. MMMM')
XTE FORMAT (X.XX, X.XXX)
OUTPUT DESTINATION
(YES, NO)
SELECT SNTNC soft key*
PORT MNITR soft key*
CLEAR WINDOW
3
OUTPUT THROUGH NETWORK
4
(Select data sentences to output to NavNet
equipment. See * below. All sentences turned off in default setting.)
* = AAM, APB, BOD, BWR(BWC)#1, DPT(DBT)#2, GGA, GLL, GTD,
MTW, RMA, RMB, RMC, VHW, VTG, WPL, XTE, ZDA, HDT, HDG, MWV, ZTG, TTM
(except in case of OUTPUT THROUGH NETWORK)
#1= BWR for rhumb line, BWC for great circle
#2 = DBT for NMEA Ver. 1.5; DPT for NMEA Ver. 2.0
AP-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
APPENDIX
4
3
TEST &
CLEAR
MEMORY
I/O TEST
PROCESSOR UNIT TEST
GPS SENSOR TEST*
NETWORK SOUNDER TEST**
ARP TEST***
KEYBOARD TEST
TEST PATTERN
MEMORY
DISPLAY UNIT (YES, NO)
CLEAR
GPS SENSOR (YES, NO)*
NETWORK SOUNDER (YES, NO)**
HOT PAGE
& NAV DISP
SETUP
HOT PAGE SETUP (Configures HOT PAGE 1 to 6.)
NAV DATA DISPLAY SETUP (Configures nav data displays.)
NAV GRAPHIC DISPLAY SETUP
GRAPHIC METER (COMPASS, WIND ANGLE)
DEPTH GRAPH UP-DATE (0.5, 1, 2, 4 s/dot)
TEMP GRAPH UP-DATE (0.5, 1, 2, 4 s/dot)
RADAR (BUILT IN DATA 1, BUILT IN DATA 2, USER DATA, LIVE)
PLOTTER (SIMULATION, LIVE)
SIMULATION
SETUP
SOUNDER (BUILT IN DATA, ETR DATA, LIVE)
SPEED (0.0-99.9 kt, 0 kt)
COURSE (8 FIGURE, DIRECTION 0.0-359.9°, 000.0°)
LATITUDE (90°0.0’N-90°0.0’S, 45°35.000’N)
LONGITUDE (180°0.0’E-180°0.0’W, 125°00.000’W)
START DATE & TIME (hh: mm dd. mmm. yy, 00:00 01 NOV. 04)
GET RADAR SIMULATION DATA (YES, NO)
* = Requires GPS Receiver GP-310B/320B.
** = Requires Network Sounder ETR-6/10N, ETR-30N.
*** = Requires ARP-equipped Model 18X4/19X4 series network radar.
DATA
SAVE/
LOAD
DATA
SAVE DATA TO MEMORY CARD
(TRACKS, MARKS & LINES,
WAYPOINTS & ROUTES,
TRANSFER
SETTING DATA)
LOAD DATA FROM MEMORY CARD
(TRACKS, MARKS & LINES,
WAYPOINTS & ROUTES,
SETTING DATA, WALLPAPER)
RECEIVE DATA
VIA NETWORK
HOST NAME (NAVNET1, 2, 3, 4)
MARKS & LINES (ON, OFF)
WAYPOINTS & ROUTES (ON, OFF)
AP-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
APPENDIX
Plotter
MENU Key
CHART SETUP
CHART OFFSET (Offsets chart position.)
TRACKS
OWN SHIP TRACK DISP (ON, OFF)
& MARKS
CONTROL
OWN SHIP TRACK COLOR (RED, YELLOW, GREEN, LIGHT BLUE,
PURPLE, BLUE, WHITE)
TARGET TRACKS DISPLAY (ON, OFF, ARP ONLY, AIS ONLY, BOTH)
TARGET TRACK COLOR (RED, YELLOW, GREEN, LIGHT BLUE,
PURPLE, BLUE, WHITE)
INTERVAL (TIME, DISTANCE)
TIME INTERVAL (1 - 99m59s,10 seconds)
DISTANCE INTERVAL (0 - 99.99nm/km/sm, 0.1 nm)
MEMORY (TRACK & MARK) (0 - 8000 points, 2000 points)
TRACK soft key (RESUME, HALT)
ERASE T & M soft key
ERASE ALL TRACKS
ERASE TRACKS BY AREA
ERASE TRACKS BY COLOR
ERASE TARGET TRACKS
ERASE ALL MARKS/LINES
ERASE MARKS BY AREA
MARK SETUP soft key
MARKS/LINES COLOR (RED, YELLOW, GREEN, LIGHT BLUE,
PURPLE, BLUE, WHITE)
MARKS SHAPE (
LINES STYLE ( ,
)
✕
{
= Default setting
,
,
)
MARKS SIZE (LARGE, SMALL)
CHART
LAT/LON GRID (RED, YELLOW, GREEN, LIGHT BLUE, PURPLE,
BLUE, WHITE, OFF)
CONFIG
(FURUNO,
TEXT INFORMATION (ON, OFF)
NavChartsTM
)
WAYPOINTS (LARGE, SMALL, OFF)
WAYPOINT NAMES (ON, OFF)
Page 1
CHART BORDER LINES (ON, OFF)
LIGHT SECTOR INFO (ON, OFF)
OBJECT INFORMATION (OFF, ALL ON, POINTS ON)
CHART DISPLAY (DETAILED, SIMPLE)
NAVAIDS SYMBOL (INTERNATIONAL, US)
CAUTION & ROUTING DATA (ON, OFF)
MARINE FEATURES (ON, OFF)
Page 2
LAND FEATURES (ON, OFF)
CNTOUR LINE soft key
SPOT SOUNDINGS (ON, OFF)
SAFE CONTOUR SHADING (7, 16, 33, 66 ft)
DEPTH CONTOUR (ALL, 16, 33, 66 ft, OFF)
1
2
AP-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
APPENDIX
1
2
(Defaults are for CUSTOM mode.)
PERSPECTIVE (ON, OFF)
CHART
CONFIG
DE-CLUTTER (ON, OFF)
(C-MAP
CHART DISPLAY MODE (FULL, SIMPLE, FISHING, LOW, CUSTOM)
SAFETY STSTUS (ON, OFF)
chart)
(See page
7-16.)
WAYPOINT (PLOTTER/OVERLAY, PLOTTER, OFF)
WAYPOINT NAME (PLOTTER/OVERLAY, PLOTTER, OFF)
Page 1
NAMES
BUOYS NAME (PLOTTER/OVERLAY, PLOTTER, OFF)
NAV-AIDS US, US SIMPLE, INT, INT SIMPLE, PLOTTER/OVERLAY, PLOTTER, OFF
(PLOTTER/OVERLAY, PLOTTER, OFF)
(
)
LIGHT SECTORS (ON, FLASHING, PLOTTER/OVERLAY, PLOTTER, OFF)
ATTENTION AREAS (PLOTTER/OVERLAY, PLOTTER, OFF)
TIDES & CURRENTS (PLOTTER/OVERLAY, PLOTTER, OFF)
SEABED TYPE (PLOTTER/OVERLAY, PLOTTER, OFF)
PORTS & SERVICES (PLOTTER/OVERLAY, PLOTTER, OFF)
TRACKS & ROUTE (PLOTTER/OVERLAY, PLOTTER, OFF)
UNDERWATER OBJECTS (PLOTTER/OVERLAY, PLOTTER, OFF)
RIVERS & LAKES (PLOTTER/OVERLAY, PLOTTER, OFF)
LAND FEATURES (PLOTTER/OVERLAY, PLOTTER, OFF)
LANDMARKS (PLOTTER/OVERLAY, PLOTTER, OFF)
LAT/LON GRID (PLOTTER/OVERLAY, PLOTTER, OFF)
CHART BOUNDARIES (ON, AUTO, PLOTTER/OVERLAY, PLOTTER, OFF)
MIXING (ON, OFF)
Page 2
DEPTH CONFIG soft key
DEPTH SHADING CONFIRMATION
(AUTO, MANUAL, NONE)
DEPTH SHADING DISPLAY
(7, 18, 30, 60)
DEPTH LINES & SPOT SOUNDINGS
DISPLAY MODES
(PLOTTER/OVERLAY, PLOTTER,
OFF)
DEPTH LINES & SPOT SOUNDINGS
DISP (0-99999 m/ft/fa/pb, 0 ft, 1000 ft)
ROCKS BOTTOM TYPE DEPTH
DISPLAT
CHART LEVEL (LOCK, UNLOCK)
DEPTH INFO soft key (See left margin.)
(0-99999 m/ft/fa/pb, 0 ft, 30 ft)
PLOTTER
SETUP
WAYPOINT SWITCHING (PERPENDICULAR, ARRVL ALM CRCL, MANUAL)
COURSE VECTOR (VECTOR, LINE, OFF)
SET GO TO METHOD (1 POINT, 35 POINTS, 35PTS/PORT SVC)
QP (EXT WPT (RMB), INTERNAL)
SAFE ROUTE CHECK (ON, OFF)*
3
POPUP INFO (OFF, ALL ON, POINTS ON)*
QPT/MARK SOFT KEY (QUICK POINT, MARK ENTRY)*
D. BOX soft key (Same items as for D. BOX soft key on the RADAR
DISPLAY SETUP menu. See page A-1.)
*: C-MAP only.
AP-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
APPENDIX
3
WAYPOINTS/
ROUTES
WAYPOINTS LOCAL LIST
ALPHANUMERIC LIST
GO TO
NEW WPT
EDIT WPT
WAYPOINT BY CURSOR
ERASE WPT
NEW WPT
WAYPOINT BY RNG & BRG
NEW WPT
START POINT
GO TO
ROUTES
NEW ROUTE
EDIT ROUTE
ERASE ROUTE
LOG
RESTART
Destination is
required.
STOP/RELEASE
RVRSE/FORWARD
SPEED (Speed for ETA, 0-99 kt, GPS or manual input)
COORD TYPE
CREATE
VOYAGE-
BASED
NEW (BCKTRK TIME, BCKTRK DIST, MANUAL)
SELECT ROUTE
ROUTE
FUNCTION
SOFT KEY 1 - SOFT KEY 5
KEY SETUP*
(OFF, ADD NEW WPT, MOVE WPT, RULER, GO TO WPT, GO TO
ROUTE, EDIT MK/LINE, TRACK ON/OFF, TTM ON/OFF, DEL TGT TRK,
ALPHA LIST, LOCAL LIST, ROUTE LIST, D. BOX ON/OFF,
CHANGE CNTRL, QUICK POINT)
(Assigns function of each plotter function key.)
* Defaut settings for function keys:
SOFT KEY 1, TRACK ON/OFF; SOFT KEY 2, EDIT MK/LINE;
SOFT KEY 3, RULER; SOFT KEY 4, ADD NEW WPT;
SOFT KEY 5, ALPHA LIST
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION (Same items as on page A-2.)
AP-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
APPENDIX
Sounder
MENU Key
SOUNDER
MENU
NOISE LIMITER (OFF, LOW, MEDIUM, HIGH)
CLUTTER (0-16, AUTO)
WHITE MARKER (1-8 (8-color), 1-16 (16 color), OFF)
ZOOM MARKER (ON, OFF)
HUE (1-9, 1)
SIGNAL LEVEL (OFF, SL1-SL3, 8 color, monochrome, SL1-SL6, 16 color)
PICTURE ADVANCE (2/1, 1/1, 1/2, 1/4, 1/8, 1/16, STOP)
TEMPERATURE GRAPH (ON, OFF)
PRR LEVEL (0-20, SPD SENSING PRR, 20)
D. BOX soft key (Same items as on RADAR DISPLAY SETUP menu. See page A-1.)
SOUNDER
SYSTEM
SETUP
FISH ALARM LEVEL (HIGH, MEDIUM, LOW )
TRANSMISSION (OFF, ON)
TVG-HF (0 - 9, 3)
TVG-LF (0 - 9, 3)
ECHO OFFSET-HF (-50 - +50, 0)
ECHO OFFSET-LF (-50 - +50, 0)
BOTTOM LEVEL-HF (-100 - +100, 0)
BOTTOM LEVEL-LF (-100 - +100, 0)
KP PULSE (INTERNAL, EXTERNAL)
SMOOTHING (OFF, SM1, SM2, SM3, SM4)
TLL OUTPUT (ON, OFF)
SENSOR SETUP soft key
SPEED CALIBRATION (-50 - +50%, 0%)
TEMP CALIBRATION (-40°F - +40°F, 0°F)
DEPTH CALIBRATION ( -15 - +90 ft, 0 ft)
ACSTC SPD CALIBRATION (-500 - +500m/s, 0 m/s)
SOUNDER
RANGE
RANGE 1 - RANGE 8*
ZOOM RANGE (2-120 m, 10 m; 7-400 ft, 50 ft; 1-60 fa, 10 fa; 1-70 P/B, 10 P/B)
BOTTOM LOCK RANGE (3 m, 6 m; 10 ft, 20 ft; 2 fa, 3 fa; 2 P/B, 3 P/B)
SETUP
FUNCTION
SOFT KEY 1- SOFT KEY 5
KEY SETUP#
(OFF, AUTO MODE, GAIN HF, GAIN LF, SHIFT, NOISE LIMITER, CLUTTER,
WHITE MARKER, HUE, SIGNAL LEVEL, PICTURE ADV, TEMP. GRAPH, TVG HF,
TVG LF, OFFSET HF, OFFSET LF, SMOOTHING, ZOOM RANGE, B/L RANGE,
TLL OUTPUT, SNDR SOURCE, D. BOX ON/OFF, CHANGE CNTRL, SAVE
SCREEN, QUICK POINT)
(Assign function of echo sounder function key.)
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION (Same items as on page A-2.)
* = Default sounder ranges
Range 8
ETR-6/10N
Range 1 Range 2
Range 3
20 m
Range 4
40 m
Range 5
80 m
Range 6
150 m
400 ft
Range 7
300 m
ETR-30N
1500 m
4500 ft
900 fa
5 m
15 ft
3 fa
10 m
30 ft
5 fa
1200 m
60 ft
120 ft
20 fa
200 ft
40 fa
1000 ft
150 fa
4000 ft
650 fa
10 fa
80 fa
900 P/B
3 P/B
5 P/B
10 P/B
30 P/B
50 P/B
100 P/B
200 P/B 700 P/B
# Default settings for function keys:
SOFT KEY 1, TLL OUTPUT; SOFT KEY 2, CLUTTER; SOFT KEY 3, SIGNAL LEVEL;
SOFT KEY 4, NOISE LIMITER; SOFT KEY 5, PICTURE ADV
AP-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
APPENDIX
EXT VIDEO
MENU Key
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
(Same items as on page A-2.)
ALARM key
Radar Alarms
ALARM key
SET GUARD 1 (ERASE GUARD 1)
SET GUARD 2 (ERASE GUARD 2)
Plotter Alarms
AUDIO ALARM (INT & EXT BUZZ, INTERNAL BUZZ, OFF)
ARRIVAL ALARM (ON, OFF, default range: 0.010 nm(km/sm))
ANCHOR WATCH ALARM (ON, OFF, default range: 0.010 nm(km/sm))
PROXIMITY ALARM (ON, OFF)
ALARM key
XTE ALARM (ON, OFF, default range: 0.050 nm(km/sm))
SPEED ALARM (WITHIN, UNDER/OVER, OFF)
TRIP ALARM (ON, OFF)
BOTTOM ALARM (ON, OFF)
TEMPERATURE ALARM (WITHIN RANGE, OUT OF RANGE, OFF)
GROUNDING ALARM*
GROUNDING ALARM RANGE*
NEXT INFO soft key (Shows which alarms have been violated.)
CLEAR ALARM soft key (Acknowledges violated alarm.)
*: C-MAP only
Sounder Alarms
AUDIO ALARM (INT & EXT BUZZ, INTERNAL BUZZ, OFF)
BOTTOM ALARM (ON, OFF)
ALARM key
TEMPERATURE ALARM (WITHIN RANGE, OUT OF RANGE, OFF)
FISH ALARM (ON, OFF)
FISH ALARM (B/L) (ON, OFF)
NEXT INFO soft key (Shows which alarms have been violated.)
CLEAR ALARM soft key (Acknowledges violated alarm.)
AP-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
APPENDIX
Geodetic Chart List
001: WGS84
101: : CentralAmerica
002: WGS72
102: : Cuba
003: TOKYO : Mean Value (Japan, Korea, and Okinawa)
004: NORTHAMERICAN 1927 : Mean Value (CONUS)
005: EUROPEAN 1950 : Mean Value
006:AUSTRALIAN GEODETIC 1984 : Australia and Tasmania Island
007:ADINDAN : Mean Value (Ethiopia and Sudan)
008: : Ethiopia
103: : Greenland
104: : Mexico
105: NORTHAMERICAN 1983 : Alaska
106: : Canada
107: : CONUS
108: : Mexico, CentralAmerica
109: OBSERVATORIO 1966 : Corvo and Flores Islands (Azores)
110: OLD EGYPTIAN 1930 : Egypt
111: OLD HAWAIIAN : Mean Value
112: : Hawaii
009: : Mall
010: : Senegal
011: : Sudan
012:AFG : Somalia
013:AIN ELABD 1970 : Bahrain Island
014:ANNA1 ASTRO 1965 : Cocos Island
015:ARC 1950 : Mean Value
113: : Kaual
114: : Maui
115: : Oahu
016: : Botswana
116: OMAN : Oman
017: : Lesotho
117: ORDNANCE SURVEYOF GREAT BRITAIN 1936 : Mean Value
118: : England
018: : Malawi
019: : Swaziland
119: : England, Isle of Man, and Wales
120: : Scotland and Shetland Islands
121: : Wales
020: : Zaire
021: : Zambia
022: : Zimbabwe
122: PICO DE LAS NIVIES : Canary Islands
123: PITCAIRN ASTRO 1967 : Pitcairn Island
124: PROVISIONAL SOUTH CHILEAN 1963 : South Chile (near 53° s)
125: PROVISIONAL SOUTHAMERICAN 1956 : Mean Value
126: : Bolivia
023:ARC 1960 : Mean Value (Kenya, Tanzania)
024: : Kenya
025: : Tanzania
026:ASCENSION ISLAND 1958 : Ascension Island
027:ASTRO BEACON "E" : Iwo Jima Island
028:ASTRO B4 SOR.ATOLL :Tem Island
029:ASTRO POS 71/4 : St. Helena Island
030:ASTRONOMIC STATION 1952 : Marcus Island
031:AUSTRALIAN GEODETIC 1966 : Australia and Tasmania Island
032: BELLEVUE (IGN) : Efate and Erromango Islands
033: BERMUDA1957 : Bermuda Islands
034: BOGOTAOBSERVATORY : Colombia
035: CAMPO INCHAUSPE : Argentina
036: CANTON ISLAND 1966 : Phoenix Islands
037: CAPE : South Africa
127: : Chile Northern Chie (near 19° s)
128: : Chile Southern Chile (near 43° s)
129: : Colombia
130: : Ecuador
131: : Guyana
132: : Peru
133: : Venezuela
134: PUERTO RICO : Puerto Rico and Virgin Islands
135: QATAR NATIONAL : Qatar
136: QORNOQ : South Greenland
137: ROME 1940 : Sardinia Islands
138: SANTNABRAZ : Sao Maguel, Santa Maria Islands (Azores)
139: SANTO (DOS) : Espirito Santo Island
140: SAPPER HILL 1943 : East Falkland Island
141: SOUTHAMERICAN 1969 : Mean Value
142: : Argentina
038: CAPE CANAVERAL : Mean Value (Florida and Bahama Islands)
039: CARTHAGE : Tunisia
040: CHATHAM 1971 : Chatham Island (New Zealand)
041: CHUAASTRO : Paraguay
042: CORREGOALEGRE : Brazil
043: DJAKARTA(BATAVIA) : Sumatra Island (Indonesia)
044: DOS 1968 : Gizo Island (New Georgia Island)
045: EASTER ISLAND 1967 : Easter Island
046: EUROPEAN 1950 (Cont'd) : Western Europe
047: : Cyprus
143: : Bolivia
144: : Brazil
145: : Chile
146: : Colombia
147: : Ecuador
048: : Egypt
148: : Guyana
049: : England, Scotland, Channel, and Shetland Islands
050: : England,Ireland, Scotland, and Shetland Islands
051: : Greece
149: : Paraguay
150: : Peru
151: : Trinidad and Tobago
052: : Iran
152: : Venezuela
053: : ItalySardinia
153: SOUTHASIA: Singapore
154: SOUTHEAST BASE : Porto Santo and Medeira Islands
155: SOUTHWEST BASE : Faial, Graciosa, Pico, Sao Jorge, and Terceira Islands
156: TIMBALAI 1948 : Brunel and East Malaysia (Sarawak and Sadah)
157: TOKYO : Japan
054: : ItalySicily
055: : Norway and Finland
056: : Portugal and Spain
057: EUROPEAN 1979 : Mean Value
058: GANDAJIKABASE : Republic of Maldives
059: GEODETIC DATUM 1949 : New Zealand
060: GUAM 1963 : Guam Island
061: GUX 1ASTRO : Guadalcanal Island
062: HJORSEY1955 : Iceland
158: : Korea
159: : Okinawa
160: TRISTANASTRO 1968 : Tristan da Cunha
161: VITI LEVU 1916 : Viti Levu Island (Fiji Islands)
162: WAKE-ENIWETOK 1960 : Marshall Islands
163: ZANDERIJ : Suriname
063: HONG KONG 1963 : Hong Kong
064: INDIAN : Thailand and Vietnam
065: : Bangladesh, India, and Nepal
066: IRELAND 1956 : Ireland
067: ISTS 073ASTRO 1969 : Diego Garcia
068: JHONSTON ISLAND 1961 : Johnston Island
069: KANDAWALA: Sri Lanka
070: KERGUELEN ISLAND : Kerguelen Island
071: KERTAU 1948 : West Malaysia and Singapore
072: LAREUNION : Mascarene Island
073: L.C. 5 ASTRO : Cayman Brac Island
074: LIBERIA 1964 : Liberia
075: LUZON : Philippines (Excluding Mindanao Island)
076: : Mindanao Island
164: BUKIT RIMPAH : Bangka and Belitung Islands (Indonesia)
165: CAMPAREAASTRO : Camp McmurdoArea,Antarctica
166: G. SEGARA: Kalimantan Islands(Indonesia)
167: HERAT NORTH :Afghanistan
168: HU-TZU-SHAN : Taiwan
169: TANANARIVE OBSERVATORY1925 : Madagascar
170: YACARE : Uruguay
171: RT-90 : Sweden
172 : Pulkovo 1942 : Russia
077: MAHE 1971 : Mahe Island
078: MARCOASTRO : Salvage Islands
079: MASSAWA: Eritrea (Ethiopia)
080: MERCHICH : Morocco
081: MIDWAYASTRO 1961 : Midway Island
082: MINNA: Nigeria
083: NAHRWAN : Masirah Island(Oman)
084: : United Arab Emirates
085: : SaudiArabia
086: NAMIBIA: Namibia
087: MAPARIMA, BWI : Trinidad and Tobago
088: NORTHAMERICAN 1927 : Western United States
089: : Eastern United States
090: : Alaska
091: : Bahamas (Excluding San Salvador Island)
092: : Bahamas San Salvador Island
093: : Canada (Including Newfoundland Island)
094: : Alberta and British Columbia
095: : East Canada
096: : Manitoba and Ontario
097: : Northwest Territories and Saskatchewan
098: : Yukon
099: : Canal Zone
100: : Caribbean
AP-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
APPENDIX
Icons
Icon
Meaning
North marker. Points to North.
Correct chart and suitable scale - full chart reliability.
Chart overenlarged.
Plotter, radar, sounder alarm setting violated.
Track is not being recorded or plotted.
Chart offset applied.
Voyage-based route currently being created.
S A
V E
Latitude and longitude position offset applied.
Voltage of battery on circuit board in display unit is low. Contact your dealer about
replacement.
Simulation mode.
S
I
M
AP-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
APPENDIX
This page is intentionally left blank.
AP-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SPECIFICATIONS OF MARINE RADAR
MODEL 18x4C-BB/19x4C-BB SERIES
1
GENERAL
1.1 Range, Pulse length (PL) & Pulse Repetition Rate (PRR)
Range (nm)
0.125 to 1.5
1.5 to 3
Pulse length (µs)
PRR (Hz approx.)
0.08
0.3
2100
1200
600
3 to 72*
0.8
*Maximum Range: M1824C-BB: 24nm, M1834C-BB: 36nm, M1934C-BB: 48nm,
M1944C-BB: 64nm, M1954C-BB/1964C-BB: 72nm
1.2 Range Resolution
1.3 Bearing Resolution
M1824C-BB: 10 m, Others: 15 m
M1824C-BB: 5.5°, M1834C-BB: 4.0°, M1934C-BB: 2.4°,
M1944C-BB: 1.9°, M1954C-BB/1964C-BB:
1.9° (XN12A), 1.2° (XN13A)
1.4 Minimum Range
M1824C-BB: 27 m, Others: 42 m
±1°
1.5 Bearing Accuracy
1.6 Range Ring Accuracy
0.9% of range or 8 m, whichever is the greater
1.7 Range, Range Ring Interval (RI), Number of Rings
Range (nm) 0.125 0.25 0.5 0.75 1.5 2 3 4 6 8 12 16 24 36 48 64 72
0.0625 0.125 0.125 0.25 0.25 0.5 0.5 1 1 2 2 3 4 6 12 12 16 18
5 4 4 5 5 5 5 5 4 5 5 5
1
RI (nm)
Rings
2
2
5
4
5
4
Maximum range: M1824C-BB: 24nm, M1834C-BB: 36nm, M1934C-BB: 48nm, M1944C-BB: 64nm,
M1954C-BB/1964C-BB: 72nm
2
ANTENNA UNIT
2.1 MODEL1824C-BB:
2.1.1 Radiator
Micro-strip
2.1.2 Polarization
Horizontal
2.1.3 Antenna Rotation
2.1.4 Radiator Length
30/24 rpm nominal (for short/long range)
46 cm
2.1.5 Horizontal Beamwidth 5.2°
2.1.6 Vertical Beamwidth 25°
2.1.7 Sidelobe Attenuation -19 dB or less (within ±20º of main-lobe)
-21 dB or less (±20º of main-lobe or more)
2.2 MODEL1834C-BB:
2.2.1 Radiator
Printed waveguide array
Horizontal
2.2.2 Polarization
2.2.3 Antenna Rotation
24 rpm nominal
SP - 1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2.2.4 Radiator Length
2.2.5 Horizontal Beamwidth 3.9°
2.2.6 Vertical Beamwidth 20°
60 cm
2.2.7 Sidelobe Attenuation -18 dB or less (within ±20° of main-lobe)
-23 dB or less (±20° of main-lobe or more)
2.3 MODEL1934-BB:
2.3.1 Radiator
Slotted waveguide array
Horizontal
2.3.2 Polarization
2.3.3 Antenna Rotation
24 or 48 rpm nominal
2.3.4 Radiator Length
100 cm (XN10)
2.3.5 Horizontal Beamwidth 2.4°
2.3.6 Vertical Beamwidth 27°
2.3.7 Sidelobe Attenuation -20 dB or less (within ±20° of main-lobe)
-28 dB or less (±20° of main-lobe or more)
2.4 MODEL1944C-BB:
2.4.1 Radiator
Slotted waveguide array
Horizontal
2.4.2 Polarization
2.4.3 Antenna Rotation
2.4.4 Radiator Length
24 or 48 rpm nominal
120 cm (XN12)
2.4.5 Horizontal Beamwidth 1.9°
2.4.6 Vertical Beamwidth 22°
2.4.7 Sidelobe Attenuation -24 dB or less (within ±20° of main-lobe)
-30 dB or less (±20° of main-lobe or more)
2.5 MODEL1954C-BB/1964C-BB:
2.5.1 Radiator
Slotted waveguide array
Horizontal
2.5.2 Polarization
2.5.3 Antenna Rotation
2.5.4 Radiator Length
24 or 48 rpm nominal
120 cm (XN12), 180 cm (XN13, 24rpm only)
2.5.5 Horizontal Beamwidth 1.9° (XN12), 1.2° (XN13)
2.5.6 Vertical Beamwidth
2.5.7 Sidelobe Attenuation
XN12:
22°
-24 dB or less (within ±20° of main-lobe)
-30 dB or less (±20° of main-lobe or more)
-24 dB or less (within ±10° of main-lobe)
-30 dB or less (±10° of main-lobe or more)
XN13:
SP - 2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3
TRANSCEIVER MODULE
3.1 Frequency and Modulation 9410 MHz ±30MHz (X band), P0N
3.2 Peak Output Power
M1824C-BB: 2.2 kW nominal
M1834C-BB /1934C-BB: 4 kW nominal
M1944C-BB: 6 kW nominal
M1954C-BB: 12 kW nominal
M1964C-BB: 25 kW nominal
FET Switching Method
3.3 Modulator
3.4 Intermediate Frequency 60 MHz
3.5 Tuning
Automatic or manual
3.6 Receiver Front End
3.7 Bandwidth
MIC (Microwave IC)
Tx pulselength 0.08 µs and 0.3 µs: 25 MHz
Tx pulselength 0.8 µs: 3 MHz
Circulator with diode limiter
90 s approx.
3.8 Duplexer
3.9 Warming up
4
INTERFACE
4.1 Input Data
Own ship’s position:
IEC 61162-1 (NMEA 0183 Ver1.5/2.0)
GGA>RMC>RMA>GLL
RMC>RMA>VTG>VHW
HDT>HDG*1>HDM*1>VHW
HDM>HDG*1>HDT*1>VHW
RMC>RMA>VTG
Ship’s speed:
Bearing (True):
Bearing (Magnetic):
Course:
Water depth:
Wind:
DPT>DBT>DBS>DBK
MWV>VWT>VWR
Water Temperature:
MTW
Time:
ZDA
*1: calculated by magnetic deviation
4.2 Output Data
Alarm signal
12 VDC, 100 mA or less
NMEA 0183 Ver1.5
GGA, GLL, RMA, RMC, GTD, VTG, ZDA (GPS data required)
RMB, WPL, BWC or BWR, APB, AAM, BOD, XTE, VHW,
MTW, DPT or DBT, DBS (ETR required),
TLL (L/L, Heading data required), TTM (ARPA required)
SP - 3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5
PLOTTER FUNCTION
5.1 Projection
Mercator
5.2 Usable Area
5.3 Effective Area
5.4 Display pixels
5.5 Position Indication
85 latitude or below
211.2 x 158.4 mm
640 x 480 dots
Latitude/longitude, Loran C LOP or DECCA LOP
5.6 Effective Projection Area 0.125 nm to 1,024 nm (at equatorial area)
5.7 Track Display
Plot interval:by time (1 sec. to 99 min. 59 sec.) or
by distance (0 to 99.9 nm)
5.8 Colors
Red, yellow, green purple, light-blue, blue, white
Track/mark: 8000 points, Waypoint: 999 points
Simple route: 200 routes with 35 waypoints each
5.9 Memory Capacity
5.10 Storage Capacity
6
POWER SUPPLY
6.1 Rated Voltage/Current
M1824C-BB
12-24 VDC: 5.5-2.7 A
M1834C-BB
12-24 VDC: 5.3-2.6 A
M1934C-BB (24rpm)
M1934C-BB (48rpm)
M1944C-BB (24rpm)
M1944C-BB (48rpm)
M1954C-BB (24rpm)
M1954C-BB (48rpm)
M1964C-BB (24rpm)
M1964C-BB (48rpm)
6.2 Rectifier (option)
12-24 VDC: 5.6-2.7 A
12-24 VDC: 7.5-3.6 A
12-24 VDC: 6.3-3.1 A
12-24 VDC: 8.1-3.8 A
12-24 VDC: 8.6-4.3 A
12-24 VDC: 10.3-5.1 A
12-24 VDC: 10.1-5.0 A
12-24 VDC: 11.6-5.6 A
100-115/220-230 VAC, 1 phase, 50/60 Hz
7
ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITION
7.1 Ambient Temperature
Antenna Unit: -25°C to +70°C
Processor Unit and Control Unit: -15°C to +55°C
Power Supply Unit: -15°C to +55°C
93 % or less at +40°C
7.2 Relative Humidity
7.3 Waterproofing
Antenna Unit: IPX6
Control Unit: IPX5 (Front panel), IPX2 (Rear panel)
Processor Unit, Power Supply Unit: IPX0
7.4 Vibration IEC 60945-4th - 2 Hz-5Hz and up to 13.2 Hz with an excursion of ±1 mm ±10%
(7 m/s2 maximum acceleration at 13.2 Hz);
- above 13.2 Hz and up to 100 Hz with a constant maximum
acceleration of 7 m/s2.
SP - 4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8
COATING COLOR
8.1 Display Unit
8.2 Antenna Unit
N3.0
M1824C-BB/1834C-BB N9.5 (upper), 2.5PB3.5/10 (lower)
M1934C-BB/1944C-BB/
1954C-BB/1964C-BB
N9.5
SP - 5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SPECIFICATIONS OF VIDEO PLOTTER GD-1920C-BB
1
PLOTTER FUNCTION
1.1 Projection
1.2 Usable Area
1.3 Effective Area
1.4 Display pixels
1.5 Position Indication
Mercator
85 latitude or below
211.2 x 158.4 mm
640 x 480 dots
Latitude/longitude, Loran C LOP or DECCA LOP
1.6 Effective Projection Area 0.125 nm to 1,024 nm (at equatorial area)
1.7 Track Display
Plot interval:by time (1 sec. to 99 min. 59 sec.) or
by distance (0 to 99.9 nm)
1.8 Colors
Red, yellow, green purple, light-blue, blue, white
Track/mark: 8000 points, Waypoint: 999 points
Simple route: 200 routes with 35 waypoints each
1 point
1.9 Memory Capacity
1.10 Storage Capacity
1.11 MOB
1.12 Quick Routes
1.13 Electronic Chart
1 course with 35 waypoints max.
SD card - FURUNO or NAVIONICS Gold Chart card, or
C-MAP eNt+ chart card
1.14 Alarms
Arrival and Anchor watch, Cross track error and proximity
alarms, Ship’s speed in and out alarms, Water temperature,
Trip alarm, Fish alarm, Bottom alarm (ETR required), Grounding
alarm
2
POWER SUPPLY
2.1 Rated Voltage/Current 12-24 VDC: 2.1-1.1 A (3.1-1.6 A)
2.2.1 Rectifier (option) PR-62: 100/110/220/230 VAC, 1 phase, 50/60 Hz
3
ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITION
3.1 Ambient Temperature
3.2 Relative Humidity
3.3 Waterproofing
-15°C to +55°C
93% or less at +40°C
IPX5
3.4 Vibration IEC 60945-4th - 2 Hz-5Hz and up to 13.2 Hz with an excursion of ±1 mm ±10%
(7 m/s2 maximum acceleration at 13.2 Hz);
- above 13.2 Hz and up to 100 Hz with a constant maximum
acceleration of 7 m/s2.
4
COATING COLOR
4.1 Display Unit
N3.0
SP - 6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INDEX
Auto course-up mode ................................... 3-8
AUTO S.SPD soft key..................................2-14
AUTO/D. BOX soft key ................................. 4-7
Ｂ
Ａ
A/C RAIN......................................................2-4
A/C SEA .......................................................2-3
ACQ soft key...............................................2-27
AIS
activating..................................................5-4
displaying data..........................................5-4
lost target..................................................5-5
past position .............................................5-8
proximity alarm .........................................5-6
symbols....................................................5-3
turning on/off.............................................5-1
ALARM key
Battery replacement ..................................... 8-2
Bearing measurement by EBL.....................2-10
Bearing reference......................................... 7-4
Bottom alarm...............................................4-16
Bottom discrimination display........................ 4-5
Bottom echo................................................4-20
Bottom-lock display ...................................... 4-4
Bottom-zoom display.................................... 4-4
Brilliance ...................................................... 1-6
Ｃ
plotter......................................................3-47
radar .......................................................2-22
sounder...................................................4-15
Alarms
CHART DETAILS menu...............................7-14
CHART OFFSET soft key............................7-13
Charts
anchor watch...........................................3-49
arrival......................................................3-47
audio.......................................................3-47
bottom.....................................................4-16
CPA/TCPA...............................................2-32
fish..........................................................4-16
fish(B/L)...................................................4-17
guard.......................................................2-22
lost target ................................................2-33
messages................................................3-54
messages (plotter)...................................3-53
messages (sounder)................................4-18
proximity..................................................3-51
speed......................................................3-50
trip...........................................................3-51
water temperature ...................................4-17
XTE (cross track error) ............................3-50
Anchor watch alarm.................................3-49
Antenna height (GPS Receiver GP-310B)7-27
ARP
acquisition of targets................................2-27
activating.................................................2-27
ARP SETUP menu ..................................2-27
CPA/TCPA alarm .....................................2-32
data.........................................................2-31
deactivating.............................................2-27
lost target alarm.......................................2-33
past position display ................................2-31
test............................................................8-9
tracking termination.................................2-29
vector......................................................2-30
Arrival alarm ...............................................3-47
A-scope display ............................................4-5
Audio alarm ................................................3-47
C-MAP chart attributes.............................7-15
cursor and data display (C-MAP)..............3-14
data for aids to navigation ........................3-11
icon data (C-MAP) ...................................3-15
icons......................................................... 3-9
indices.....................................................3-10
inserting.................................................... 1-4
Navionics GOLD chart attributes ..............7-14
offsetting..................................................7-13
port service icons.....................................3-12
tide information (C-MAP)..........................3-16
CLEAR ALARM soft key ..............................4-18
Clutter rejector.............................................4-10
C-MAP charts
attributes..................................................7-15
cursor and data display ............................3-14
icon data..................................................3-15
tide information ........................................3-16
CNTRL PLOTTR soft key ............................1-10
CNTRL SNDR soft key ................................1-10
Cold start (GPS Receiver GP-310B)............7-27
Colors
radar display............................................. 7-6
radar echoes............................................. 7-6
sounder echoes .......................................4-14
Compass display .......................................... 3-3
Controls
display unit................................................ 1-1
remote controller....................................... 1-3
Course-up mode
plotter ....................................................... 3-8
radar......................................................... 2-7
CPA/TCPA alarm .........................................2-32
IN-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INDEX
Cursor
setup (plotter) ..........................................7-11
setup (radar)..............................................7-8
setup (sounder)........................................7-36
Fuse replacement..........................................8-2
Ｇ
display format............................................7-5
shifting .................................................... 1-12
CURSOR soft key....................................... 2-12
Ｄ
Data boxes
GAIN key
erasing.................................................... 1-14
hiding...................................................... 1-14
rearranging.............................................. 1-14
setup....................................................... 7-21
showing................................................... 1-14
Depth measurement .....................................4-9
Depth source ................................................7-4
Depth unit.....................................................7-3
Diagnostics
ARP test....................................................8-9
display unit test .........................................8-8
GPS sensor test ........................................8-8
keyboard test........................................... 8-11
network sounder test .................................8-9
test menu..................................................8-7
test pattern.............................................. 8-10
DISP key ......................................................1-9
Display modes..............................................1-8
Display unit test ............................................8-8
DISPLY MODE soft key.................................4-1
Downloading data .........................................6-5
Ｅ
radar..........................................................2-2
sounder .....................................................4-8
GENERAL SETUP menu...............................7-1
Geodetic datum (GPS Receiver GP-310B) ..7-25
Geodetic datum codes...................................8-1
GPS Receiver GP-310B setup.....................7-25
GPS sensor (GP-310B) test...........................8-8
GPS SETUP menu......................................7-25
GPS status display......................................8-12
Grounding alarm..........................................3-52
Guard alarm
cancelling ................................................2-23
setting......................................................2-22
Ｈ
Heading line................................................2-11
Head-up mode ..............................................2-7
Highway display ............................................3-6
HIWAY CNTRL soft key.................................3-6
HL OFF soft key ..........................................2-11
Hot page setup............................................7-22
Hue
radar, plotter ..............................................1-7
sounder ...................................................4-14
Ｉ
E. AVG soft key........................................... 2-20
E. STR soft key........................................... 2-19
EBL soft key................................................ 2-10
EBL/VRM key .................... 2-9, 2-10, 2-15, 2-16
Echo averaging........................................... 2-20
Echo offset (sounder).................................. 7-32
Echo stretch................................................ 2-19
Echo trails
I. REJ. soft key............................................2-12
Icons................................................................3
Interference rejection
radar........................................................2-11
sounder ...................................................4-10
Ｋ
color........................................................ 2-18
mode....................................................... 2-19
starting.................................................... 2-18
time......................................................... 2-17
EDIT XT-LMT soft key............................3-4, 3-6
Error messages .......................................... 8-14
ETA calculation........................................... 3-45
Ｆ
Keyboard test..............................................8-11
Keying pulse................................................7-32
Ｌ
Language......................................................7-2
Latitude, longitude display .............................7-4
Lines
entering ...................................................3-23
erasing ....................................................3-26
type .........................................................3-24
LOAD DATA menu.........................................6-4
Lost target alarm .........................................2-33
Ｍ
Fish alarm
sensitivity ................................................ 7-31
setting..................................................... 4-16
Fish alarm (B/L)
setting......................................................... 4-17
Fish school echo......................................... 4-21
Fix mode (GPS Receiver GP-310B)............ 7-27
Formatting memory cards .............................6-2
FREQ LF/HF soft key....................................4-2
Function keys
Magnetic variation .........................................7-4
Maintenance
battery replacement ...................................8-2
fuse replacement .......................................8-2
preventive..................................................8-1
Trackball .......................................................8-3
Marker-zoom display .....................................4-3
function execution
1-15
IN-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INDEX
Marks
color........................................................3-24
Port, port services
icons........................................................3-12
Position smoothing (GPS Receiver GP-310B)
7-26
POWER/BRILL key ............................... 1-5, 1-6
Presentation mode
entering...................................................3-23
erasing all................................................3-25
erasing individual.....................................3-25
shape......................................................3-24
Memory
plotter ....................................................... 3-8
radar......................................................... 2-6
Proximity alarm
plotter ......................................................3-51
Pulselength (radar)....................................... 2-5
Ｒ
clearing ...................................................8-13
testing .......................................................8-7
Memory cards
error messages .........................................6-3
formatting..................................................6-2
playing back..............................................6-4
saving data to............................................6-3
Memory I/O test ............................................8-7
Messages
Racon .........................................................2-36
RADAR SETTING menu............................... 7-4
RADAR TX/ST-BY soft key........................... 2-1
Range
memory cards ...........................................6-3
plotter alarms ..........................................3-53
sounder alarms........................................4-18
MOB mark ..................................................1-13
Multiple echoes (radar) ...............................2-34
Ｎ
measurement by cursor (radar)................. 2-8
measurement by range rings (radar) ......... 2-8
measurement by VRM (radar)................... 2-9
plotter ....................................................... 3-9
radar......................................................... 2-5
setup (radar) ............................................. 7-7
setup (sounder)........................................7-35
unit of measurement ................................. 7-2
RANGE key
plotter ....................................................... 3-9
radar......................................................... 2-5
sounder .................................................... 4-7
Remote controller
control description..................................... 1-3
testing......................................................8-11
RESET XTE soft key ............................. 3-4, 3-6
RINGS soft key............................................. 2-8
Routes
cancelling navigation of............................3-46
connecting ...............................................3-36
entering with cursor..................................3-34
entering with existing waypoints ...............3-33
erasing.....................................................3-39
following ..................................................3-43
inserting waypoint from plotter display......3-38
inserting waypoint from route list ..............3-37
removing waypoint from ...........................3-39
voyage based ..........................................3-34
Ｓ
Nav data display ...........................................3-7
NAV DATA menu.........................................7-30
Nav data window...........................................3-1
Nav graphic display
anemometer display ..................................3-5
compass display........................................3-3
NAV OPTION menu....................................7-23
Navigation
canceling route navigation.......................3-46
port, port services....................................3-41
quick point...............................................3-39
restarting.................................................3-44
routes......................................................3-43
switching waypoints in a route .................3-45
waypoints................................................3-41
Navigator setup.................................. 7-23, 7-25
NavNet
image source........................................... 1-11
receiving data from....................................6-9
Network sounder test ....................................8-9
NEXT INFO soft key........................... 3-53, 4-18
Noise limiter (sounder)................................4-10
Noise rejection (radar)................................. 2-11
North marker............................................... 2-11
North-up mode
SART ..........................................................2-35
Satellite disable (GPS Receiver GP-310B)...7-27
SAVE DATA menu ........................................ 6-2
SAVE/MOB key ...........................................1-13
Second-track echoes (radar) .......................2-24
Sensor setup...............................................7-32
SENSOR SETUP menu...............................7-34
SENSOR SETUP soft key ...........................7-32
Shadow sector ............................................2-35
Shift
plotter........................................................3-8
radar .........................................................2-7
Ｏ
Offset EBL..................................................2-15
OFFSET soft key ............................... 2-15, 2-16
Ｐ
Picture advance speed................................4-12
PLOTTER SETUP menu.............................7-10
IN-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INDEX
automatic (radar)..................................... 2-14
plotter ........................................................8-5
radar..........................................................8-4
sounder .....................................................8-6
True motion mode .........................................2-7
Tuning...........................................................2-2
TVG ............................................................7-32
Tx sector (radar)............................................7-5
Ｕ
manual (radar)......................................... 2-14
sounder.....................................................4-8
SHIFT soft key..................................... 2-14, 4-8
Sidelobe echoes ......................................... 2-34
Signal level erasure (sounder)..................... 4-11
SIM SETUP menu....................................... 1-16
Simulation display....................................... 1-16
Smoothing echoes (sounder) ...................... 7-32
Soft keys.......................................................1-2
Speed alarm ............................................... 3-50
Speed display ...............................................7-4
Speed/course smoothing (GPS Receiver
Uploading data..............................................6-5
Ｖ
Vector (ARP)...............................................2-30
Virtual image...............................................2-34
VRM (Variable Range Marker)
radar..........................................................2-9
sounder .....................................................4-9
VRM soft key.................................................2-9
GP-310B)
7-26
SPLIT soft key ..............................................4-6
System configuration .....................................viii
SYSTEM SETUP menu (sounder)............... 7-31
Ｔ
Ｗ
W. MAN soft key..........................................2-23
Watchman...................................................2-23
Water temperature alarm.............................4-17
Water temperature graph.............................4-19
Water temperature unit..................................7-4
Waypoint marker (radar)..............................2-25
Waypoints
TARGET INFO soft key............................... 2-31
TARGET soft key ........................................ 2-17
TD display ....................................................7-3
TD setup
Decca...................................................... 7-29
Loran C................................................... 7-29
TD SETUP menu........................................ 7-28
Test menu.....................................................8-7
Test pattern................................................. 8-10
Time measurement (sounder) .......................4-9
Time notation................................................7-4
TLL data output (radar) ............................... 2-21
TLL OUTPUT key ....................................... 2-21
Track
changing size...........................................3-31
color ........................................................3-27
editing from waypoint list..........................3-29
editing waypoint position..........................3-30
editing with cursor....................................3-30
entering at own ship position....................3-26
entering by range and bearing..................3-28
entering with cursor..................................3-26
erasing from the menu.............................3-31
erasing from waypoint list.........................3-31
erasing with cursor...................................3-30
loading from Yeoman .................................6-8
navigating to............................................3-41
searching.................................................3-32
shape ......................................................3-27
switching in route navigation ....................3-45
displaying other targets'.................. 2-33, 3-18
displaying own ship's............................... 3-18
erasing all own ship's .............................. 3-23
erasing all targets’................................. 3-23
erasing own ship's by area ...................... 3-22
erasing own ship's by color...................... 3-22
memory distribution setting...................... 3-21
plotting interval........................................ 3-20
plotting method........................................ 3-20
plotting of own ship's ............................... 3-19
White marker
Wind display
World time chart
WPT MK soft key
4-12
3-5
2
TRACK HALT soft key
TRACK RESUME soft key
Trackball
3-19
3-19
2-25
Ｘ
cleaning ....................................................8-3
operation................................................. 1-12
TRAIL COLOR soft key............................... 2-18
TRAIL ON/OFF soft key .............................. 2-18
TRAIL soft key ............................................ 2-17
TRAIL TIME soft key................................... 2-17
Trip alarm ................................................... 3-51
Trip distance resetting................................. 3-55
Troubleshooting
XTE (cross track error) alarm.......................3-50
XTE monitor...........................................3-4, 3-6
Ｙ
Yeoman.........................................................6-8
Ｚ
Zero line......................................................4-20
Zoom...........................................................2-12
ZOOM/D. BOX soft key ...............................2-13
general......................................................8-4
IN-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
|